Docstoc

2011 Chevrolet Aveo Owners Manua

Document Sample
2011 Chevrolet Aveo Owners Manua Powered By Docstoc
					                                    2011 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1     Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1         Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
  Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2                Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1                          Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
  Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3                                                                                     Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17
  Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16                Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1                               Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
  Performance and                                                  Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1       Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25
    Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21               Warning Lights, Gauges, and                                      Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-29
                                                                    Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7          Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1                                  Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21               Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
 Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2                                                                                   Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7   Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
                                                                  Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1               Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
 Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10                                                                                   Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-40
 Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13              Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
 Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14            Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5                Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14          Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1                          General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
 Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16     Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1         Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
                                                                   Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3    Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1                                                                                          Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2                 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
                                                                                                                                    Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3         Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1                     Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6           Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1                           Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11            Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4       Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24               Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5             Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
                               2011 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
 Recommended Fluids,
  Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6
 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13
 Vehicle Data Recording and
  Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
                                                                                           Introduction           iii

                                     This manual describes features that       Canadian Vehicle Owners
                                     may or may not be on your specific
                                     vehicle either because they are           Propriétaires Canadiens
                                     options that you did not purchase or      A French language copy of this
                                     due to changes subsequent to the          manual can be obtained from your
                                     printing of this owner manual.            dealer or from:
The names, logos, emblems,           Please refer to the purchase
                                     documentation relating to your            On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names,
                                     specific vehicle to confirm each of       ce guide en français auprès du
and vehicle body designs appearing
                                     the features found on your vehicle.       concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
in this manual including, but not
                                     For vehicles first sold in Canada,        suivante:
limited to, GM, the GM logo,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET             substitute the name “General              Helm, Incorporated
Emblem, and AVEO are trademarks      Motors of Canada Limited” for             P.O. Box 07130
and/or service marks of General      Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it      Detroit, MI 48207
Motors LLC, its subsidiaries,        appears in this manual.
                                                                               1-800-551-4123
affiliates, or licensors.            Keep this manual in the vehicle for       Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
                                     quick reference.                          française
                                                                               www.helminc.com




Litho in U.S.A.
                                                                 ©
Part No. 20927444 A First Printing                                   2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv      Introduction

Using this Manual                                                                  Symbols
                                                    { WARNING
To quickly locate information about                                                The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the          These mean there is something           labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an               that could hurt you or other            text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the        people.                                 the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where                                                   information relating to a specific
it can be found.                                                                   component, control, message,
                                          Notice: This means there is
                                                                                   gauge, or indicator.
                                          something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and                     property or vehicle damage. This         M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions                                  would not be covered by the              you need to see your owner manual
                                          vehicle's warranty.                      for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
                                                                                   information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or                                                 * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them.                                                                       you need to see a service manual
                                                                                   for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
                                                                                   information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a            A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or     safety symbol which means “Do
death.                                    Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
                                          this happen.”
                                                                       Introduction   v

Vehicle Symbol Chart                  # : Fog Lamps
Here are some additional symbols      . : Fuel Gauge
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more          + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer to   3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the Index.                            Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light            j : LATCH System Child
# : Air Conditioning                  Restraints
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)       * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
g : Audio®Steering Wheel Controls     : : Oil Pressure
or OnStar                             } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light        / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System                   > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control                    7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature        F : Traction Control
O : Exterior Lamps                    M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi   Introduction

                    2 NOTES
                                                                                                                              In Brief   1-1

In Brief                                                        Vehicle Features
                                                                 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    1-16
                                                                 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         1-17
Instrument Panel                                                 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . .                    1-18
                                                                 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . .                     1-18
 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
                                                                 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          1-19
Initial Drive Information                                        Trip Computer (US Only) . . . .                       1-19
 Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3                   Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           1-20
 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4                   Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   1-20
 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
   System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
                                                                Performance and Maintenance
 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5            Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21
 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5    Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
 Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6               Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6         Driving for Better Fuel
 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7                  Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
 Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8                      Roadside Assistance
                                                                  Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
 Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8
                                                                 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
 Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
 Sensing System for Passenger
   Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
 Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
 Steering Wheel
   Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12
 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-2   In Brief

Instrument Panel
                                                                                             In Brief       1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑4.             H. Horn on page 5‑3.                  Initial Drive
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.        I.   Infotainment System. See
   See Turn and Lane-Change                AM-FM Radio on page 7‑3.
                                                                            Information
   Signals on page 6‑3.               J.   Climate Control Systems on       This section provides a brief
C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8.         page 8‑1.                        overview about some of the
                                                                            important features that may or may
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on         K. Ashtray. See Ashtrays on           not be on your specific vehicle.
   page 5‑3.                             page 5‑7.
                                                                            For more detailed information, refer
     Rear Window Wiper/Washer on      L.   Cupholders on page 4‑1.          to each of the features which can be
     page 5‑5 (If Equipped).          M. Cigarette Lighter. See Cigarette   found later in this owner manual.
E. Clock on page 5‑5.                    Lighter on page 5‑6.
F.   Data Link Connector (DLC).       N. Hazard Warning Flashers on
     See Malfunction Indicator Lamp      page 6‑3.
     on page 5‑14.                    O. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
G. Hood Release. See Hood on
   page 10‑6.
1-4      In Brief

Starting the Engine                    Remote Keyless Entry
The vehicle has a                      (RKE) System
Computer-Controlled Cranking           The RKE transmitter is used to
System. It assists in starting the     remotely lock and unlock the doors
engine and protects components.        from up to 20 m (65 ft) away from
If the ignition key is turned to       the vehicle.
START and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine
will continue cranking for a few
seconds or until the engine starts.
If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START, cranking will
be stopped after 15 seconds to                                                             Sedan
prevent damage. To prevent gear                                             Press K to unlock all of the doors.
damage, cranking is not allowed if
the engine is running. Engine                                               Press Q to lock all of the doors.
cranking can be stopped by turning
the ignition key to ACC/                                                    Press V and hold for
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. See                                                  approximately one second to open
Starting the Engine on page 9‑19.                  Hatchback                the trunk on the sedan model.
                                                                            Press 3 to sound the panic alarm
                                                                            on the hatchback model. Press any
                                                                            of the buttons on the transmitter to
                                                                            turn off the alarm.
                                                                                                 In Brief        1-5

The LED light (A) on the transmitter    On vehicles equipped with the
flashes when the buttons on the         central door unlocking system, lock
transmitter are pressed. If the light   or unlock all the doors from the
does not flash, the transmitter         inside using the driver door lock
battery needs to be replaced.           switch.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote         For more information see:
Keyless Entry (RKE) System              .   Door Locks on page 2‑5.
Operation on page 2‑3.
                                        .   Central Door Unlocking System
Door Locks                                  on page 2‑6.
From the outside, lock or unlock the    Liftgate
door using the key or the Remote                                               The handle is located above the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,        To unlock the liftgate on the          right side of the license plate. Pull
if equipped.                            hatchback model from outside the       the handle toward you and raise the
                                        vehicle, use the key in the lock       liftgate.
From the inside, all of the doors can   cylinder or use the RKE transmitter,
be locked and unlocked by pushing       if equipped.                           To lock the liftgate, use the key or
or pulling the manual door lock on                                             the RKE transmitter, if equipped.
each door.
                                                                               The liftgate can also be locked or
                                                                               unlocked by the central door
                                                                               unlocking system.
                                                                               For more information see Liftgate
                                                                               (Hatchback) on page 2‑9.
1-6      In Brief

Trunk Release                            For more information see Trunk on     Power Windows
                                         page 2‑7.

                                         Windows
                                         Manual Windows
                                         Use the window crank to open and
                                         close each window.
The vehicle may have a release
                                         The rear windows do not open fully.
button located on the driver door.
Press it to open the trunk.              For more information see Manual
                                         Windows on page 2‑15.


                                                                               On vehicles with power windows,
                                                                               the switches for all windows are
                                                                               located on the driver door armrest.
                                                                               Each passenger door has a switch
                                                                               for its own window.
                                                                               The ignition must be in ON/RUN to
                                                                               use the power windows. To lower
                                                                               the window, press and hold the
                                                                               switch. To raise the window, lift up
                                                                               on the switch. Release the switch
The vehicle may have a trunk                                                   when the window reaches the
release lever located on the                                                   desired level.
outboard side of the driver seat. Pull
the lever to open the trunk.                                                   For more information see Power
                                                                               Windows on page 2‑15.
                                                                                                 In Brief       1-7

Seat Adjustment                          Seat Height Adjuster                  Manual Lumbar
Manual Seats




                                         Turn the knob on the outboard side    Move the adjustment lever on the
                                         of the seat to adjust the height of   outboard side of the seatback up or
To adjust a manual seat:                 the driver seat cushion.              down to one of three positions to
1. Lift the bar under the front of the   Turn the knob forward to raise and    increase or decrease the lumbar
   seat to unlock it.                    rearward to lower.                    support.
2. Slide the seat to the desired         See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3       The highest position provides the
   position and release the bar.         for more information.                 most support and the lowest
                                                                               position provides the least support.
3. Try to move the seat back and
   forth to be sure it is locked in                                            See Lumbar Adjustment on
   place.                                                                      page 3‑4 for more information.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
for more information.
1-8      In Brief

Reclining Seatbacks                   To return the seatback to the upright   Head Restraint
                                      position:
                                                                              Adjustment
                                      1. Lift the lever fully without
                                         applying pressure to the             The vehicle's front seats have
                                         seatback, and the seatback will      adjustable head restraints in the
                                         return to the upright position.      outboard seating positions.

                                      2. Push and pull on the seatback to     Do not drive until the head restraints
                                         make sure it is locked.              for all occupants are installed and
                                                                              adjusted properly.
                                      See Reclining Seatbacks on
                                      page 3‑4 for more information.          To achieve a comfortable seating
                                                                              position, change the seatback
                                                                              recline angle as little as necessary
                                      Second Row Seats                        while keeping the seat and the head
                                      The rear seatbacks can be folded        restraint height in the proper
To recline a manual seatback:
                                      down to increase cargo space.           position.
1. Lift the lever.
                                      For detailed instructions see Rear      For more information see Head
2. Move the seatback to the           Seats (Sedan) on page 3‑6 or Rear       Restraints on page 3‑2.
   desired position, and then         Seats (Hatchback) on page 3‑8.
   release the lever to lock the
   seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
   make sure it is locked in place.
                                                                                              In Brief       1-9

Safety Belt                           Sensing System for
                                      Passenger Airbag
                                      The passenger sensing system will
                                      turn off the right front passenger
                                      frontal airbag and seat‐mounted
                                      side impact airbag (if equipped)                  United States
                                      under certain conditions. The driver
                                      airbags are not affected by this.
                                      The passenger airbag status
                                      indicator will be visible, near the
                                      clock, located in the center of the
                                      instrument panel when the vehicle is
                                      started.
                                                                                           Canada
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use                                          See Passenger Sensing System on
safety belts properly.                                                       page 3‑31 for important information.
.   Safety Belts on page 3‑11.
.   How to Wear Safety Belts
    Properly on page 3‑14.
.   Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑20.
.   Lower Anchors and Tethers for
    Children (LATCH System) on
    page 3‑48.
1-10      In Brief

Mirror Adjustment                     Power Outside Mirrors                    Interior Mirror
Exterior Mirrors                                                               Hold the inside rearview mirror in
                                                                               the center to move it for a clearer
Manual Outside Mirrors                                                         view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
                                                                               mirror to avoid glare from the
                                                                               headlamps behind you. Push the
                                                                               tab forward for daytime use and pull
                                                                               it for nighttime use.
                                                                               See Manual Rearview Mirror on
                                                                               page 2‑14.



                                      The control is on the instrument
                                      panel, left of the steering wheel.
                                      The ignition must be turned to ON/
The controls for the outside manual   RUN to adjust the mirrors.
mirrors are next to each mirror.      1. Select the mirror by moving the
See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑13.         selector switch to L for the driver
                                         side mirror or R for the
                                         passenger side.
                                      2. Press one of the four arrows on
                                         the control pad to move the
                                         mirror in the desired direction.
                                      See Power Mirrors on page 2‑13.
                                                                                                In Brief       1-11

Steering Wheel                           Interior Lighting                     Exterior Lighting
Adjustment                               Dome Lamp
                                         The vehicle has a dome lamp
                                         located in the overhead console.
                                         Move the switch to the following
                                         positions:
                                         ON: The light comes on and
                                         stays on.
                                         O : The light comes on when a
                                         door is opened. The light turns off
                                         when all the doors are closed.
                                         OFF: The light remains off even          Uplevel Shown, Base Similar
                                         when a door is opened.
                                                                               The lever on the left side of the
The lever is located under the
                                         Be sure all doors and trunk lid or    steering column operates the
steering column, slightly to the left.
                                         hatch are completely closed or the    exterior lamps.
To adjust the steering wheel:            battery may drain.
                                                                               3 : Turns on the headlamps and
1. Pull the lever down.                  For more information about interior   other exterior lamps.
2. Move the steering wheel up or         lighting, see Dome Lamps on
                                                                               The headlamps automatically turn
   down into a comfortable position.     page 6‑5
                                                                               off when the ignition key is turned to
3. Pull the lever up to lock the                                               LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.
   wheel in place.
Do not adjust the tilt lever while
driving.
1-12      In Brief

; : Turns on the parking lamps,        Windshield Wiper/Washer   The lever is located on the right side
together with the taillamps, license                             of the steering column. The ignition
plate lamp, and instrument panel                                 must be turned to ON/RUN to
lights.                                                          operate the windshield wipers.
OFF: Turns all the lamps off,                                    HI: Fast wipes.
except the Daytime Running                                       LO: Slow wipes.
Lamps (DRL).
                                                                 INT: Move to this position for a
For more information, see:                                       delayed wiping cycle. Turn the band
.   Exterior Lamp Controls on                                    on the windshield wiper toward
    page 6‑1.                                                    FAST or SLOW for a shorter or
                                                                 longer delay between wipes. The
.   Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)                                  wiper speed can only be adjusted
    on page 6‑2.                                                 when the lever is in the INT position.
.   Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.                    Sedan Shown
                                                                 OFF: Turns the windshield
                                                                 wipers off.




                                            Hatchback Shown
                                                                                               In Brief       1-13

Misting Function                       Climate Controls
Move the lever toward INT for a        For vehicles with these climate control systems, the heating, cooling, and
single wiping cycle. Hold it there     ventilation can be controlled for the vehicle.
until the windshield wipers start;
then let go. For several wipes, hold
the band toward INT longer.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield washer/wiper
lever toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3. For vehicles with a Rear
Window Wiper/Washer, see Rear
Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5.
                                               Climate Control System with Heater and Air Conditioning

                                       A. Temperature Control                  D. Air Conditioning (A/C)
                                       B. Fan Control                          E. Air Recirculation
                                       C. Air Delivery Mode Control            F.   Rear Window Defogger
1-14     In Brief

                                                                       Transmission
                                                                       Automatic Transmission
                                                                       Hold Mode
                                                                       If the vehicle's transmission has
                                                                       Hold Mode, you can select this
                                                                       mode to allow the automatic
                                                                       transmission to stay in a specific
                                                                       gear range. Select Hold Mode to
                                                                       help the vehicle maintain traction on
                                                                       slippery road surfaces, such as
                 Climate Control System with Heater Only               snow, mud, or ice.

A. Temperature Control                D. Rear Window Defogger
B. Fan Control                        E. Outside Air/Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode Control          See Climate Control Systems on
                                      page 8‑1.
                                                                                                In Brief        1-15

                                       When Hold Mode is selected in           Five-Speed Manual
                                       2 (Second), the transmission will       Transmission
                                       start in 2 (Second) gear instead of
                                       1 (First), helping to reduce wheel      Up‐Shift Light
                                       spin when starting out on slippery
                                       surface such as snow, mud or ice.
                                       Since selecting Hold Mode in
                                       D4 (Drive) locks the transmission in
                                       3 (Third), and prevents downshifts to
                                       2 (Second) or 1 (First), acceleration
                                       from a stop or near stop on dry         Vehicles equipped with a manual
                                       pavement will be slower than            transmission may have an up-shift
Press the HOLD button on the shift     expected. Hold Mode should not be       light. This light indicates when to
lever console to turn on Hold Mode.    selected during these situations.       shift to the next higher gear for
Press the button again to turn off                                             better fuel economy.
                                       See Automatic Transmission on
Hold Mode, and return to normal
                                       page 9‑25.                              For the best fuel economy,
automatic transmission operation.
                                       Cold Weather Shifting                   accelerate slowly and shift when the
When Hold Mode is selected in                                                  light comes on, if weather, road, and
D4 (Drive), the transmission is held   When operating the vehicle in           traffic conditions allow.
in 3 (Third) gear, which locks out     severe cold conditions, the
D4 (Drive). This allows for engine     transmission may be prevented           It is normal for the light to go on
braking when slowing from higher       from shifting into D4 gear until the    and off if the accelerator position
speeds.                                transmission fluid has warmed up to     changes quickly. Ignore the light
                                       its operational temperature.            during downshifts.
1-16      In Brief

Reverse Lockout                         Vehicle Features                      When the system is on, press and
The manual transmission is                                                    release O to mute the system.
equipped with a lock ring to prevent    Radio(s)                              Press and release O again to turn
shifting into R (Reverse). To shift                                           the sound back on.
into R (Reverse), press down
the clutch pedal, lift up the ring on                                         BAND: Press to choose FM, AM,
the shift lever, and shift into                                               or XM™ (if equipped).
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch                                             u   SEEK: Press to seek the next
pedal slowly while pressing the                                               radio station with a strong signal in
accelerator pedal.                                                            the selected band.
See Manual Transmission on                                                    t SEEK: Press to seek the
page 9‑29.                                                                    previous radio station with a strong
                                                                              signal in the selected band.
                                                                              [ TUNE:    Press to go to the next
                                                                              station manually.
                                              Radio with CD Shown             r TUNE: Press to go to the
                                        O:   Press and release to turn the    previous station manually.
                                        system on. Press and hold this knob   SCAN/AST: Press to scan radio
                                        for more than two seconds to turn     stations. Press and hold to use
                                        the system off.                       Automatic Store.
                                        Turn to increase or decrease the
                                        volume.
                                                                                                In Brief         1-17

CD/AUX: Press to play a CD when        Storing a Favorite Station              Satellite Radio
listening to the radio. CDP appears
                                       A maximum of 36 stations can be         XM is a satellite radio service
on the display when the CD player
                                       programmed as favorites using the       that is based in the 48 contiguous
has been selected. The CD symbol
                                       six pushbuttons positioned below        United States and 10 Canadian
will appear on the display when a
                                       the radio station frequency labels      provinces. XM satellite radio has a
CD is loaded. Press CD/AUX while
                                       and by using the radio favorites        wide variety of programming
a CD is playing to pause the CD.
                                       page button (FAV button). Press the     and commercial-free music,
PAUSE flashes on the display.
                                       FAV button to go through up to six      coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
Press CD/AUX again to start playing
                                       pages of favorites, each having six     sound.
the CD. Press CD/AUX to play a CD
                                       favorite stations available per page.
when listening to the audio contents                                           A fee is required to receive the XM
                                       If Automatic Store is used, then four
from another device (AUX mode).                                                service.
                                       pages of favorites are available.
CDP appears on the display when
                                       Each page of favorites can contain      For more information, refer to:
the CD player has been selected.
                                       any combination of AM, FM,
The CD symbol will appear on the                                               .   www.xmradio.com or call
                                       or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
display when a CD is loaded.                                                       1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
                                       See “Storing a Favorite Station”
Press to play a CD while a portable                                            .   www.xmradio.ca or call
                                       under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑3
audio device is playing. Press CD/                                                 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
                                       and CD Player on page 7‑10.
AUX a second time for the system                                               See “XM Satellite Radio Service”
to begin playing audio from the                                                under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑3
connected portable audio player.                                               and CD Player on page 7‑10.
The portable audio device continues
playing until it is turned off.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Introduction on page 7‑1.
1-18       In Brief

Portable Audio Devices                   Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack, located
on the lower right side of the audio
faceplate. External devices such as
iPods®, laptop computers, MP3
players, etc. can be connected to
the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input
jack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input
jack cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”
under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑3                                                Side View of the Volume Control
and CD Player on page 7‑10.
                                         Front View of the Steering Wheel   If the vehicle has this feature, some
                                                     Controls               audio controls can be adjusted at
                                                                            the steering wheel.
                                                                            PWR: Press and release to turn the
                                                                            system on and off.
                                                                            When the system is on, press and
                                                                            release for a short time to mute the
                                                                            system. Press and release again to
                                                                            turn the sound back on.
                                                                                                In Brief        1-19

+ VOLUME − : Press the                  Cruise Control                          Trip Computer (US Only)
toggle bar located below the
+ VOLUME − to adjust the volume.                                                The vehicle may have a trip
                                                                                computer. It provides the driver with
MODE: Press and release this                                                    driving information such as the
button multiple times to cycle                                                  driving distance for the remaining
through the audio playback options                                              fuel, outside temperature, average
that are available on the vehicle.                                              fuel economy, and driving time.
SEEK: Press and release to go to                                                The trip computer button is located
the next preset station, or CD track.                                           in the lower right area of the
Press and hold for a long time to go                                            tachometer. Each time you press it,
to the next AM, FM, or XM station,                                              the display cycles through the
or to fast forward through CD tracks.                                           available choices.
For more information, see Steering                                              See Trip Computer (US Only) on
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.             For vehicles with cruise control, the   page 5‑21.
                                        buttons are located on the right side
                                        of the steering wheel.
                                        I / O : Press to turn the cruise
                                        control on or off.
                                        RES+: Press briefly to make the
                                        vehicle resume to a previously set
                                        speed, or press and hold to
                                        accelerate.
                                        SET−: Press to set the speed or
                                        make the vehicle decelerate.
                                        See Cruise Control on page 9‑32.
1-20      In Brief

Power Outlets                           Sunroof                                To vent the sunroof, open the
                                                                               sunshade and then press and hold
Accessory power outlets can be                                                 the driver side switch. To close,
used to plug in electrical equipment,                                          press the passenger side switch.
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
                                                                               To fully open the sunroof, press and
The accessory power outlet is                                                  hold the passenger side switch. The
located next to the parking brake on                                           sunshade will open with the sunroof.
the center console.                                                            To close, press the driver side
Remove the cover to access and                                                 switch. Manually close the
replace when not in use.                                                       sunshade.
The accessory power outlet is                                                  See Sunroof on page 2‑16.
operational when the ignition is
turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN.
                                        On vehicles with this feature, the
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.          switch is on the headliner between
                                        the sun visors and can only be
                                        operated when the ignition is turned
                                        to ON/RUN.
                                                                                                In Brief        1-21

Performance and                        During cooler conditions, the low tire   Engine Oil Life System
                                       pressure warning light may appear
Maintenance                            when the vehicle is first started and    The engine oil life system calculates
                                       then turn off. This may be an early      engine oil life based on vehicle use
                                                                                and displays a change engine oil
Tire Pressure Monitor                  indicator that the tire pressures are
                                                                                light when it is necessary to change
                                       getting low and the tires need to be
This vehicle may have a Tire           inflated to the proper pressure.         the engine oil and filter.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
                                       The TPMS does not replace normal         Resetting the Oil Life System
                                       monthly tire maintenance. It is the      1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
                                       driver’s responsibility to maintain         with the engine off.
                                       correct tire pressures.
                                                                                2. Fully press and release the
                                       See Tire Pressure Monitor System            accelerator pedal three times
                                       on page 10‑50.                              within five seconds.
The TPMS warning light alerts you                                               3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
to a significant loss in pressure of                                            See Engine Oil Life System on
one of the vehicle's tires. If the                                              page 10‑12.
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑12. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
1-22       In Brief

Hood Release                                                                    Driving for Better Fuel
To open the hood:                                                               Economy
                                                                                Driving habits can affect fuel
                                                                                mileage. Here are some driving tips
                                                                                to get the best fuel economy
                                                                                possible.
                                                                                .   Avoid fast starts and accelerate
                                                                                    smoothly.
                                                                                .   Brake gradually and avoid
                                                                                    abrupt stops.
                                          3. Lift the hood and securely place   .   Avoid idling the engine for long
                                             the hood prop into the slot on         periods of time.
                                             the inner fender.                  .   When road and weather
1. Pull the hood release handle           See Hood on page 10‑6.                    conditions are appropriate, use
   inside the vehicle. It is located                                                cruise control.
   on the lower left side of the
   instrument panel.
2. At the front of the vehicle, lift up
   on the secondary hood release
   lever, located under the front
   center of the vehicle.
                                                                                               In Brief      1-23
.   Always follow posted speed
    limits or drive more slowly when
                                       Roadside Assistance                     Roadside Assistance and OnStar
    conditions require.                Program                                 If you have a current OnStar
                                       U.S.: 1-800-243-8872                    subscription, press the Q button
.   Keep vehicle tires properly
                                                                               and the current GPS location will be
    inflated.                          TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438               sent to an OnStar advisor who will
.   Combine several trips into a       Canada: 1-800-268-6800                  assess your problem, contact
    single trip.                                                               Roadside Assistance, and relay
                                       As the owner of a new Chevrolet,        your exact location to get the help
.   Replace the vehicle's tires with   you are automatically enrolled in the
    the same TPC Spec number                                                   you need.
                                       Roadside Assistance program. This
    molded into the tire's sidewall    program provides technically trained    Online Owner Center
    near the size.                     advisors who are available 24 hours     The Online Owner Center is a
.   Follow recommended scheduled       a day, 365 days a year, to give         complimentary service that includes
    maintenance.                       minor repair information or make        online service reminders, vehicle
                                       towing arrangements.                    maintenance tips, online owner
                                       For more information see Roadside       manual, special privileges,
                                       Assistance Program on page 13‑6.        and more.
                                                                               Sign up today at:
                                                                               www.chevyownercenter.com
                                                                               (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-24      In Brief

OnStar®                               How OnStar Service Works               (1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
                                      Q:   Push this blue button to          1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to
                                      connect to a specially trained         speak with an OnStar advisor
                                      OnStar Advisor to verify your          24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
                                      account information and to answer      For a full description of OnStar
                                      questions.                             services and system limitations, see
                                      ] : Push this red emergency            the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
                                      button to get priority help from       glove box.
For vehicles with an active OnStar    specially trained OnStar emergency     OnStar service is subject to the
subscription, OnStar uses several     advisors.                              OnStar terms and conditions
innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of   X : Push this button for hands‐free,   included in the OnStar Subscriber
                                      voice‐activated calling and to give    Information.
safety, security, navigation,
diagnostics, and calling services.    voice commands for Hands‐Free          OnStar service requires wireless
                                      Calling.                               communication networks and the
Automatic Crash Response                                                     Global Positioning System (GPS)
                                      Automatic Crash Response,
In a crash, built‐in sensors can      Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,     satellite network. Not all OnStar
automatically alert an OnStar         Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle     services are available everywhere
advisor who is immediately            Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,       or on all vehicles at all times.
connected to the vehicle to see if    Roadside Assistance, and               OnStar service can’t work unless
you need help.                        Hands‐Free Calling are available on    your vehicle is in a place where
                                      most vehicles. Not all OnStar          OnStar has an agreement with a
                                      services are available on all          wireless service provider for service
                                      vehicles. For more information see     in that area, and the wireless
                                      the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit      service provider has coverage,
                                      www.onstar.com (U.S.) or               network capacity, reception, and
                                      www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact        technology compatible with OnStar's
                                      OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR               service. Service involving location
                                                                                   In Brief   1-25

information about your vehicle can’t      Your Responsibility
work unless GPS signals are
                                          Increase the volume of the radio if
available, unobstructed, and
                                          the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
compatible with the OnStar
hardware. The vehicle has to have a       If the light next to the OnStar
working electrical system and             buttons is red, the system may not
adequate battery power for the            be functioning properly. Push the Q
OnStar equipment to operate.              button and request a vehicle
OnStar service may not work if the        diagnostic. If the light appears clear
OnStar equipment isn’t properly           (no light appears), your OnStar
installed or you haven’t maintained       subscription has expired and all
it and your vehicle is in good            services have been deactivated.
working order and in compliance
                                          Push the Q button to confirm that
with all government regulations.
If you try to add, connect, or modify     the OnStar equipment is active.
any equipment or software in your
vehicle, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems OnStar can’t
control may prevent service to you,
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather, electrical system design
and architecture of your vehicle,
damage to important parts of your
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
network congestion or jamming.
1-26   In Brief

                  2 NOTES
                                                                                                                       Keys, Doors and Windows   2-1

Keys, Doors and                                                   Exterior Mirrors
                                                                   Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          2-13
Windows                                                            Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
                                                                   Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
                                                                                                                       2-13
                                                                                                                       2-13
                                                                   Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        2-14
Keys and Locks                                                    Interior Mirrors
 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   2-2    Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14
 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
  System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        2-3   Windows
 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)                                        Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   2-14
  System Operation . . . . . . . . . . .                    2-3    Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . .              2-15
 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           2-5    Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .             2-15
 Central Door Unlocking                                            Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    2-16
  System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        2-6
 Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .                   2-6   Roof
 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           2-6    Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Doors
 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
 Liftgate (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle Security
 Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          2-10
 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . .                     2-10
 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       2-12
 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . .                   2-12
2-2     Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks                                                                 Your vehicle may have an electronic
                                                                               immobilizer designed to protect your
                                                                               car against theft. If so, only keys
Keys                                                                           with the correct electronic code can
                                                                               be used to start the vehicle. See
         { WARNING                                                             Immobilizer Operation on page 2‑12
                                                                               for additional information. If a
Leaving children in a vehicle with                                             replacement key or an additional
the ignition key is dangerous for                                              key is needed, it must be purchased
many reasons. Children or others                                               from your dealer or certified
could be badly injured or even                                                 locksmith.
killed. They could operate the                                                 Notice: If the keys get locked in
power windows or other controls        The key can be used for the ignition,   the vehicle, it may have to be
or even make the vehicle move.         doors, and all other locks.             damaged to get them out. Always
The windows will function with the                                             carry a spare key.
                                       The key has a key code tag that the
keys in the ignition and children
                                       dealer or qualified locksmith can       In an emergency, contact Roadside
could be seriously injured or killed
                                       use to make new keys. Store this        Assistance. See Roadside
if caught in the path of a closing     information in a safe place, not in     Assistance Program on page 13‑6
window. Do not leave the keys in       your vehicle.                           for more information.
a vehicle with children.
                                                                       Keys, Doors and Windows                   2-3

Remote Keyless Entry                   Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System                           (RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on       The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 13‑16 for information             transmitter functions work up to
regarding Part 15 of the Federal       20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.
Communications Commission (FCC)        There are other conditions which
rules and Industry Canada              can affect the performance of the
Standards RSS-210/220/310.             transmitter. See Remote Keyless
If there is a decrease in the RKE      Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
operating range:
.   Check the distance. The                                                                  Sedan
    transmitter may be too far from
    the vehicle.                                                             The following functions may be
                                                                             available if the vehicle has RKE:
.   Check the location. Other
    vehicles or objects may be                                               Q (Lock):     Press to lock all of the
    blocking the signal.                                                     doors. If all of the doors and the
                                                                             trunk or liftgate are closed, the
.   Check the transmitter's battery.
                                                                             hazard lamps flash once and the
    See “Battery Replacement” later
                                                                             horn will sound to indicate that
    in this section.
                                                                             locking has occurred and the
.   If the transmitter is still not                                          theft-deterrent system is active.
    working correctly, see your                     Hatchback
    dealer or a qualified technician
    for service.
2-4      Keys, Doors and Windows

K (Unlock): Press to unlock               Programming Transmitters to            To replace the battery:
all of the doors. The hazard              the Vehicle                            1. Remove the screw from the back
lamps flash twice to indicate that        Only RKE transmitters programmed          of the cover and open the cover
unlocking has occurred and that           to the vehicle will work. If a            of the transmitter.
the theft-deterrent system is             transmitter is lost or stolen, a
deactivated. If the doors are not                                                2. Pull the transmitter out of the
                                          replacement can be purchased and          cover and carefully turn the
opened within 30 seconds, the             programmed through your dealer.
doors will lock again.                                                              circle cover of the transmitter
                                          When the replacement transmitter is       unit toward open.
3 (Panic) (Hatchback):       Press to     programmed to the vehicle, all
sound the panic alarm. The hazard         remaining transmitters must also be    3. Remove the battery.
lamps will flash and the panic alarm      programmed. Any lost or stolen         4. Insert the new battery,
will stay on for about 30 seconds.        transmitters no longer work once the      positive side facing up.
Press any of the buttons on the           new transmitter is programmed.            Use one three-volt, CR1620,
transmitter to turn off the alarm.        Each vehicle can have up to               or equivalent, type battery.
V (Remote Trunk Release)                  five transmitters programmed to it.
                                                                                 5. Turn the circle cover of the
(Sedan): Press and hold for               Battery Replacement                       transmitter unit toward close and
approximately one second to open                                                    put the transmitter unit in the
the trunk.                                Replace the battery if the LED on         cover.
                                          the transmitter does not flash when
The LED light (A) on the transmitter      you press the buttons.                 6. Put the two halves back together
flashes when the buttons on the                                                     and replace the screw. Make
transmitter are pressed. If the light     Notice: When replacing the                sure the cover is on tightly, so
does not flash, see “Battery              battery, do not touch any of the          water will not get in.
Replacement” in this section.             circuitry on the transmitter. Static
                                          from your body could damage the        7. Test the transmitter operation.
The buttons do not operate and the        transmitter.
theft-deterrent system does not
activate if the key is in the ignition.
                                                                    Keys, Doors and Windows                  2-5

Door Locks                                WARNING (Continued)
                                                                           There are several ways to lock and
                                                                           unlock the vehicle.
         { WARNING                    .   Young children who get into
                                                                           From the outside, use your key or
                                                                           the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Unlocked doors can be                     unlocked vehicles may be
                                                                           transmitter. See Remote Keyless
dangerous.                                unable to get out. A child can   Entry (RKE) System Operation on
                                          be overcome by extreme heat      page 2‑3.
 .   Passengers, especially               and can suffer permanent
     children, can easily open the        injuries or even death from      To manually unlock the front doors
     doors and fall out of a moving       heat stroke. Always lock the     from the outside, insert the key and
     vehicle. When a door is              vehicle whenever leaving it.     turn it counterclockwise. To
     locked, the handle will not                                           manually lock the doors, insert the
     open it. The chance of being     .   Outsiders can easily enter       key and turn it clockwise.
     thrown out of the vehicle in a       through an unlocked door
                                          when you slow down or stop       All doors, except for the driver door,
     crash is increased if the                                             can be locked by pushing down the
     doors are not locked. So, all        your vehicle. Locking your
                                          doors can help prevent this      manual door lock and then closing
     passengers should wear                                                the door. On vehicles with power
     safety belts properly and the        from happening.
                                                                           locks, the driver door can only by
     doors should be locked                                                locked from the outside by using the
     whenever the vehicle is                                               key or the optional RKE transmitter.
     driven.
                                                                           From the inside, all of the doors can
                        (Continued)
                                                                           be locked and unlocked by pushing
                                                                           or pulling the manual door lock
                                                                           located on each door.
2-6      Keys, Doors and Windows

Central Door Unlocking                    Safety Locks                       Using the Safety Locks
System                                                                       1. Move the lever up to lock.
The vehicle may be equipped with                                             2. Close the door.
the central door unlocking system.                                           3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to the
This system is activated from the                                               other rear door lock.
driver door.
                                                                             Notice: Pulling the inside door
From the outside, lock or unlock all                                         handle while the rear door
the doors by using either the key or                                         security locks are engaged could
the RKE transmitter, if equipped.                                            damage your vehicle. Do not pull
From the inside, lock or unlock all                                          the inside door handle while the
the doors by using the driver door                                           rear door security locks are
lock switch.                                                                 engaged.
                                                                             The rear doors on the vehicle
Door Ajar Reminder                        The vehicle has safety locks on
                                                                             cannot be opened from the inside
                                          each rear door that prevent
                                                                             while this feature is in use.
                                          passengers from opening the rear
                                          doors from the inside.




If one of the doors, trunk, or liftgate
is not closed properly while the
ignition is on, the door ajar light on
the instrument panel comes on and
stays on until the doors are closed.
                                                                         Keys, Doors and Windows                 2-7

Opening a Rear Door When the            Doors
Safety Lock is On                                                                    WARNING (Continued)
1. Unlock the door from the inside.     Trunk                                    .   Adjust the Climate Control
2. Open the door from the outside.                                                   system to a setting that
If you do not cancel the safety lock,             { WARNING                          brings in only outside air and
                                                                                     set the fan speed to the
adults or older children who ride in                                                 highest setting. See Climate
the rear will not be able to open the   Exhaust gases can enter the
                                        vehicle if it is driven with the             Control System in the Index.
rear door from the inside.
                                        liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with      .   If the vehicle is equipped with
Canceling the Safety Locks              any objects that pass through the            a power liftgate, disable the
1. Unlock the door from the inside      seal between the body and the                power liftgate function.
   and open the door from the           trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine        For more information about
   outside.                             exhaust contains Carbon                carbon monoxide, see Engine
                                        Monoxide (CO) which cannot be          Exhaust on page 9‑24.
2. Move the lever down to unlock.
                                        seen or smelled. It can cause
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to the          unconsciousness and even death.
   other rear door lock.                                                      To open the trunk on a sedan from
                                        If the vehicle must be driven with    outside of the vehicle, insert the key
The rear door locks can now be          the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:    into the lock cylinder and turn the
locked and unlocked normally.
                                         .   Close all of the windows.        key clockwise or use the RKE
                                                                              transmitter, if equipped. See Remote
                                         .   Fully open the air outlets on    Keyless Entry (RKE) System
                                             or under the instrument          Operation on page 2‑3.
                                             panel.
                                                                (Continued)
2-8      Keys, Doors and Windows

Remote Trunk Release                                                             handle is only intended to aid a
                                                                                 person trapped in a latched trunk,
This feature allows the trunk to be
                                                                                 enabling them to open the trunk
opened from inside the vehicle. The
                                                                                 from the inside.
vehicle may have either a release
button or a release lever.




The vehicle may have a release           The vehicle may have a trunk
button on the driver door. Press it to   release lever on the outboard side
open the trunk.                          of the driver seat. Pull the lever to
                                         open the trunk.
                                         When closing the trunk, close from
                                         the center to ensure that it fully      There is a glow-in-the-dark
                                         latches.                                emergency trunk release handle on
                                                                                 the underside of the trunk lid. This
                                         Emergency Trunk Release                 handle will glow following exposure
                                         Handle                                  to light. Pull the release handle
                                                                                 down to open the trunk from the
                                         Notice: Do not use the                  inside.
                                         emergency trunk release handle
                                         as a tie-down or anchor point
                                         when securing items in the trunk
                                         as it could damage the handle.
                                         The emergency trunk release
                                                                         Keys, Doors and Windows               2-9

Liftgate (Hatchback)                         WARNING (Continued)
           { WARNING                     .   Adjust the Climate Control
Exhaust gases can enter the                  system to a setting that
vehicle if it is driven with the             brings in only outside air and
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with          set the fan speed to the
any objects that pass through the            highest setting. See Climate
seal between the body and the                Control System in the Index.
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine          .   If the vehicle is equipped with
exhaust contains Carbon                      a power liftgate, disable the
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be                power liftgate function.
                                                                               The handle is above the right side of
seen or smelled. It can cause           For more information about             the license plate. Pull the handle
unconsciousness and even death.         carbon monoxide, see Engine            toward you and raise the liftgate.
If the vehicle must be driven with      Exhaust on page 9‑24.
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
  .   Close all of the windows.        To unlock the liftgate on a
                                       hatchback from outside of the
  .   Fully open the air outlets on    vehicle, insert the key in the lock
      or under the instrument          cylinder and turn it counterclockwise
      panel.                           or use the RKE transmitter,
                         (Continued)   if equipped.
2-10       Keys, Doors and Windows

When closing the liftgate, close from   Vehicle Security                       2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF and
the center to ensure that it fully                                                remove the key from the ignition.
latches.                                This vehicle has theft-deterrent
                                                                                  If the key is inserted in the
                                        features; however, they do not make
To lock the liftgate, insert the key                                              ignition, the transmitter will not
                                        it impossible to steal.
into the lock cylinder and turn it                                                arm the theft-deterrent system.
clockwise or use the RKE
transmitter, if equipped.               Anti-Theft Alarm System                3. Lock the doors by pressing the
                                                                                  lock button on the RKE
The liftgate can also be locked or      Your vehicle may have a content           transmitter.
unlocked by the central door            theft-deterrent system.
                                                                                  .    The LED light on the
unlocking system or RKE                 The theft-deterrent system will not            transmitter will flash once.
transmitter, if equipped. See Central   arm when you lock the doors using
Door Unlocking System on page 2‑6       the key or the manual door lock.
                                                                                  .    All of the doors will lock.
and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)          It arms only when you use the             .    The hazard warning lamps
System Operation on page 2‑3.           Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)                     will flash once and the horn
                                        transmitter.                                   will sound.
                                        Arming the System                         .    The security light will flash
                                                                                       continuously to indicate that
                                        To arm the system, do the following:
                                                                                       the theft-deterrent system is
                                        1. Close the doors, the windows,               armed . The security light is
                                           the hood, and the trunk or                  located on the center of the
                                           liftgate.                                   instrument panel near
                                           Make sure that the windows are              the clock.
                                           closed, as the system can be
                                           armed even if the windows
                                           are open.
                                                                      Keys, Doors and Windows                  2-11

To avoid activating the alarm by      Disarming the System                    How the System Alarm is
accident, do one of the following:                                            Activated
                                      To disarm the system, do one of the
.   Unlock the driver or passenger    following:                              If a door or the trunk or liftgate is
    front door using the key.                                                 opened without using the key or the
                                      .   Unlock the driver or passenger
.   Press the unlock button on the        front door using the key.           RKE transmitter, the horn will sound
    RKE transmitter.                                                          and the lamps will flash for up to
                                      .   Press the unlock button on the      30 seconds.
Unlocking a door any other way will       RKE transmitter.
activate the alarm when a door or                                             How to Turn Off the System
                                          ‐ The LED light on the
the trunk or liftgate is opened.                                              Alarm
                                            transmitter will flash once.
If you do not want to arm the                                                 If the system alarm is active, it can
                                          ‐ All of the doors will unlock.
theft-deterrent system, lock the                                              be deactivated using one of the
vehicle using the key or the manual       ‐ The hazard warning lamps will     following methods:
door locks.                                 flash twice.                      .   Press one of the buttons on the
                                      If the door is not opened or if the         RKE transmitter.
                                      engine is not started within
                                      30 seconds after disarming the
                                                                              .   Unlock the driver or passenger
                                      system using the transmitter, all of        front door using the key.
                                      the doors will automatically lock and   Otherwise, the alarm will
                                      the theft-deterrent mode will re-arm.   automatically stop after 30 seconds.
                                                                              The system will then lock the doors
                                                                              and re-arm the theft-deterrent
                                                                              system.
2-12      Keys, Doors and Windows

How to Detect a Tamper                   The system is automatically armed         See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
Condition                                when the key is removed from the          page 10‑36. If the engine still does
                                         ignition. You do not have to              not start with the other key, your
If the hazard warning lamps              manually arm or disarm the system.        vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
flash once when you press the lock                                                 does start, the first key may be
button on the RKE transmitter, the       The vehicle has a special key that
                                         works with the theft-deterrent            faulty. See your dealer who can
theft-deterrent system alarm was                                                   have a new key made.
activated while you were away.           system. There is a transponder in
                                         the key head that is electronically       Up to 10 keys may be programmed
Immobilizer                              coded. The correct key will start the     for the vehicle. If you lose or
                                         vehicle. An invalid key immobilizes       damage your keys, only a dealer
See Radio Frequency Statement on         the engine. If the key is ever            can have new keys made.
page 13‑16 for information               damaged, you may not be able to
regarding Part 15 of the Federal                                                   If you are ever driving and the
                                         start the vehicle.                        security light comes on and stays
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada                When trying to start the vehicle,         on, you will be able to restart the
Standards RSS-210/220/310.               if the engine does not start and the      engine if you turn it off. The
                                         security light flashes or comes on,       theft-deterrent system, however, is
                                         there may be a problem with the           not working properly and must be
Immobilizer Operation                    theft-deterrent system. Turn the          serviced by your dealer. Your
The vehicle may have a passive           ignition off and try again.               vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system.                  If the engine still does not start, and   theft-deterrent system at this time.
The immobilizer system prevents          the key appears to be undamaged,          In an emergency, contact Roadside
the vehicle from being started by an     try another key. At this time, you        Assistance. See Roadside
unauthorized person by isolating the     may also want to check the fuse.          Assistance Program on page 13‑6.
power supply to the ignition system,
the fuel pump, and the fuel injectors.
                                                                      Keys, Doors and Windows                 2-13

Exterior Mirrors                        Manual Mirrors                        Power Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

          { WARNING
 A convex mirror can make things,
 like other vehicles, look farther
 away than they really are. If you
 cut too sharply into the right lane,
 you could hit a vehicle on the
 right. Check the inside mirror or
 glance over your shoulder before
 changing lanes.
                                        The controls for the outside manual   The control is on the instrument
                                        mirrors are next to each mirror.      panel, left of the steering wheel.
The passenger side mirror is convex     Manually fold the mirrors inward to   The ignition must be turned to ON/
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is    prevent damage when going             RUN to adjust the mirrors.
curved so more can be seen from         through an automatic car wash. To
the driver seat.                        fold, pull the mirror toward the
                                        vehicle. Push the mirror outward to
                                        return it to the original position.
2-14       Keys, Doors and Windows

To adjust the mirrors:                 Interior Mirrors                       Windows
1. Select the mirror you want to
   adjust by moving the selector
   switch to L for the driver side
                                       Manual Rearview Mirror                          { WARNING
   mirror or R for the passenger       Hold the inside rearview mirror in
                                                                              Leaving children, helpless adults,
   side mirror.                        the center to move it for a clearer
                                                                              or pets in a vehicle with the
                                       view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
2. Press one of the four arrows on                                            windows closed is dangerous.
                                       mirror to avoid glare from the
   the control pad to move the         headlamps behind you. Push the         They can be overcome by the
   mirror in the desired direction.    tab forward for daytime use and pull   extreme heat and suffer
Manually fold the mirrors inward to    it for nighttime use.                  permanent injuries or even death
prevent damage when going                                                     from heat stroke. Never leave a
through an automatic car wash. To                                             child, a helpless adult, or a pet
fold, pull the mirror toward the                                              alone in a vehicle, especially with
vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to                                          the windows closed in warm or
return it to its original position.                                           hot weather.

Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with this feature:
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear
Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger” under Climate Control
Systems on page 8‑1 for more
information.
                                                                    Keys, Doors and Windows                 2-15

                                      Power Windows

                                               { WARNING
                                      Leaving children in a vehicle with
                                      the keys is dangerous for many
                                      reasons. Children or others could
                                      be badly injured or even killed.
                                      They could operate the power
                                      windows or other controls or even
                                      make the vehicle move. The
                                      windows will function and they
The vehicle aerodynamics are                                                 On vehicles with power windows,
                                      could be seriously injured or killed
designed to improve fuel economy                                             the switches are on the driver door.
                                      if caught in the path of a closing
performance. This may result in a                                            In addition, each passenger door
pulsing sound when either rear        window. Do not leave keys in a         has a switch for its own window.
window is down and the front          vehicle with children.
                                                                             The ignition must be turned to ON/
windows are up. To reduce the         When there are children in the         RUN to use the power windows.
sound, open either a front window     rear seat use the window lockout       To lower the window, press and hold
or the sunroof (if equipped).         button to prevent unintentional        the switch. To raise the window, lift
                                      operation of the windows.              up on the switch. Release the
Manual Windows                                                               switch when the window reaches
Use the window crank to open and                                             the desired level.
close each window.
The rear windows do not open fully.
2-16      Keys, Doors and Windows

Window Lockout                          Sun Visors                              Roof
                                        To block out glare, swing down the
                                        sun visors. You can also remove         Sunroof
                                        them from the center mount and
                                        swing them to the side.
                                        Visor Vanity Mirror
                                        Vanity mirrors are on the back of the
                                        sun visors. Swing down the sun
                                        visor to expose the vanity mirror.




The window lockout is with the
driver power window switches.
Press the lockout button to disable                                             On vehicles with this feature, the
the rear window switches. The                                                   switch is on the headliner between
driver can still operate all of the                                             the sun visors.
windows with the lockout on. Press
the lockout button again to return to                                           The sunroof only operates when the
normal window operation.                                                        ignition is turned to ON/RUN. The
                                                                                sunroof can be opened to a vent
                                                                                position or it can be opened all of
                                                                                the way.
                                                                      Keys, Doors and Windows   2-17

To open the sunroof to the vent
position, open the sunshade. Then
press and hold the driver side of the
switch. To close the sunroof, press
and hold the passenger side of the
switch until the sunroof reaches the
desired position.
To fully open the sunroof, press and
hold the passenger side of the
switch. The sunshade opens with
the sunroof. To close the sunroof,
press and hold the driver side of the
switch. The sunroof will stop if the    Dirt and debris may collect on the
switch is released during operation.    sunroof seal or in the tracks. This
Close the sunshade manually.            could cause an issue with sunroof
                                        operation, noise, or plugging of the
In both the vent and fully open
                                        water drainage system. Periodically
positions, the air flow can be
                                        open the sunroof and remove any
adjusted by pushing and holding the
                                        obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
switch until the sunroof moves to
                                        sunroof seal and roof sealing area
the desired position.
                                        using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
The sunroof cannot be opened or         water. Do not remove grease from
closed if the vehicle has an            sunroof.
electrical failure.
2-18   Keys, Doors and Windows

                                 2 NOTES
                                                                                                                       Seats and Restraints                                3-1

Seats and                                                 Airbag System
                                                           Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
                                                                                                                        Lower Anchors and Tethers
                                                                                                                         for Children (LATCH
Restraints                                                 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-26
                                                           When Should an Airbag
                                                                                                                         System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
                                                                                                                        Replacing LATCH System
                                                                                                                                                                           3-48

                                                            Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28      Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .             3-55
Head Restraints                                            What Makes an Airbag                                         Securing Child Restraints
 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2          Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29      (Right Front Seat
                                                           How Does an Airbag                                            Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   3-55
Front Seats                                                 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29        Securing Child Restraints
 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3           What Will You See After an                                    (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . .              3-59
 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4                Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4               Passenger Sensing
                                                            System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Rear Seats                                                 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
 Rear Seats (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6               Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
 Rear Seats (Hatchback) . . . . . . 3-8                    Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belts                                                Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-36
 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11     Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37
 How to Wear Safety Belts                                  Replacing Airbag System
  Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14     Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38
 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20             Child Restraints
 Safety Belt Use During                                    Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         3-38
  Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22       Infants and Young
 Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-22                 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   3-41
 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-23                  Child Restraint Systems . . . . .                    3-43
 Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23           Where to Put the Restraint . . .                     3-46
 Replacing Safety Belt System
  Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-2      Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.

          { WARNING
 With head restraints that are not
 installed and adjusted properly,
 there is a greater chance that
 occupants will suffer a neck/
 spinal injury in a crash. Do not      Adjust the head restraint so that the   Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
 drive until the head restraints for   top of the restraint is at the same     To lower the head restraint, press
 all occupants are installed and       height as the top of the occupant's     the button, located on the top of the
 adjusted properly.                    head. This position reduces the         seatback, and push the
                                       chances of a neck injury in a crash.    restraint down.
                                                                               Push down on the head restraint
                                                                               after the button is released to make
                                                                               sure that it is locked in place.
                                                                               The rear seats have headrests that
                                                                               are adjustable up and down.
                                                                               The head restraints and headrests
                                                                               are not designed to be removed.
                                                                            Seats and Restraints            3-3

Front Seats                                                                 Seat Height Adjuster

Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats

        { WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and         To adjust a manual seat:
confuse you, or make you push a    1. Lift the bar under the front of the
pedal when you do not want to.        seat to unlock it.                    Turn the knob on the outboard side
Adjust the driver seat only when                                            of the seat to adjust the height of
                                   2. Slide the seat to the desired         the driver seat cushion.
the vehicle is not moving.            position and release the bar.
                                                                            Turn the knob forward to raise and
                                   3. Try to move the seat back and         rearward to lower.
                                      forth to be sure it is locked in
                                      place.
3-4      Seats and Restraints

Lumbar Adjustment                      Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Lumbar
                                                { WARNING
                                       You can lose control of the
                                       vehicle if you try to adjust a
                                       manual driver seat while the
                                       vehicle is moving. The sudden
                                       movement could startle and
                                       confuse you, or make you push a
                                       pedal when you do not want to.
                                       Adjust the driver seat only when
                                                                              To recline a manual seatback:
                                       the vehicle is not moving.
                                                                              1. Lift the lever.
                                                                              2. Move the seatback to the
Move the adjustment lever on the
outboard side of the seatback up or
                                                { WARNING                        desired position, and then
                                                                                 release the lever to lock the
down to one of three positions to      If either seatback is not locked, it      seatback in place.
increase or decrease the lumbar        could move forward in a sudden         3. Push and pull on the seatback to
support.                               stop or crash. That could cause           make sure it is locked in place.
The highest position provides the      injury to the person sitting there.
most support and the lowest            Always push and pull on the
position provides the least support.   seatbacks to be sure they are
                                       locked.
                                                                             Seats and Restraints            3-5

To return the seatback to the upright
position:                                  WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without         The lap belt cannot do its job
   applying pressure to the             either. In a crash, the belt could
   seatback, and the seatback will      go up over your abdomen. The
   return to the upright position.      belt forces would be there, not at
2. Push and pull on the seatback to     your pelvic bones. This could
   make sure it is locked.              cause serious internal injuries.
                                        For proper protection when the
          { WARNING                     vehicle is in motion, have the
                                        seatback upright. Then sit well
 Sitting in a reclined position when                                         Do not have a seatback reclined if
                                        back in the seat and wear the
 the vehicle is in motion can be                                             the vehicle is moving.
                                        safety belt properly.
 dangerous. Even when buckled
 up, the safety belts cannot do
 their job when reclined like this.
 The shoulder belt cannot do its
 job because it will not be against
 your body. Instead, it will be in
 front of you. In a crash, you could
 go into it, receiving neck or other
 injuries.
                         (Continued)
3-6     Seats and Restraints

Rear Seats
Rear Seats (Sedan)
Folding the Seatbacks
The rear seatbacks can be folded
down to increase cargo space.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to       To fold down the seatbacks:            4. Detach the center safety belt
their normal stowed position                                                    from the mini buckle by inserting
                                      1. Remove the safety belt strap
before folding a rear seat.                                                     the ignition key into the slot in
                                         from the safety belt guide by
                                         pulling it through the slot.           the mini buckle, pressing the
                                                                                release button, and allowing the
                                      2. Push the head restraints all the       belt to retract.
                                         way down.
                                      3. Unlatch the center safety belt by
                                         pressing the red button on the
                                         buckle.
                                                                              Seats and Restraints              3-7

                                      Unfolding the Seatbacks                 5. Push the latch plate at the end
                                                                                 of the safety belt strap into the
                                      To return the seatback to the upright
                                                                                 mini-buckle until the mechanism
                                      position:
                                                                                 clicks. Make sure the strap is not
                                      1. Hook the safety belts into the          twisted. The sliding latch plate
                                         safety belt guides.                     will face the front of the vehicle.
                                      2. Lift the seatback up and push it
                                         to its original position.                      { WARNING
                                                                               A safety belt that is improperly
                                                { WARNING                      routed, not properly attached,
                                       If either seatback is not locked, it    or twisted will not provide the
5. Pull up the release knob located    could move forward in a sudden          protection needed in a crash. The
   on top of either of the rear        stop or crash. That could cause         person wearing the belt could be
   seatbacks.                          injury to the person sitting there.     seriously injured. After raising the
6. Fold the rear seatback forward      Always push and pull on the             rear seatback, always check to be
   and down.                           seatbacks to be sure they are           sure that the safety belts are
                                       locked.                                 properly routed and attached, and
                                                                               are not twisted.
                                      3. Push down and rearward firmly
                                         on the top of the seatbacks until    6. Insert the safety belt strap back
                                         it latches securely in the fully        into the safety belt guide.
                                         upright position.
                                      4. To reattach the center seat
                                         safety belt to the mini buckle,
                                         pull it from the retractor.
3-8      Seats and Restraints

Rear Seats (Hatchback)
Folding the Rear Seats
The rear seats can be folded to
increase cargo space.
To fold the rear seats:
1. Lower the head restraints
   completely.
2. Unlatch the center safety belt by
   pressing the red button on the
   buckle.
                                       3. Detach the center safety belt        4. Pull up the release knob, located
                                          from the mini buckle by inserting       on the top of the seatbacks, and
                                          the ignition key into the slot in       fold the seatbacks forward
                                          the mini buckle, pressing the           and down.
                                          release button, and allowing it to
                                          retract.
                                                                              Seats and Restraints              3-9

Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
5. Move the safety belt buckles and
   safety belt in the center seating
   position out of the space
   between the seatbacks and the
   seat cushion so they are not in
   the way as the seat is being        6. Firmly pull the release handles     8. Clip the hook to the front seat
   folded.                                on the rear side of the seat           head restraint to keep the rear
                                          cushion to unlock the seat             seat secure.
                                          cushion.
                                                                              Unfolding the Seats
                                       7. Lift the seat cushion up and flip
                                          it forward.                         To return the rear seats to the
                                                                              normal seating position:
                                                                              1. Unclip the hook from the front
                                                                                 seat head restraint.
                                                                              2. Position the buckles in back of
                                                                                 the seat latches when moving
                                                                                 the rear seats to the sitting
                                                                                 position.
3-10      Seats and Restraints

Notice: Damage to the safety belt
buckle or rear seat locking                                                       WARNING (Continued)
mechanism can occur if the
safety belt and buckles are                                                    sure that the safety belts are
pinched under the rear seat                                                    properly routed and attached, and
cushion. Do not place the safety                                               are not twisted.
belt and buckles on the floor
under the rear seat cushion when                                              5. Lift the seatbacks up and push
the rear seat is put back to the                                                 them back to their original
sitting position.                                                                latched positions.
3. Push the seat cushion down to                                              6. Unhook the safety belts in the
   its original position until it                                                outboard seating positions from
   latches securely. Try to pull up   4. Hook the safety belts in the            the retaining clips.
   on the seat to make sure it is        outboard seating positions into
   locked in place.                      the retaining clips.                 7. Return the safety belt buckles
                                                                                 and the center seat safety belt to
                                                                                 their original position between
                                                { WARNING                        the rear seatback and the seat
                                       A safety belt that is improperly          cushion. Make sure the straps of
                                       routed, not properly attached,            the safety belt and buckles are
                                                                                 not twisted.
                                       or twisted will not provide the
                                       protection needed in a crash. The
                                       person wearing the belt could be
                                       seriously injured. After raising the
                                       rear seatback, always check to be
                                                               (Continued)
                                                                                Seats and Restraints             3-11

8. To reattach the center seat          Safety Belts
   safety belt to the mini buckle,                                                         { WARNING
   pull it from the retractor.          This section of the manual
                                        describes how to use safety belts         It is extremely dangerous to ride
                                                                                  in a cargo area, inside or outside
          { WARNING                     properly. It also describes some
                                        things not to do with safety belts.       of a vehicle. In a collision, people
 If either seatback is not locked, it                                             riding in these areas are more
 could move forward in a sudden                   { WARNING                       likely to be seriously injured or
                                                                                  killed. Do not allow people to ride
 stop or crash. That could cause
 injury to the person sitting there.     Do not let anyone ride where a           in any area of your vehicle that is
 Always push and pull on the             safety belt cannot be worn               not equipped with seats and
 seatbacks to be sure they are           properly. In a crash, if you or your     safety belts. Be sure everyone in
 locked.                                 passenger(s) are not wearing             your vehicle is in a seat and using
                                         safety belts, the injuries can be        a safety belt properly.
                                         much worse. You can hit things
9. Push down and rearward firmly         inside the vehicle harder or be
   on the top of the seatbacks until                                             This vehicle has indicators as a
                                         ejected from the vehicle. You and       reminder to buckle the safety belts.
   they latch securely in the fully
                                         your passenger(s) can be                See Safety Belt Reminders on
   upright position.
                                         seriously injured or killed. In the     page 5‑11 for additional information.
                                         same crash, you might not be,
                                                                                 In most states and in all Canadian
                                         if you are buckled up. Always           provinces, the law requires wearing
                                         fasten your safety belt, and check      safety belts. Here is why:
                                         that your passenger(s) are
                                         restrained properly too.                You never know if you will be in a
                                                                                 crash. If you do have a crash, you
                                                                                 do not know if it will be a
                                                                                 serious one.
3-12       Seats and Restraints

A few crashes are mild, and some          Why Safety Belts Work
crashes can be so serious that even
                                          When you ride in or on anything,
buckled up, a person would not
                                          you go as fast as it goes.
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!                                                              Put someone on it.




                                          Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
                                          it is just a seat on wheels.




                                                                               Get it up to speed. Then stop the
                                                                               vehicle. The rider does not stop.
                                                                      Seats and Restraints           3-13

                                                                       With safety belts, you slow down as
                                                                       the vehicle does. You get more time
                                                                       to stop. You stop over more
                                                                       distance, and your strongest bones
                                                                       take the forces. That is why safety
                                                                       belts make such good sense.
                                                                       Questions and Answers About
                                                                       Safety Belts
                                                                       Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
                                                                          after a crash if I am wearing a
                                                                          safety belt?
The person keeps going until             or the instrument panel...    A: You could be — whether you are
stopped by something. In a real                                           wearing a safety belt or not. But
vehicle, it could be the windshield...                                    your chance of being conscious
                                                                          during and after an accident, so
                                                                          you can unbuckle and get out, is
                                                                          much greater if you are belted.
                                                                          And you can unbuckle a safety
                                                                          belt, even if you are
                                                                          upside down.




                                         or the safety belts!
3-14      Seats and Restraints

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why      Q: If I am a good driver, and I       How to Wear Safety Belts
   should I have to wear safety           never drive far from home,
   belts?                                 why should I wear safety
                                                                             Properly
A: Airbags are supplemental               belts?                             This section is only for people of
   systems only; so they work with     A: You may be an excellent driver,    adult size.
   safety belts — not instead of          but if you are in a crash — even   Be aware that there are special
   them. Whether or not an airbag         one that is not your fault — you   things to know about safety belts
   is provided, all occupants still       and your passenger(s) can be       and children. And there are different
   have to buckle up to get the           hurt. Being a good driver does     rules for smaller children and
   most protection. That is true not      not protect you from things        infants. If a child will be riding in the
   only in frontal collisions, but        beyond your control, such as       vehicle, see Older Children on
   especially in side and other           bad drivers.                       page 3‑38 or Infants and Young
   collisions.                            Most accidents occur within        Children on page 3‑41. Follow those
                                          40 km (25 miles) of home. And      rules for everyone's protection.
                                          the greatest number of serious     It is very important for all occupants
                                          injuries and deaths occur at       to buckle up. Statistics show that
                                          speeds of less than                unbelted people are hurt more often
                                          65 km/h (40 mph).                  in crashes than those who are
                                          Safety belts are for everyone.     wearing safety belts.
                                                                             Occupants who are not buckled up
                                                                             can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
                                                                             crash. And they can strike others in
                                                                             the vehicle who are wearing safety
                                                                             belts.
                                                                                   Seats and Restraints             3-15

First, before you or your                  shoulder belt should go over the
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,           shoulder and across the chest.                     { WARNING
there is important information you         These parts of the body are best
should know.                               able to take belt restraining forces.     You can be seriously hurt if your
                                                                                     shoulder belt is too loose. In a
                                           The shoulder belt locks if there is a     crash, you would move forward
                                           sudden stop or crash.                     too much, which could increase
                                           Q: What is wrong with this?               injury. The shoulder belt should fit
                                                                                     snugly against your body.




Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this      A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
applies force to the strong pelvic            It will not give as much
bones and you would be less likely            protection this way.
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
3-16       Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this?                                                   Q: What is wrong with this?
                                                 { WARNING
                                        You can be seriously hurt if your
                                        lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
                                        you could slide under the lap belt
                                        and apply force on your
                                        abdomen. This could cause
                                        serious or even fatal injuries. The
                                        lap belt should be worn low and
                                        snug on the hips, just touching
                                        the thighs.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will                                         A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
   not give nearly as much                                                       buckle.
   protection this way.
                                                                          Seats and Restraints            3-17

                                        Q: What is wrong with this?
         { WARNING                                                                   { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if                                             You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong                                           your belt goes over an armrest
place like this. In a crash, the belt                                       like this. The belt would be much
would go up over your abdomen.                                              too high. In a crash, you can slide
The belt forces would be there,                                             under the belt. The belt force
not on the pelvic bones. This                                               would then be applied on the
could cause serious internal                                                abdomen, not on the pelvic
injuries. Always buckle your belt                                           bones, and that could cause
into the buckle nearest you.                                                serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
                                                                            the belt goes under the armrests.

                                        A: The belt is over an armrest.
3-18      Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this?                                                Q: What is wrong with this?
                                              { WARNING
                                     You can be seriously injured if
                                     you wear the shoulder belt under
                                     your arm. In a crash, your body
                                     would move too far forward,
                                     which would increase the chance
                                     of head and neck injury. Also, the
                                     belt would apply too much force
                                     to the ribs, which are not as
                                     strong as shoulder bones. You
                                     could also severely injure internal
                                     organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under   The shoulder belt should go over      A: The belt is behind the body.
   the arm. It should be worn over   the shoulder and across the
   the shoulder at all times.        chest.
                                                                     Seats and Restraints            3-19

                                     Q: What is wrong with this?
         { WARNING                                                              { WARNING
You can be seriously injured by                                        You can be seriously injured by a
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt                                      twisted belt. In a crash, you would
properly. In a crash, you would                                        not have the full width of the belt
not be restrained by the shoulder                                      to spread impact forces. If a belt
belt. Your body could move too                                         is twisted, make it straight so it
far forward increasing the chance                                      can work properly, or ask your
of head and neck injury. You                                           dealer to fix it.
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should   A: The belt is twisted across
go over the shoulder and across         the body.
the chest.
3-20       Seats and Restraints

Lap-Shoulder Belt                          belt go back slightly to unlock it.
                                           Then pull the belt across you
All seating positions in the vehicle       more slowly.
have a lap-shoulder belt.
                                           If the shoulder portion of a
If you are using a rear seating            passenger belt is pulled out all
position with a detachable safety          the way, the child restraint
belt and the safety belt is not            locking feature may be engaged.
attached, see Rear Seats (Sedan)           If this happens, let the belt go
on page 3‑6 or Rear Seats                  back all the way and start again.
(Hatchback) on page 3‑8 for
instruction on reconnecting the
safety belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain                                                4. Push the latch plate into the
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt                                                      buckle until it clicks.
properly.                                                                            If the latch plate will not go fully
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is                                                   into the buckle, check if the
   adjustable, so you can sit up                                                     correct buckle is being used.
   straight. To see how, see “Seats”                                                 Pull up on the latch plate to
   in the Index.                                                                     make sure it is secure. If the belt
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull                                                  is not long enough, see Safety
   the belt across you. Do not let it                                                Belt Extender on page 3‑22.
   get twisted.                         3. If the belt stops before it reaches       Position the release button on
   The lap-shoulder belt may lock if       the buckle, tilt the latch plate and      the buckle so that the safety belt
   you pull the belt across you very       keep pulling until it can be              could be quickly unbuckled if
   quickly. If this happens, let the       buckled.                                  necessary.
                                                                                Seats and Restraints             3-21

5. If equipped with a shoulder belt                                              Adjust the height so the shoulder
   height adjuster, move it to the                                               portion of the belt is on the shoulder
   height that is right for you. See                                             and not falling off of it. The belt
   “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”                                               should be close to, but not
   in this section for instructions on                                           contacting, the neck. Improper
   use and important safety                                                      shoulder belt height adjustment
   information.                                                                  could reduce the effectiveness of
                                                                                 the safety belt in a crash. See How
                                                                                 to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
                                                                                 page 3‑14.


                                         To unlatch the belt, push the button
                                         on the buckle. The belt should
                                         return to its stowed position.
                                         Before a door is closed, be sure the
                                         belt is out of the way. If a door is
                                         slammed against a safety belt,
                                         damage can occur to both the
                                         safety belt and the vehicle.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull
   up on the shoulder belt.              Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
   It may be necessary to pull           The vehicle has a shoulder belt
   stitching on the safety belt                                                  To move it down, press the release
                                         height adjuster for the driver and
   through the latch plate to fully                                              button (A) and move the height
                                         right front passenger seating
   tighten the lap belt on smaller                                               adjuster to the desired position.
                                         positions.
   occupants.
3-22      Seats and Restraints

After the adjuster is set to the        Safety Belt Use During                The best way to protect the fetus is
desired position, try to move it down                                         to protect the mother. When a safety
without pressing the release button
                                        Pregnancy                             belt is worn properly, it is more likely
to make sure it has locked into         Safety belts work for everyone,       that the fetus will not be hurt in a
position.                               including pregnant women. Like all    crash. For pregnant women, as for
                                        occupants, they are more likely to    anyone, the key to making safety
Safety Belt Pretensioners               be seriously injured if they do not   belts effective is wearing them
This vehicle has safety belt            wear safety belts.                    properly.
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt                                           Safety Belt Extender
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.                                         If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
They can help tighten the safety                                              around you, you should use it.
belts during the early stages of a                                            But if a safety belt is not long
moderate to severe frontal or near                                            enough, your dealer will order you
frontal crash if the threshold                                                an extender. When you go in to
conditions for pretensioner                                                   order it, take the heaviest coat you
activation are met.                                                           will wear, so the extender will be
                                                                              long enough for you. To help avoid
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,                                            personal injury, do not let someone
                                                                              else use it, and use it only for the
they will need to be replaced, and
                                        A pregnant woman should wear a        seat it is made to fit. The extender
probably other new parts for the
                                        lap-shoulder belt, and the lap        has been designed for adults. Never
vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts      portion should be worn as low as      use it for securing child seats. To
                                        possible, below the rounding,         wear it, attach it to the regular safety
After a Crash on page 3‑23.
                                        throughout the pregnancy.             belt. For more information, see the
                                                                              instruction sheet that comes with
                                                                              the extender.
                                                                               Seats and Restraints           3-23

Safety System Check                      Safety Belt Care                       Replacing Safety Belt
Now and then, check that the safety      Keep belts clean and dry.              System Parts After a
belt reminder light, safety belts,                                              Crash
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly.
                                                  { WARNING
Look for any other loose or               Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
                                                                                         { WARNING
damaged safety belt system parts          It may severely weaken them. In        A crash can damage the safety
that might keep a safety belt system      a crash, they might not be able to     belt system in the vehicle.
from doing its job. See your dealer       provide adequate protection.           A damaged safety belt system
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed       Clean safety belts only with mild      may not properly protect the
safety belts may not protect you in a     soap and lukewarm water.               person using it, resulting in
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or                                              serious injury or even death in a
frayed, get a new one right away.                                                crash. To help make sure the
                                                                                 safety belt systems are working
Make sure the safety belt reminder                                               properly after a crash, have them
light is working. See Safety Belt                                                inspected and any necessary
Reminders on page 5‑11 for more                                                  replacements made as soon as
information.                                                                     possible.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑23.
                                                                                After a minor crash, replacement of
                                                                                safety belts may not be necessary.
                                                                                But the safety belt assemblies that
                                                                                were used during any crash may
                                                                                have been stressed or damaged.
3-24       Seats and Restraints

See your dealer to have the safety        Airbag System                              For frontal airbags, the word
belt assemblies inspected or                                                         AIRBAG will appear on the middle
replaced.                                 The vehicle has the following              part of the steering wheel for the
                                          airbags:                                   driver and on the instrument panel
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt         .   A frontal airbag for the driver.       for the right front passenger.
system was not being used at the          .   A frontal airbag for the right front   With seat-mounted side impact
time of the crash.                            passenger.                             airbags, the word AIRBAG will
Have the safety belt pretensioners                                                   appear on the side of the seatback
                                          The vehicle may have the following         closest to the door.
checked if the vehicle has been in a      airbags:
crash, or if the airbag readiness light                                              Airbags are designed to supplement
stays on after you start the vehicle      .   A seat-mounted side impact             the protection provided by safety
or while you are driving. See Airbag          airbag for the driver.                 belts. Even though today's airbags
Readiness Light on page 5‑12.             .   A seat-mounted side impact             are also designed to help reduce
                                              airbag for the right front             the risk of injury from the force of an
                                              passenger.                             inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
                                                                                     very quickly to do their job.
                                          All of the airbags in your vehicle will
                                          have the word AIRBAG embossed
                                          in the trim or on an attached label
                                          near the deployment opening.
                                                                               Seats and Restraints            3-25

Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:           WARNING (Continued)                      WARNING (Continued)

          { WARNING                     Wearing your safety belt during a
                                        crash helps reduce your chance
                                                                                 close to the airbag, as you would
                                                                                 be if you were sitting on the edge
 You can be severely injured or         of hitting things inside the vehicle     of your seat or leaning forward.
 killed in a crash if you are not       or being ejected from it. Airbags        Safety belts help keep you in
 wearing your safety belt — even if     are “supplemental restraints” to         position before and during a
 you have airbags. Airbags are          the safety belts. Everyone in your       crash. Always wear your safety
 designed to work with safety           vehicle should wear a safety belt        belt, even with airbags. The driver
 belts, but do not replace them.        properly — whether or not there is       should sit as far back as possible
 Also, airbags are not designed to      an airbag for that person.               while still maintaining control of
 deploy in every crash. In some                                                  the vehicle.
 crashes safety belts are your only                                              Occupants should not lean on or
 restraint. See When Should an
 Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑28.                   { WARNING                       sleep against the door or side
                                                                                 windows in seating positions with
                          (Continued)   Airbags inflate with great force,        seat-mounted airbags.
                                        faster than the blink of an eye.
                                        Anyone who is up against, or very
                                        close to, any airbag when it
                                        inflates can be seriously injured
                                        or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
                                                                 (Continued)
3-26     Seats and Restraints

                                                                            Where Are the Airbags?
         { WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus       There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection   on the instrument panel, which
for adults and older children, but    shows the airbag symbol.
not for young children and infants.
                                      The system checks the airbag
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
                                      electrical system for malfunctions.
system nor its airbag system is
                                      The light tells you if there is an
designed for them. Young              electrical problem. See Airbag
children and infants need the         Readiness Light on page 5‑12 for
protection that a child restraint     more information.                     The driver's frontal airbag is in the
system can provide. Always                                                  middle of the steering wheel.
secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑38 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑41.
                                                                              Seats and Restraints           3-27


                                                                                        { WARNING
                                                                                If something is between an
                                                                                occupant and an airbag, the
                                                                                airbag might not inflate properly
                                                                                or it might force the object into
                                                                                that person causing severe injury
                                                                                or even death. The path of an
                                                                                inflating airbag must be kept
                                                                                clear. Do not put anything
                                                                                between an occupant and an
The right front passenger's frontal      Driver Side Shown, Passenger           airbag, and do not attach or put
airbag is in the instrument panel on              Side Similar                  anything on the steering wheel
the passenger's side.                                                           hub or on or near any other
                                       If your vehicle has seat-mounted         airbag covering.
                                       side impact airbags for the driver
                                       and right front passenger, they are      Do not use seat accessories that
                                       in the side of the seatbacks closest     block the inflation path of a
                                       to the door.                             seat-mounted side impact airbag.
3-28       Seats and Restraints

When Should an Airbag                      Frontal airbags may inflate at            Thresholds can also vary with
                                           different crash speeds. For               specific vehicle design.
Inflate?                                   example:                                  In addition, your vehicle has
Frontal airbags are designed to            .   If the vehicle hits a stationary      dual-stage frontal airbags.
inflate in moderate to severe frontal          object, the airbags could inflate     Dual-stage airbags adjust the
or near-frontal crashes to help                at a different crash speed than if    restraint according to crash severity.
reduce the potential for severe                the vehicle hits a moving object.     Your vehicle has electronic frontal
injuries mainly to the driver's or right                                             sensors, which help the sensing
front passenger's head and chest.          .   If the vehicle hits an object that
                                               deforms, the airbags could            system distinguish between a
However, they are only designed to                                                   moderate frontal impact and a more
inflate if the impact exceeds a                inflate at a different crash speed
                                               than if the vehicle hits an object    severe frontal impact. For moderate
predetermined deployment                                                             frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
threshold. Deployment thresholds               that does not deform.
                                                                                     inflate at a level less than full
are used to predict how severe a           .   If the vehicle hits a narrow object   deployment. For more severe frontal
crash is likely to be in time for the          (like a pole), the airbags could      impacts, full deployment occurs.
airbags to inflate and help restrain           inflate at a different crash speed
the occupants.                                 than if the vehicle hits a wide       Frontal airbags are not intended to
                                               object (like a wall).                 inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
Whether your frontal airbags will or                                                 impacts, or in many side impacts.
should deploy is not based on how          .   If the vehicle goes into an object
fast your vehicle is traveling.                at an angle, the airbags could        The vehicle may or may not have
It depends largely on what you hit,            inflate at a different crash speed    seat-mounted side impact airbags.
the direction of the impact, and how           than if the vehicle goes straight     See Airbag System on page 3‑24.
quickly your vehicle slows down.               into the object.                      Seat-mounted side impact airbags
                                                                                     are intended to inflate in moderate
                                                                                     to severe side crashes.
                                                                                     Seats and Restraints            3-29

Seat-mounted side impact airbags         What Makes an Airbag                         How Does an Airbag
will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system's designed
                                         Inflate?                                     Restrain?
threshold level. The threshold level     In a deployment event, the sensing           In moderate to severe frontal or
can vary with specific vehicle           system sends an electrical signal            near frontal collisions, even belted
design.                                  triggering a release of gas from the         occupants can contact the steering
Seat-mounted side impact airbags         inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the    wheel or the instrument panel. In
are not intended to inflate in frontal   airbag causing the bag to break out          moderate to severe side collisions,
impacts, near-frontal impacts,           of the cover and deploy. The inflator,       even belted occupants can contact
rollovers, or rear impacts.              the airbag, and related hardware are         the inside of the vehicle.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag        all part of the airbag module.               Airbags supplement the protection
is intended to deploy on the side of     Frontal airbag modules are located           provided by safety belts. Frontal
the vehicle that is struck.              inside the steering wheel and                airbags distribute the force of the
In any particular crash, no one can      instrument panel. For vehicles with          impact more evenly over the
say whether an airbag should have        seat-mounted side impact airbags,            occupant's upper body, stopping
inflated simply because of the           there are airbag modules in the side         the occupant more gradually.
damage to a vehicle or because of        of the front seatbacks closest to            Seat-mounted side impact airbags
what the repair costs were. For          the door.                                    distribute the force of the impact
frontal airbags, inflation is                                                         more evenly over the occupant's
determined by what the vehicle hits,                                                  upper body.
the angle of the impact, and how                                                      But airbags would not help in many
quickly the vehicle slows down. For                                                   types of collisions, primarily
seat-mounted side impact airbags,                                                     because the occupant's motion is
deployment is determined by the                                                       not toward those airbags. See When
location and severity of the side                                                     Should an Airbag Inflate? on
impact.                                                                               page 3‑28 for more information.
3-30      Seats and Restraints

Airbags should never be regarded                                                the interior lamps off, and turn the
as anything more than a supplement                { WARNING                     hazard warning flashers off by using
to safety belts.                                                                the controls for those features.
                                         When an airbag inflates, there
                                         may be dust in the air. This dust
What Will You See After                  could cause breathing problems                   { WARNING
an Airbag Inflates?                      for people with a history of            A crash severe enough to inflate
After the frontal and seat-mounted       asthma or other breathing trouble.      the airbags may have also
side impact airbags inflate, they        To avoid this, everyone in the          damaged important functions in
quickly deflate, so quickly that some    vehicle should get out as soon as       the vehicle, such as the fuel
people may not even realize the          it is safe to do so. If you have        system, brake and steering
airbags inflated. Some components        breathing problems but cannot           systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
of the airbag module may be hot for      get out of the vehicle after an         appears to be drivable after a
several minutes. For location of the     airbag inflates, then get fresh air     moderate crash, there may be
airbag modules, see What Makes           by opening a window or a door.          concealed damage that could
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑29.         If you experience breathing             make it difficult to safely operate
The parts of the airbag that come        problems following an airbag            the vehicle.
into contact with you may be warm,       deployment, you should seek
but not too hot to touch. There may      medical attention.                      Use caution if you should attempt
be some smoke and dust coming                                                    to restart the engine after a crash
from the vents in the deflated                                                   has occurred.
                                        The vehicle has a feature that may
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
                                        automatically unlock the doors, turn
prevent the driver from seeing out of
                                        the interior lamps on, turn on the
the windshield or being able to steer
                                        hazard warning flashers, and shut
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
                                        off the fuel system after the airbags
people from leaving the vehicle.
                                        inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
                                                                                 Seats and Restraints             3-31

In many crashes severe enough to
                                       .   Let only qualified technicians
inflate the airbag, windshields are        work on the airbag system.
broken by vehicle deformation.             Improper service can mean that
Additional windshield breakage may         the airbag system will not work
also occur from the right front            properly. See your dealer for
passenger airbag.                          service.
.   Airbags are designed to inflate                                                          United States
    only once. After an airbag
                                       Passenger Sensing
    inflates, you will need some new   System
    parts for the airbag system.       The vehicle has a passenger
    If you do not get them, the        sensing system for the right front
    airbag system will not be there    passenger position. The passenger
    to help protect you in another     airbag status indicator will be
    crash. A new system will include   visible, near the clock, located in the
    airbag modules and possibly                                                                  Canada
                                       center of the instrument panel, when
    other parts. The service manual    the vehicle is started.                    The words PASSENGER AIRBAG
    for your vehicle covers the need                                              ON and PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
    to replace other parts.                                                       or the symbols for on and off will be
.   The vehicle has a crash sensing                                               visible, during the system check.
    and diagnostic module which                                                   When the system check is
    records information after a                                                   complete, either the words
    crash. See Vehicle Data                                                       PASSENGER AIRBAG ON and
    Recording and Privacy on                                                      PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or the
    page 13‑15 and Event Data                                                     symbol for on and off will be visible.
    Recorders on page 13‑15.                                                      See Passenger Airbag Status
                                                                                  Indicator on page 5‑12.
3-32       Seats and Restraints

The passenger sensing system will        an older child riding in a booster
turn off the right front passenger       seat; and children, who are large            WARNING (Continued)
frontal airbag and seat-mounted          enough, using safety belts.
side impact airbag (if equipped)                                                   Even if the passenger sensing
                                         A label on the sun visor says,            system has turned off the right
under certain conditions. The driver     “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
airbags are not affected by the                                                    front passenger frontal airbag
                                         the front.” This is because the risk to   and seat-mounted side impact
passenger sensing system.                the rear-facing child is so great,        airbag (if equipped), no system
The passenger sensing system             if the airbag deploys.                    is fail-safe. No one can guarantee
works with sensors that are part of
                                                                                   that an airbag will not deploy
the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the
                                                   { WARNING                       under some unusual
presence of a properly-seated                                                      circumstance, even though
                                          A child in a rear-facing child
occupant and determine if the right                                                the airbag(s) are off.
                                          restraint can be seriously injured
front passenger frontal airbag and        or killed if the right front             Secure rear-facing child restraints
seat-mounted side impact airbag           passenger airbag inflates. This is       in a rear seat, even if the
(if equipped) should be enabled           because the back of the                  airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
(may inflate) or not.                     rear-facing child restraint would        forward-facing child restraint in
According to accident statistics,         be very close to the inflating           the right front seat, always move
children are safer when properly          airbag. A child in a forward-facing      the front passenger seat as far
secured in a rear seat in the correct     child restraint can be seriously         back as it will go. It is better to
child restraint for their weight          injured or killed if the right front     secure the child restraint in a
and size.                                 passenger airbag inflates and the        rear seat.
We recommend that children be             passenger seat is in a forward
secured in a rear seat, including: an     position.
infant or a child riding in a                                        (Continued)
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
                                                                                  Seats and Restraints             3-33

The passenger sensing system is          When the passenger sensing                impact airbag (if equipped),
designed to turn off the right front     system has turned off the right front     depending upon the person's
passenger frontal airbag and             passenger frontal airbag and              seating posture and body build.
seat-mounted side impact airbag          seat-mounted side impact airbag           Everyone in your vehicle who
(if equipped) if:                        (if equipped), the off indicator will     has outgrown child restraints
.   The right front passenger seat is    light and stay lit to remind you that     should wear a safety belt
    unoccupied.                          the airbag or airbags are off. See        properly — whether or not there is
                                         Passenger Airbag Status Indicator         an airbag for that person.
.   The system determines that an        on page 5‑12.
    infant is present in a rear-facing
    infant seat.                         The passenger sensing system is                     { WARNING
                                         designed to enable (may inflate) the
.   The system determines that a         right front passenger frontal airbag       If the airbag readiness light ever
    small child is present in a child    and seat-mounted side impact               comes on and stays on, it means
    restraint.                           airbag (if equipped) anytime the           that something may be wrong
                                         system senses that a person of             with the airbag system. To help
.   The system determines that a
    small child is present in a          adult size is sitting properly in the      avoid injury to yourself or others,
    booster seat.                        right front passenger seat. When the       have the vehicle serviced right
                                         passenger sensing system has               away. See Airbag Readiness
.   A right front passenger takes        allowed the airbag or airbags to be        Light on page 5‑12 for more
    his/her weight off of the seat for   enabled, the on symbol will light and      information, including important
    a period of time.                    stay lit to remind you that the airbag     safety information.
.   The right front passenger seat is    or airbags are active.
    occupied by a smaller person,        For some children who have
    such as a child who has              outgrown child restraints and for
    outgrown child restraints.           very small adults, the passenger
.   Or, if there is a critical problem   sensing system may or may not turn
    with the airbag system or the        off the right front passenger frontal
    passenger sensing system.            airbag and seat-mounted side
3-34       Seats and Restraints

If the On Indicator is Lit for a          5. If, after reinstalling the child          If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Child Restraint                              restraint and restarting the              Adult‐Size Occupant
                                             vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
If a child restraint has been installed      turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
and the on indicator is lit:                 recline the vehicle seatback and
1. Turn the vehicle off.                     adjust the seat cushion,
                                             if adjustable, to make sure that
2. Remove the child restraint from
                                             the vehicle seatback is not
   the vehicle.
                                             pushing the child restraint into
3. Remove any additional items               the seat cushion.
   from the seat such as blankets,
                                              Also make sure the child
   cushions, seat covers, seat
                                              restraint is not trapped under the
   heaters, or seat massagers.
                                              vehicle head restraint. If this
4. Reinstall the child restraint              happens, adjust the head
   following the directions provided          restraint. See Head Restraints
   by the child restraint                     on page 3‑2.                             If a person of adult-size is sitting in
   manufacturer and refer to                                                           the right front passenger seat, but
                                          6. Restart the vehicle.
   Securing Child Restraints (Right                                                    the off indicator is lit, it could be
   Front Seat Position) on                If the on indicator is still lit, secure     because that person is not sitting
   page 3‑55 or Securing Child            the child in the child restraint in a        properly in the seat. If this happens,
   Restraints (Rear Seat Position)        rear seat position in the vehicle, and       use the following steps to allow the
   on page 3‑59.                          check with your dealer.
                                                                                Seats and Restraints          3-35

system to detect that person and        Additional Factors Affecting
enable the right front passenger        System Operation                                  { WARNING
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped):       Safety belts help keep the                Stowing of articles under the
                                        passenger in position on the seat         passenger seat or between the
1. Turn the vehicle off.                during vehicle maneuvers and              passenger seat cushion and
2. Remove any additional material       braking, which helps the passenger        seatback may interfere with the
   from the seat, such as blankets,     sensing system maintain the               proper operation of the passenger
   cushions, seat covers, seat          passenger airbag status. See              sensing system.
   heaters, or seat massagers.          “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
                                        in the Index for additional
3. Place the seatback in the fully      information about the importance
   upright position.                    of proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in       A thick layer of additional material,
   the seat, centered on the seat       such as a blanket or cushion,
   cushion, with legs comfortably       or aftermarket equipment such as
   extended.                            seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
5. Restart the vehicle and have the     massagers can affect how well the
   person remain in this position for   passenger sensing system
   two to three minutes after the on    operates. We recommend that you
   indicator is lit.                    not use seat covers or other
                                        aftermarket equipment other than
                                        any that GM has approved for your
                                        specific vehicle. See Adding
                                        Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
                                        Vehicle on page 3‑36 for more
                                        information about modifications that
                                        can affect how the system operates.
3-36      Seats and Restraints

Servicing the                                                               Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
                                               { WARNING                    Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle        For up to 10 seconds after the        Q: Is there anything I might add
should be serviced. There are parts   ignition is turned off and the           to or change about the vehicle
of the airbag system in several       battery is disconnected, an airbag       that could keep the airbags
places around the vehicle. Your       can still inflate during improper        from working properly?
dealer and the service manual have    service. You can be injured if you
                                      are close to an airbag when it        A: Yes. If you add things that
information about servicing the                                                change your vehicle's frame,
vehicle and the airbag system. To     inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
                                                                               bumper system, height, front end
purchase a service manual, see        They are probably part of the
                                                                               or side sheet metal, they may
Service Publications Ordering         airbag system. Be sure to follow
                                                                               keep the airbag system from
Information on page 13‑12.            proper service procedures, and           working properly. Changing or
                                      make sure the person performing          moving any parts of the front
                                      work for you is qualified to do so.      seats, safety belts, the airbag
                                                                               sensing and diagnostic module,
                                                                               steering wheel, instrument
                                                                               panel, front sensors, or airbag
                                                                               wiring can affect the operation of
                                                                               the airbag system.
                                                                               In addition, the vehicle has a
                                                                               passenger sensing system for
                                                                               the right front passenger
                                                                               position, which includes sensors
                                                                               that are part of the passenger
                                                                               seat. The passenger sensing
                                                                               system may not operate properly
                                                                               if the original seat trim is
                                                                        Seats and Restraints          3-37

replaced with non-GM covers,           Step Two of the Customer          Airbag System Check
upholstery or trim, or with            Satisfaction Procedure in this
GM covers, upholstery or trim          manual. See Customer              The airbag system does not need
designed for a different vehicle.      Satisfaction Procedure on         regularly scheduled maintenance or
Any object, such as an                 page 13‑1.                        replacement. Make sure the airbag
aftermarket seat heater or a                                             readiness light is working. See
                                    Q: Because I have a disability,      Airbag Readiness Light on
comfort enhancing pad or               I have to get my vehicle
device, installed under or on top                                        page 5‑12 for more information.
                                       modified. How can I find out
of the seat fabric, could also         whether this will affect my       Notice: If an airbag covering is
interfere with the operation of        airbag system?                    damaged, opened, or broken, the
the passenger sensing system.                                            airbag may not work properly. Do
This could either prevent proper    A: If you have questions, call       not open or break the airbag
deployment of the passenger            Customer Assistance. The          coverings. If there are any
airbag(s) or prevent the               phone numbers and addresses       opened or broken airbag covers,
passenger sensing system from          for Customer Assistance are in    have the airbag covering and/or
properly turning off the               Step Two of the Customer          airbag module replaced. For the
passenger airbag(s). See               Satisfaction Procedure in this    location of the airbag modules,
Passenger Sensing System on            manual. See Customer              see What Makes an Airbag
page 3‑31.                             Satisfaction Procedure on         Inflate? on page 3‑29. See your
If you have any questions about        page 13‑1.                        dealer for service.
this, you should contact            In addition, your dealer and the
Customer Assistance before you      service manual have information
modify your vehicle. The phone      about the location of the airbag
numbers and addresses for           sensors, sensing and diagnostic
Customer Assistance are in          module and airbag wiring.
3-38     Seats and Restraints

Replacing Airbag System               If an airbag inflates, you will need to   Child Restraints
                                      replace airbag system parts. See
Parts After a Crash                   your dealer for service.
                                                                                Older Children
                                      If the airbag readiness light stays on
         {   WARNING
                                      after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the airbag         on when you are driving, the airbag
systems in your vehicle.              system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system               the vehicle serviced right away. See
                                      Airbag Readiness Light on
may not work properly and may
                                      page 5‑12 for more information.
not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as                                                    Older children who have outgrown
possible.                                                                       booster seats should wear the
                                                                                vehicle's safety belts.
                                                                               Seats and Restraints           3-39

The manufacturer's instructions that    Q: What is the proper way to            According to accident statistics,
come with the booster seat, state          wear safety belts?                   children and infants are safer when
the weight and height limitations for   A: An older child should wear a         properly restrained in the rear
that booster. Use a booster seat           lap-shoulder belt and get the        seating positions than in the front
with a lap-shoulder belt until the         additional restraint a shoulder      seating positions.
child passes the below fit test:           belt can provide. The shoulder       In a crash, children who are not
.   Sit all the way back on the seat.      belt should not cross the face or    buckled up can strike other people
    Do the knees bend at the seat          neck. The lap belt should fit        who are buckled up, or can be
    edge? If yes, continue. If no,         snugly below the hips, just          thrown out of the vehicle. Older
    return to the booster seat.            touching the top of the thighs.      children need to use safety belts
.   Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.          This applies belt force to the       properly.
    Does the shoulder belt rest on         child's pelvic bones in a crash.
    the shoulder? If yes, continue.        It should never be worn over the
    If no, then return to the              abdomen, which could cause
    booster seat.                          severe or even fatal internal
                                           injuries in a crash.
.   Does the lap belt fit low and
    snug on the hips, touching the
    thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
    return to the booster seat.
.   Can proper safety belt fit be
    maintained for the length of the
    trip? If yes, continue. If no,
    return to the booster seat.
3-40     Seats and Restraints


         { WARNING                                                             WARNING (Continued)
Never do this.                                                              might also slide under the lap
Never allow two children to wear                                            belt. The belt force would then be
the same safety belt. The safety                                            applied right on the abdomen.
belt can not properly spread the                                            That could cause serious or fatal
impact forces. In a crash, the two                                          injuries. The shoulder belt should
children can be crushed together                                            go over the shoulder and across
and seriously injured. A safety                                             the chest.
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
                                              { WARNING
                                     Never do this.
                                     Never allow a child to wear the
                                     safety belt with the shoulder belt
                                     behind their back. A child can be
                                     seriously injured by not wearing
                                     the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
                                     crash, the child would not be
                                     restrained by the shoulder belt.
                                     The child could move too far
                                     forward increasing the chance of
                                     head and neck injury. The child
                                                             (Continued)
                                                                                Seats and Restraints            3-41

Infants and Young                       Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
                                                                                     WARNING (Continued)
                                        protection for adults and older
Children                                children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs             and infants. Neither the vehicle's        110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
protection! This includes infants and   safety belt system nor its airbag         arms. An infant should be
all other children. Neither the         system is designed for them. Every        secured in an appropriate
distance traveled nor the age and       time infants and young children ride      restraint.
size of the traveler changes the        in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety       protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every   child restraints.
state in the United States and in       Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says            properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be         or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.

          { WARNING                               { WARNING
                                         Never do this.
 Children can be seriously injured
 or strangled if a shoulder belt is      Never hold an infant or a child
 wrapped around their neck and           while riding in a vehicle. Due to
 the safety belt continues to            crash forces, an infant or a child
 tighten. Never leave children           will become so heavy it is not
 unattended in a vehicle and never       possible to hold it during a crash.
 allow children to play with the         For example, in a crash at only
 safety belts.                           40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
                                         infant will suddenly become a
                                                                 (Continued)
3-42      Seats and Restraints

                                                                                 For most basic types of child
         { WARNING                                                               restraints, there are many
                                                                                 different models available. When
Never do this.                                                                   purchasing a child restraint, be
Children who are up against,                                                     sure it is designed to be used in
or very close to, any airbag when                                                a motor vehicle. If it is, the
it inflates can be seriously injured                                             restraint will have a label saying
or killed. Never put a rear-facing                                               that it meets federal motor
child restraint in the right front                                               vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child                                                 The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also                                             instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing                                                restraint state the weight and
                                         Q: What are the different types of      height limitations for a particular
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
                                            add-on child restraints?             child restraint. In addition, there
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front       A: Add-on child restraints, which       are many kinds of restraints
seat, always move the front                 are purchased by the vehicle's       available for children with
passenger seat as far back as it            owner, are available in four basic   special needs.
will go.                                    types. Selection of a particular
                                            restraint should take into
                                            consideration not only the child's
                                            weight, height, and age but also
                                            whether or not the restraint will
                                            be compatible with the motor
                                            vehicle in which it will be used.
                                                                              Seats and Restraints             3-43

                                                                               Child Restraint Systems
         { WARNING                               { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and          A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants     so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. This is          safety belt may not remain low on
because an infant's neck is not         the hip bones, as it should.
fully developed and its head            Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with            the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash, an    the belt would apply force on a
infant in a rear-facing child           body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint,   any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be              could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest        injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back      serious or fatal injuries during a         (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should           crash, young children should           A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing        always be secured in appropriate       provides restraint with the seating
child restraints.                       child restraints.                      surface against the back of the
                                                                               infant.
                                                                               The harness system holds the infant
                                                                               in place and, in a crash, acts to
                                                                               keep the infant positioned in the
                                                                               restraint.
3-44       Seats and Restraints

                                                                               Securing an Add-On Child
                                                                               Restraint in the Vehicle

                                                                                        { WARNING
                                                                               A child can be seriously injured or
                                                                               killed in a crash if the child
                                                                               restraint is not properly secured in
                                                                               the vehicle. Secure the child
                                                                               restraint properly in the vehicle
                                                                               using the vehicle's safety belt or
                                                                               LATCH system, following the
  (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat               (C) Booster Seats                instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B)      A booster seat (C) is a child restraint   child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's   designed to improve the fit of the        in this manual.
body with the harness.               vehicle's safety belt system.
                                     A booster seat can also help a child
                                     to see out the window.
                                                                                  Seats and Restraints              3-45

To help reduce the chance of injury,     Keep in mind that an unsecured            Securing the Child Within the
the child restraint must be secured      child restraint can move around in a      Child Restraint
in the vehicle. Child restraint          collision or sudden stop and injure
systems must be secured in vehicle       people in the vehicle. Be sure to
seats by lap belts or the lap belt       properly secure any child restraint in
                                                                                             { WARNING
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by    the vehicle — even when no child is        A child can be seriously injured or
the LATCH system. See Lower              in it.                                     killed in a crash if the child is not
Anchors and Tethers for Children         In some areas, Certified Child             properly secured in the child
(LATCH System) on page 3‑48 for          Passenger Safety Technicians               restraint. Secure the child
more information. Children can be        (CPSTs) are available to inspect           properly following the instructions
endangered in a crash if the child       and demonstrate how to correctly           that came with that child restraint.
restraint is not properly secured in     use and install child restraints. In
the vehicle.                             the U.S., refer to the National
When securing an add-on child            Highway Traffic Safety
restraint, refer to the instructions     Administration (NHTSA) website
that come with the restraint which       to locate the nearest child safety
may be on the restraint itself or in a   seat inspection station. For CPST
booklet, or both, and to this manual.    availability in Canada, check with
The child restraint instructions are     Transport Canada or the Provincial
important, so if they are not            Ministry of Transportation office.
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
3-46       Seats and Restraints

Where to Put the
Restraint
                                                    { WARNING                          WARNING (Continued)

Accident statistics show that              A child in a rear-facing child           Even if the passenger sensing
children are safer if they are             restraint can be seriously injured       system has turned off the right
restrained in the rear rather than the     or killed if the right front             front passenger frontal airbag, no
front seat.                                passenger airbag inflates. This is       system is fail-safe. No one can
                                           because the back of the                  guarantee that an airbag will not
We recommend that children and             rear-facing child restraint would
child restraints be secured in a rear                                               deploy under some unusual
                                           be very close to the inflating           circumstance, even though it is
seat, including: an infant or a child
                                           airbag. A child in a forward-facing      turned off.
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
                                           child restraint can be seriously
a child riding in a forward-facing                                                  Secure rear-facing child restraints
child seat; an older child riding in a     injured or killed if the right front
                                           passenger airbag inflates and the        in a rear seat, even if the airbag
booster seat; and children, who are                                                 is off. If you secure a
large enough, using safety belts.          passenger seat is in a forward
                                           position.                                forward-facing child restraint in
A label on your sun visor says,                                                     the right front seat, always move
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in                                (Continued)
                                                                                    the front passenger seat as far
the front.” This is because the risk to                                             back as it will go. It is better to
the rear-facing child is so great,                                                  secure the child restraint in a
if the airbag deploys.                                                              rear seat.
                                                                                    See Passenger Sensing System
                                                                                    on page 3‑31 for additional
                                                                                    information.
                                                                                 Seats and Restraints             3-47

When securing a child restraint in a    Therefore, you will not be able to        Therefore, you will not be able to
rear seating position, study the        secure child restraints or have           secure a child restraint or have a
instructions that came with your        passengers ride in the rear outside       passenger ride in the center rear
child restraint to make sure it is      seating positions.                        seating position.
compatible with this vehicle.                                                     Child restraints and booster seats
There are a couple of things you                                                  vary considerably in size, and some
need to know about using child                                                    may fit in certain seating positions
restraints in the rear seat:                                                      better than others. Always make
                                                                                  sure the child restraint is properly
                                                                                  secured.
                                                                                  Depending on where you place the
                                        If you use two child restraints (A) in
                                                                                  child restraint and the size of the
                                        the rear outside seating positions,
                                                                                  child restraint, you may not be able
                                        the safety belt for the center rear
                                                                                  to access adjacent safety belt
                                        seat position (B) will not be
                                                                                  assemblies or LATCH anchors for
If you use a child restraint in the     accessible.
                                                                                  additional passengers or child
center rear seating position (A), the                                             restraints. Adjacent seating
safety belts and the child restraint                                              positions should not be used if the
LATCH anchors for the rear outside                                                child restraint prevents access to or
seating positions (B) will not be                                                 interferes with the routing of the
accessible.                                                                       safety belt.
3-48       Seats and Restraints

Wherever you install a child             Lower Anchors and                           In order to use the LATCH system in
restraint, be sure to secure the child                                               your vehicle, you need a child
restraint properly.
                                         Tethers for Children                        restraint that has LATCH
Keep in mind that an unsecured
                                         (LATCH System)                              attachments. The child restraint
child restraint can move around in a     The LATCH system holds a child              manufacturer will provide you with
collision or sudden stop and injure      restraint during driving or in a crash.     instructions on how to use the child
people in the vehicle. Be sure to        This system is designed to make             restraint and its attachments. The
properly secure any child restraint in   installation of a child restraint easier.   following explains how to attach a
your vehicle — even when no child        The LATCH system uses anchors in            child restraint with these
is in it.                                the vehicle and attachments on the          attachments in your vehicle.
                                         child restraint that are made for use       Not all vehicle seating positions or
                                         with the LATCH system.                      child restraints have lower anchors
                                         Make sure that a LATCH-compatible           and attachments or top tether
                                         child restraint is properly installed       anchors and attachments.
                                         using the anchors, or use the
                                         vehicle's safety belts to secure the
                                         restraint, following the instructions
                                         that came with that restraint, and
                                         also the instructions in this manual.
                                         When installing a child restraint with
                                         a top tether, you must also use
                                         either the lower anchors or the
                                         safety belts to properly secure the
                                         child restraint. A child restraint must
                                         never be installed using only the top
                                         tether and anchor.
                                                                                 Seats and Restraints              3-49

Lower Anchors                           Top Tether Anchor                         Your child restraint may have a
                                                                                  single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
                                                                                  Either will have a single
                                                                                  attachment (B) to secure the top
                                                                                  tether to the anchor.
                                                                                  Some child restraints that have a
                                                                                  top tether are designed for use with
                                                                                  or without the top tether being
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars                                                  attached. Others require the top
built into the vehicle. There are two                                             tether always to be attached. In
lower anchors for each LATCH                                                      Canada, the law requires that
seating position that will                                                        forward-facing child restraints have
accommodate a child restraint with                                                a top tether, and that the tether be
lower attachments (B).                                                            attached. Be sure to read and follow
                                        A top tether (A, C) anchors the top       the instructions for your child
                                        of the child restraint to the vehicle.    restraint.
                                        A top tether anchor is built into         If the child restraint does not have a
                                        the vehicle. The top tether               top tether, one can be obtained, in
                                        attachment (B) on the child restraint     kit form, for many child restraints.
                                        connects to the top tether anchor in      Ask the child restraint manufacturer
                                        the vehicle in order to reduce the        whether or not a kit is available.
                                        forward movement and rotation of
                                        the child restraint during driving
                                        or in a crash.
3-50      Seats and Restraints

Lower Anchor and Top Tether                                                Hatchback models may have
Anchor Locations                                                           zippers over the lower anchor
                                                                           areas. If so, unzip the seat cover
                                                                           below the labels to access each
                                                                           lower anchor.

                                     To assist you in locating the lower
                                     anchors, each seating position with
                                     lower anchors has two labels, near
                                     the crease between the seatback
                                     and the seat cushion.

                                                                           To assist you in locating the top
                                                                           tether anchors, the top tether anchor
                                                                           symbol is located on the cover.
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
                                                                               Seats and Restraints              3-51

                                                                                shade before installing the top
                                                                                tether. The cargo shade should
                                                                                remain off while the top tether is in
                                                                                use. Be sure to use an anchor
                                                                                located on the same side of the
                                                                                vehicle as the seating position
                                                                                where the child restraint will be
                                                                                placed.
                                                                                Do not secure a child restraint in a
                                                                                position without a top tether anchor
                                                                                if a national or local law requires
                                                                                that the top tether be attached, or if
              Sedan                                 Hatchback                   the instructions that come with the
For sedan models, the top tether       For hatchback models, the top            child restraint say that the top tether
anchors are located under the          tether anchors (B) are located in the    must be attached.
covers behind the rear seat on the     rear cargo area, attached to the         Accident statistics show that
filler panel. Pull open the cover to   back wall (A) of the vehicle.            children are safer if they are
access the top tether anchors.         Squeeze and pull the front part of       restrained in the rear rather than the
Be sure to use an anchor located on    the plastic cover to access the top      front seat. See Where to Put the
the same side of the vehicle as the    tether anchors. Remove the cargo         Restraint on page 3‑46 for
seating position where the child                                                additional information.
restraint will be placed.
3-52      Seats and Restraints

Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH                          { WARNING                              { WARNING
System                                  Do not attach more than one child     Children can be seriously injured
                                        restraint to a single anchor.         or strangled if a shoulder belt is
         { WARNING                      Attaching more than one child         wrapped around their neck and
                                        restraint to a single anchor could    the safety belt continues to
If a LATCH-type child restraint is      cause the anchor or attachment        tighten. Buckle any unused safety
not attached to anchors, the child      to come loose or even break           belts behind the child restraint so
restraint will not be able to protect   during a crash. A child or others     children cannot reach them. Pull
the child correctly. In a crash, the    could be injured. To reduce the       the shoulder belt all the way out
child could be seriously injured or     risk of serious or fatal injuries     of the retractor to set the lock,
killed. Install a LATCH-type child      during a crash, attach only one       if your vehicle has one, after the
restraint properly using the            child restraint per anchor.           child restraint has been installed.
anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions                                        Notice: Do not let the LATCH
that came with the child restraint                                           attachments rub against the
and the instructions in this                                                 vehicle’s safety belts. This may
manual.                                                                      damage these parts. If necessary,
                                                                             move buckled safety belts to
                                                                             avoid rubbing the LATCH
                                                                             attachments.
                                                                                Seats and Restraints             3-53

Do not fold the empty rear seat        2. If the child restraint manufacturer       2.5. Route and tighten the top
with a safety belt buckled. This          recommends that the top tether                 tether according to your
could damage the safety belt or           be attached, attach and tighten                child restraint instructions
the seat. Unbuckle and return the         the top tether to the top tether               and the following
safety belt to its stowed position,       anchor, if equipped. Refer to the              instructions:
before folding the seat.                  child restraint instructions and
1. Attach and tighten the lower           the following steps:
   attachments to the lower               2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
   anchors. If the child restraint        2.2. Flip the cover to access the
   does not have lower                         top tether anchors.
   attachments or the desired
   seating position does not have         2.3. For hatchback models,
   lower anchors, secure the child             remove the cargo shade
   restraint with the top tether and           before installing the top
   the safety belts. Refer to your             tether. The cargo shade
   child restraint manufacturer                should remain off while the
   instructions and the instructions           top tether is in use.
   in this manual.                        2.4. Raise the headrest or head
                                               restraint if the desired                  If the position you are using
   1.1. Find the lower anchors for
                                               seating position has an                   does not have a headrest
        the desired seating
                                               adjustable headrest or head               or head restraint and you
        position.
                                               restraint. See Head                       are using a single tether,
   1.2. Put the child restraint on             Restraints on page 3‑2.                   route the tether over the
        the seat.                                                                        seatback.
   1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
        attachments on the child
        restraint to the lower
        anchors.
3-54     Seats and Restraints




       If the position you are using   If the position you are using   If the position you are using
       does not have a headrest        has a headrest or head          has an adjustable headrest
       or head restraint and you       restraint and you are using     or head restraint and you
       are using a dual tether,        a dual tether, route the        are using a single tether,
       route the tether over the       tether under the headrest or    route the tether under the
       seatback.                       head restraint and in           headrest or head restraint
                                       between the headrest or         and in between the
                                       head restraint posts.           headrest or head restraint
                                                                       posts.
                                                                              Seats and Restraints             3-55

3. Before placing a child in the
                                            WARNING (Continued)
                                                                               Securing Child Restraints
   child restraint, make sure it is
   securely held in place. To check,
                                                                               (Right Front Seat
   grasp the child restraint at the      working properly after a crash,       Position)
   LATCH path and attempt to             see your dealer to have the           This vehicle has airbags. A rear
   move it side‐to‐side and              system inspected and any              seat is a safer place to secure a
   back‐and‐forth. There should be       necessary replacements made as        forward-facing child restraint. See
   no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of         soon as possible.                     Where to Put the Restraint on
   movement, for proper                                                        page 3‑46.
   installation.
                                        If the vehicle has the LATCH system    In addition, the vehicle has a
                                        and it was being used during a         passenger sensing system which is
Replacing LATCH System                  crash, new LATCH system parts          designed to turn off the right front
Parts After a Crash                     may be needed.                         passenger frontal airbag and
                                        New parts and repairs may be           seat-mounted side impact airbag
          { WARNING                     necessary even if the LATCH            (if equipped) under certain
                                        system was not being used at the       conditions. See and Passenger
 A crash can damage the LATCH           time of the crash.                     Airbag Status Indicator on
 system in the vehicle. A damaged                                              page 5‑12 for more information on
 LATCH system may not properly                                                 this, including important safety
 secure the child restraint,                                                   information.
 resulting in serious injury or even
 death in a crash. To help make
 sure the LATCH system is
                          (Continued)
3-56       Seats and Restraints

A label on the sun visor says,                                                  If the child restraint has the LATCH
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in       WARNING (Continued)                system, see Lower Anchors and
the front.” This is because the risk to                                         Tethers for Children (LATCH
the rear-facing child is so great,        deploy under some unusual             System) on page 3‑48 for how to
if the airbag deploys.                    circumstance, even though it is       install your child restraint using
                                          turned off.                           LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
          { WARNING                       Secure rear-facing child restraints   using a safety belt and it uses a top
                                                                                tether, see Lower Anchors and
                                          in a rear seat, even if the airbag
 A child in a rear-facing child           is off. If you secure a               Tethers for Children (LATCH
 restraint can be seriously injured       forward-facing child restraint in     System) on page 3‑48 for top tether
 or killed if the right front             the right front seat, always move     anchor locations.
 passenger airbag inflates. This is       the front passenger seat as far       Do not secure a child seat in a
 because the back of the                  back as it will go. It is better to   position without a top tether anchor
 rear-facing child restraint would        secure the child restraint in a       if a national or local law requires
 be very close to the inflating           rear seat.                            that the top tether be anchored, or if
 airbag. A child in a forward-facing                                            the instructions that come with the
 child restraint can be seriously         See Passenger Sensing System          child restraint say that the top strap
 injured or killed if the right front     on page 3‑31 for additional           must be anchored.
 passenger airbag inflates and the        information.
                                                                                In Canada, the law requires that
 passenger seat is in a forward                                                 forward-facing child restraints have
 position.                                                                      a top tether, and that the tether be
 Even if the passenger sensing                                                  attached.
 system has turned off the right
 front passenger frontal airbag, no
 system is fail-safe. No one can
 guarantee that an airbag will not
                         (Continued)
                                                                                 Seats and Restraints            3-57

You will be using the lap-shoulder       2. Put the child restraint on
belt to secure the child restraint in       the seat.
this position. Follow the instructions   3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
that came with the child restraint.         the lap and shoulder portions of
1. Move the seat as far back as it          the vehicle's safety belt through
   will go before securing the              or around the restraint. The child
   forward-facing child restraint.          restraint instructions will show
   When the passenger sensing               you how.
   system has turned off the right
   front passenger frontal airbag
   and seat-mounted side impact
   airbag (if equipped), the off
                                                                                  4. Push the latch plate into the
   indicator on the passenger
                                                                                     buckle until it clicks.
   airbag status indicator should
   light and stay lit when you start                                                 Position the release button on
   the vehicle. See Passenger                                                        the buckle so that the safety belt
   Airbag Status Indicator on                                                        could be quickly unbuckled if
   page 5‑12.                                                                        necessary.



                                            Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
                                            belt if needed.
3-58      Seats and Restraints

                                                                                  7. Before placing a child in the
                                                                                     child restraint, make sure it is
                                                                                     securely held in place. To check,
                                                                                     grasp the child restraint at the
                                                                                     safety belt path and attempt to
                                                                                     move it side to side and back
                                                                                     and forth. When the child
                                                                                     restraint is properly installed,
                                                                                     there should be no more than
                                                                                     2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
                                                                                  If the airbag or airbags are off, the
                                                                                  off indicator in the passenger airbag
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way   6. To tighten the belt, push down         status indicator will come on and
   out of the retractor to set the         on the child restraint, pull the       stay on when the vehicle is started.
   lock. When the retractor lock is        shoulder portion of the belt to
                                                                                  If a child restraint has been installed
   set, the belt can be tightened but      tighten the lap portion of the belt,
                                                                                  and the off symbol is not lit, see “If
   not pulled out of the retractor.        and feed the shoulder belt back
                                                                                  the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
                                           into the retractor. When installing
                                                                                  Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
                                           a forward-facing child restraint, it
                                                                                  System on page 3‑31 for more
                                           may be helpful to use your knee
                                                                                  information.
                                           to push down on the child
                                           restraint as you tighten the belt.     To remove the child restraint,
                                                                                  unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt
                                           Try to pull the belt out of the
                                                                                  and let it go back all the way.
                                           retractor to make sure the
                                           retractor is locked. If the
                                           retractor is not locked, repeat
                                           Steps 5 and 6.
                                                                                   Seats and Restraints            3-59

Securing Child Restraints                In Canada, the law requires that
                                         forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat Position)                     a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a     attached.
rear seating position, study the         If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child    the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is             using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle.            child restraint in this position.
If the child restraint has the LATCH     Be sure to follow the instructions
system, see Lower Anchors and            that came with the child restraint.
Tethers for Children (LATCH              Secure the child in the child restraint
System) on page 3‑48 for how and         when and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint                                                3. Push the latch plate into the
                                         If more than one child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is                                                   buckle until it clicks.
                                         needs to be installed in the rear
secured in the vehicle using a           seat, be sure to read Where to Put            Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether,    the Restraint on page 3‑46.                   the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for                                                      could be quickly unbuckled if
Children (LATCH System) on               1. Put the child restraint on
                                                                                       necessary.
page 3‑48 for top tether anchor             the seat.
locations.                               2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child seat in a             the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor        the vehicle's safety belt through
if a national or local law requires         or around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if      restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the         you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
3-60      Seats and Restraints

                                                                                  6. If the child restraint has a top
                                                                                     tether, follow the child restraint
                                                                                     manufacturer's instructions
                                                                                     regarding the use of the top
                                                                                     tether. See Lower Anchors and
                                                                                     Tethers for Children (LATCH
                                                                                     System) on page 3‑48 for more
                                                                                     information.
                                                                                  7. Before placing a child in the
                                                                                     child restraint, make sure it is
                                                                                     securely held in place. To check,
                                                                                     grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way   5. To tighten the belt, push down            safety belt path and attempt to
   out of the retractor to set the         on the child restraint, pull the          move it side‐to‐side and
   lock. When the retractor lock is        shoulder portion of the belt to           back‐and‐forth. When the child
   set, the belt can be tightened but      tighten the lap portion of the belt,      restraint is properly installed,
   not pulled out of the retractor.        and feed the shoulder belt back           there should be no more than
                                           into the retractor. When installing       2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
                                           a forward-facing child restraint, it
                                                                                  To remove the child restraint,
                                           may be helpful to use your knee
                                                                                  unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
                                           to push down on the child
                                                                                  let it return to the stowed position.
                                           restraint as you tighten the belt.
                                                                                  If the top tether is attached to a top
                                           Try to pull the belt out of the        tether anchor, disconnect it.
                                           retractor to make sure the
                                           retractor is locked. If the
                                           retractor is not locked, repeat
                                           Steps 4 and 5.
                                                                                                                Storage          4-1

Storage                                                  Storage                              cupholder, push in on the cover,
                                                                                              then pull it out. After use, push in
                                                         Compartments                         the cupholder until it latches.
Storage Compartments                                                                          There is also a cupholder located in
 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1   Glove Box                            the rear of the center console.
 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1    Lift up on the glove box lever to
 Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1     open it.                             Front Storage
                                                         Cupholders




                                                                                              The vehicle may have shopping bag
                                                                                              hooks on each front seatback. Lift
                                                         Two cupholders are located in the    the headrest to access the hooks.
                                                         center instrument panel, below the
                                                         climate control system. To use the
4-2   Storage

                2 NOTES
                                                                                                                    Instruments and Controls                    5-1

Instruments and                                                  Engine Coolant Temperature
                                                                  Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
                                                                                                                             Controls
Controls                                                         Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11
                                                                 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12                     Steering Wheel
                                                                 Passenger Airbag Status                                     Adjustment
Controls                                                          Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-1                             Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13
 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2                         Malfunction
 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3     Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3                           Brake System Warning
 Rear Window Wiper/                                               Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
  Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5         Antilock Brake System (ABS)
 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5      Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5             Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6               Hold Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7        Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
                                                                 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18
Warning Lights, Gauges, and                                      Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . 5-19
Indicators                                                       Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20
                                                                 High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20                   The lever is located under the
 Warning Lights, Gauges, and                                                                                                 steering column, slightly to the left.
   Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7        Daytime Running Lamps
 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8                   (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-20
 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9               Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-20
 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9          Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21
 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9             Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
 Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
                                                                Trip Computer
                                                                 Trip Computer (US Only) . . . . 5-21
5-2      Instruments and Controls

To adjust the steering wheel:          Steering Wheel Controls
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
   down into a comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the
   wheel in place.
Do not adjust the tilt lever while
driving.



                                                                           Side View of the Volume Control
                                       Front View of the Steering Wheel   If the vehicle has this feature, some
                                                   Controls               audio controls can be adjusted at
                                                                          the steering wheel.
                                                                          PWR (Power): Press and release
                                                                          to turn the system on and off.
                                                                          When the system is on, press and
                                                                          release for a short time to mute the
                                                                          system. Press and release again to
                                                                          turn the sound back on.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls               5-3

+ VOLUME −: Press the                    Horn
toggle bar located below the
+ VOLUME − button to adjust the          Press near or on the horn symbols
volume. Press the left side of the       on the steering wheel pad to sound
toggle bar, below the + (plus) sign to   the horn.
increase the volume. Press the
right side of the toggle bar, below      Windshield Wiper/Washer
the − (minus) sign to decrease the
volume.
MODE: Press and release this
button multiple times to cycle
through the audio playback options
that are available on the vehicle.                                                     Hatchback Shown
Options may include FM, AM, XM,                                               The lever is located on the right side
CD, and AUX.                                                                  of the steering column. The ignition
SEEK: Press and release to go to                                              must be turned to ON/RUN to
the next preset station.                                                      operate the windshield wipers.
Press and hold for a long time to go                                          Move the lever to one of the
to the next AM, FM, or XM station.                 Sedan Shown                following positions:
The radio seeks stations only with a                                          HI (High Speed): Fast wipes.
strong signal that are in the
selected band.                                                                LO (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
When playing a CD, press and
release to go to the next track.
Press and hold to fast forward
through the tracks.
5-4     Instruments and Controls

INT (Intermittent): Move to this       Clear ice and snow from the wiper        The spray continues until the lever
position for a delayed wiping cycle.   blades before using them. If frozen      is released. The wipers will run a
Turn the band on the windshield        to the windshield, carefully loosen or   few times and either stop or will
wiper toward FAST or SLOW for a        thaw them. Damaged wiper blades          resume at the speed being used
shorter or longer delay between        should be replaced. See Wiper            previously. See Washer Fluid on
wipes. The wiper speed can only be     Blade Replacement on page 10‑30.         page 10‑24 for information on filling
adjusted when the lever is in the      Heavy snow or ice can overload the       the windshield washer fluid.
INT position.                          wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
OFF: Turns the windshield              until the motor cools.                             { WARNING
wipers off.
                                       Windshield Washer                         In freezing weather, do not use
Misting Function                                                                 your washer until the windshield
                                       To use this feature, the ignition must
Move the lever toward INT for a        be turned to ON/RUN. Pull the             is warmed. Otherwise the washer
single wiping cycle. Hold it there     windshield washer/wiper lever             fluid can form ice on the
until the windshield wipers start;     toward you to spray washer fluid on       windshield, blocking your vision.
then let go. The windshield wipers     the windshield.
will stop after one wipe. If more
wipes are needed, hold the band
toward INT longer.
                                                                      Instruments and Controls                 5-5

Rear Window Wiper/                   The windshield washer reservoir is      M (Minute): Press once to go
                                     used for the windshield and rear        forward one minute. To go forward
Washer                               window. Check the fluid level if        more than one minute, press and
                                     either washer is not working. See       hold the button until the correct
         { WARNING                   Washer Fluid on page 10‑24.             minute is reached.
 In freezing weather, do not use                                             S (Set): Press to reset the time to
                                     Clock                                   the nearest hour.
 your washer until the windshield
 is warmed. Otherwise the washer     There is a digital clock located in     For example, if the set button is
 fluid can form ice on the           the center of the instrument panel,     pressed while the time is between
 windshield, blocking your vision.   above the center air outlets. When      8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to
                                     the ignition is turned to ACC/          8:00. If this button is pressed while
                                     ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, the time           the time is between 8:30 and 8:59,
The vehicle may have a rear          is displayed in the digital clock.      the display is set to 9:00.
window wiper/washer.                 There are three buttons for adjusting
                                     the digital clock:                      After disconnecting the battery or
Turn the rear wiper/washer band to                                           replacing the fuse, reset the clock.
operate the rear window wiper/       H (Hour): Press once to go forward
washer.                              one hour. To go forward more than       Power Outlets
OFF: Turns the rear window wiper/    one hour, press and hold the button
washer off.                          until the correct hour is reached.      Accessory power outlets can be
                                                                             used to plug in electrical equipment,
Z : Turns the rear wiper on for                                              such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
intermittent wipes.
                                                                             The accessory power outlet is
Y:   Sprays washer fluid onto the                                            located next to the parking brake on
rear window and the wiper operates                                           the center console.
continuously.
5-6     Instruments and Controls

Remove the cover to access and        Certain electrical accessories may        Cigarette Lighter
replace when not in use. The          not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet is             accessory power outlet and could          The cigarette lighter is located to the
operational when the ignition is      overload vehicle or adapter fuses.        right of the front ashtray. To use it,
turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or            If a problem is experienced, see          turn the ignition to ACC/
ON/RUN.                               your dealer.                              ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, push the
                                                                                cigarette lighter in all the way and
                                      When adding electrical equipment,         let go. When it is ready, it will pop
         { WARNING                    be sure to follow the proper              back out.
                                      installation instructions included with
 Power is always supplied to the      the equipment. See Add-On                 Electrical accessories may not be
 outlets. Do not leave electrical     Electrical Equipment on page 9‑40.        compatible with the cigarette lighter
 equipment plugged in when the                                                  and could result in blown vehicle or
 vehicle is not in use because the    Notice: Hanging heavy                     adapter fuses. If you experience a
                                      equipment from the power outlet           problem see your dealer for
 vehicle could catch fire and cause
                                      can cause damage not covered              additional information.
 injury or death.
                                      by the vehicle warranty. The
                                      power outlets are designed for            Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
Notice: Leaving electrical            accessory power plugs only, such          in while it is heating will not allow
equipment plugged in for an           as cell phone charge cords.               the lighter to back away from the
extended period of time while the                                               heating element when it is hot.
vehicle is off will drain the                                                   Damage from overheating may
battery. Always unplug electrical                                               occur to the lighter or heating
equipment when not in use and                                                   element. Do not hold a cigarette
do not plug in equipment that                                                   lighter in while it is heating.
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls               5-7

Ashtrays                               Warning Lights,                         Gauges can indicate when there
                                                                               could be a problem with a vehicle
The ashtray is located at the lower    Gauges, and                             function. Often gauges and warning
part of the center instrument panel.                                           lights work together to indicate a
To remove the front ashtray for        Indicators                              problem with the vehicle.
cleaning, open the ashtray fully,      Warning lights and gauges can
press in the retaining tab and pull                                            When one of the warning lights
                                       signal that something is wrong          comes on and stays on while
the bin out.                           before it becomes serious enough        driving, or when one of the gauges
Notice: If papers, pins, or other      to cause an expensive repair or         shows there may be a problem,
flammable items are put in the         replacement. Paying attention to the    check the section that explains what
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other       warning lights and gauges could         to do. Follow this manual's advice.
smoking materials could ignite         prevent injury.                         Waiting to do repairs can be costly
them and possibly damage the           Warning lights come on when there       and even dangerous.
vehicle. Never put flammable           could be a problem with a vehicle
items in the ashtray.                  function. Some warning lights come
                                       on briefly when the engine is started
                                       to indicate they are working.
5-8   Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster




        United States Manual Transmission Shown, Canada and Automatic Transmission Similar
                                                                         Instruments and Controls             5-9

Speedometer                             Cycle between the odometer and          Tachometer
                                        trip odometers A and B by pressing
The speedometer shows the               the reset button located in the lower
vehicle's speed in both kilometers      right area of the speedometer. Press
per hour (km/h) and miles per           the reset button to tell how many
hour (mph).                             miles or kilometers have been
                                        recorded on either Trip A or Trip B
Odometer                                since the trip odometer was last set
The odometer shows how far the          back to zero.
vehicle has been driven, in either      To reset each trip odometer to zero,
kilometers or miles.                    press and hold the reset button. The
                                        reset button resets only the trip
Trip Odometer                           odometer that is being displayed.
                                        Each trip odometer must be reset
The trip odometer can record the        individually.
number of miles, used in the United                                             The tachometer displays the engine
States, or kilometers, used in                                                  speed in revolutions per
Canada, traveled for up to two trips.                                           minute (rpm).
                                                                                Notice: If the engine is operated
                                                                                above 6,500 rpm, the vehicle
                                                                                could be damaged, and the
                                                                                damages would not be covered
                                                                                by the vehicle warranty. Do not
                                                                                operate the engine with the
                                                                                tachometer above 6,500 rpm.
5-10   Instruments and Controls

Fuel Gauge                                                              Here are four things that some
                                                                        owners ask about. None of these
                                                                        show a problem with the fuel gauge:
                                                                        .   At the service station, the gas
                                                                            pump shuts off before the gauge
                                                                            reads full.
                                                                        .   It takes a little more or less fuel
                                                                            to fill up than the gauge
                                                                            indicated. For example, the
                                                                            gauge may have indicated the
                                                                            tank was half full, but it actually
                                                                            took a little more or less than
                                           English
                                                                            half the tank's capacity to fill
          Metric           The fuel gauge indicates about how               the tank.
                           much fuel is left when the ignition is       .   The indicator moves a little when
                           turned to ON/RUN.
                                                                            turning a corner or speeding up.
                           When the tank nears empty, the low           .   The gauge goes back to empty
                           fuel warning light will come on.
                                                                            when the ignition is turned off.
                           There is still a little fuel left, but the
                           vehicle's fuel tank should be filled
                           soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
                           on page 5‑20 for more information.
                           An arrow on the fuel gauge
                           indicates the side of the vehicle the
                           fuel door is located.
                                                    Instruments and Controls                  5-11

Engine Coolant                                              See Engine Overheating on
                                                            page 10‑21.
Temperature Gauge
                                                            Safety Belt Reminders
                                                            Safety Belt Reminder Light
                                                            When the engine is started, a chime
                                                            sounds for several seconds to
                                                            remind a driver to fasten the safety
                                                            belt, unless the driver safety belt is
                                                            already buckled.

                                  English
                    The vehicle has an engine coolant
                    temperature gauge. With the ignition
         Metric
                    turned to ON/RUN, this gauge
                    shows the engine coolant
                    temperature.
                                                            The safety belt light comes on and
                    If the gauge pointer moves into the     stays on for several seconds, then
                    red area, the engine is too hot.        flashes for several more.
                    It means that the engine coolant has
                    overheated.                             This chime and light are repeated if
                                                            the driver remains unbuckled and
                    If the vehicle has been operating       the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
                    under normal driving conditions, pull   safety belt is already buckled,
                    off the road, stop the vehicle, and     neither the chime nor the light
                    turn off the engine as soon as          comes on.
                    possible.
5-12       Instruments and Controls

Airbag Readiness Light                      If the airbag readiness light stays on   status indicator near the clock,
                                            or comes on while driving, the           located in the center of the
There is an airbag readiness light          airbag system may not work               instrument panel.
on the instrument panel cluster,            properly. Have the vehicle serviced
which shows the airbag symbol. The          right away.
system checks the airbag's
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells if there is an electrical             { WARNING
problem. The system check includes           If the airbag readiness light stays
the airbag sensor, the airbag                on after the vehicle is started or
modules, the wiring, and the crash                                                              United States
                                             comes on while driving, it means
sensing and diagnostic module. For
                                             the airbag system might not be
more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on                 working properly. The airbags in
page 3‑24.                                   the vehicle might not inflate in a
                                             crash, or they could even inflate
                                             without a crash. To help avoid
                                             injury, have the vehicle serviced
                                             right away.                                           Canada
                                                                                     When the vehicle is started, the
                                            Passenger Airbag Status                  passenger airbag status indicator
                                                                                     will light PASSENGER AIRBAG ON
This light comes on when the                Indicator                                and PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or
vehicle is started, and it will flash for   The vehicle has the passenger            the symbol for on and off, for
a few seconds. When the light goes          sensing system. See Passenger            several seconds as a system check.
out this indicates the system is            Sensing System on page 3‑31 for          Then, after several more seconds,
functioning properly.                       important safety information. The        the status indicator will light either
                                            vehicle has a passenger airbag           PASSENGER AIRBAG ON or
                                                                                     PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF,
                                                                          Instruments and Controls                 5-13

or either the on or off symbol, to let   If, after several seconds, both status    Charging System Light
you know the status of the right front   indicator lights remain on, or if there
passenger frontal and seat-mounted       are no lights at all, there may be a
side impact airbag (if equipped).        problem with the lights or the
If the words PASSENGER AIRBAG            passenger sensing system. See
ON or the on symbol is lit on the        your dealer for service.
passenger airbag status indicator, it
means that the right front passenger               { WARNING
frontal airbag and seat-mounted                                                    This light will come on briefly when
side impact airbag (if equipped) is       If the airbag readiness light ever       the ignition is turned on, and the
enabled (may inflate).                    comes on and stays on, it means          engine is not running, as a check to
                                          that something may be wrong              show it is working.
If the words PASSENGER AIRBAG             with the airbag system. To help
OFF or the off symbol is lit on the                                                It should go out when the engine is
                                          avoid injury to yourself or others,
passenger airbag status indicator, it                                              started. If it stays on, or comes on
                                          have the vehicle serviced right
means that the passenger sensing                                                   while driving, there may have a
                                          away. See Airbag Readiness               problem with the electrical charging
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and              Light on page 5‑12 for more              system. Have it checked by your
seat-mounted side impact airbag           information, including important         dealer. Driving while this light is on
(if equipped).                            safety information.                      could drain the battery. If a short
                                                                                   distance must be driven with the
                                                                                   light on, turn off all accessories,
                                                                                   such as the radio and air conditioner
                                                                                   to help reduce the drain on the
                                                                                   battery.
5-14       Instruments and Controls

Malfunction                               If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp        Notice: Modifications made to the
                                          comes on and stays on, while the         engine, transmission, exhaust,
Indicator Lamp                            engine is running, this indicates that   intake, or fuel system of the
A computer system called OBD II           there is an OBD II problem and           vehicle or the replacement of the
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second              service is required.                     original tires with other than
Generation) monitors operation of         Malfunctions often are indicated by      those of the same Tire
the fuel, ignition, and emission          the system before any problem is         Performance Criteria (TPC) can
control systems. It makes sure that       apparent. Heeding the light can          affect the vehicle's emission
emissions are at acceptable levels        prevent more serious damage to the       controls and can cause this light
for the life of the vehicle, helping to   vehicle. This system assists the         to come on. Modifications to
produce a cleaner environment.            service technician in correctly          these systems could lead to
                                          diagnosing any malfunction.              costly repairs not covered by the
                                                                                   vehicle warranty. This could also
                                          Notice: If the vehicle is                result in a failure to pass a
                                          continually driven with this light       required Emission Inspection/
                                          on, after a while, the emission          Maintenance test. See
                                          controls might not work as well,         Accessories and Modifications on
                                          the vehicle fuel economy might           page 10‑4.
This light comes on when the              not be as good, and the engine
                                          might not run as smoothly. This          This light comes on during a
ignition is on, but the engine is not                                              malfunction in one of two ways:
running, as a check to show it is         could lead to costly repairs that
working. If it does not, have the         might not be covered by the              Light Flashing: A misfire condition
vehicle serviced by your dealer.          vehicle warranty.                        has been detected. A misfire
                                                                                   increases vehicle emissions and
                                                                                   could damage the emission control
                                                                                   system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
                                                                                   and service might be required.
                                                                           Instruments and Controls                 5-15

The following can prevent more            An emission system malfunction
                                                                                   .   Make sure to fuel the vehicle
serious damage to the vehicle:            might be corrected by doing the              with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
                                          following:                                   causes the engine not to run as
.   Reduce vehicle speed.                                                              efficiently as designed and may
.   Avoid hard accelerations.
                                          .   Make sure the fuel cap is fully          cause: stalling after start-up,
                                              installed. See Filling the Tank on       stalling when the vehicle is
.   Avoid steep uphill grades.                page 9‑37. The diagnostic                changed into gear, misfiring,
If the light continues to flash, when         system can determine if the fuel         hesitation on acceleration,
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.        cap has been left off or                 or stumbling on acceleration.
Find a safe place to park the                 improperly installed. A loose or         These conditions might go away
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at        missing fuel cap allows fuel to          once the engine is warmed up.
least 10 seconds, and restart the             evaporate into the atmosphere.
                                              A few driving trips with the cap         If one or more of these
engine. If the light is still flashing,
                                              properly installed should turn the       conditions occurs, change the
follow the previous steps and see
                                              light off.                               fuel brand used. It will require at
your dealer for service as soon as
                                                                                       least one full tank of the proper
possible.                                 .   If the vehicle has been driven           fuel to turn the light off.
Light On Steady: An emission                  through a deep puddle of water,
                                              the vehicle's electrical system           See Recommended Fuel on
control system malfunction has
                                              might be wet. The condition is           page 9‑35.
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be                usually corrected when the           If none of the above have made the
required.                                     electrical system dries out. A few   light turn off, have your dealer check
                                              driving trips should turn the        the vehicle. The dealer has the
                                              light off.                           proper test equipment and
                                                                                   diagnostic tools to fix any
                                                                                   mechanical or electrical problems
                                                                                   that might have developed.
5-16       Instruments and Controls

Emissions Inspection and
                                       .   the critical emission control        If the warning light comes on, there
Maintenance Programs                       systems have not been                is a brake problem. Have the brake
                                           completely diagnosed by the          system inspected right away.
Some state/provincial and local            system. This can happen if the
governments may have programs to           battery has recently been
inspect the on-vehicle emission            replaced or if the battery has run
control equipment. For the                 down. The diagnostic system
inspection, the emission system test       evaluates critical emission
equipment is connected to the              control systems during normal
vehicle’s Data Link                        driving. This can take                     Metric               English
Connector (DLC).                           several days of routine driving.
                                           If this has been done and the
                                           vehicle still does not pass the
                                           inspection, your dealer can
                                                                                           { WARNING
                                           prepare the vehicle for               The brake system might not be
                                           inspection.                           working properly if the brake
                                                                                 system warning light is on.
                                       Brake System Warning                      Driving with the brake system
The DLC is under the instrument        Light                                     warning light on can lead to a
panel near the steering wheel. See                                               crash. If the light is still on after
your dealer if assistance is needed.   The vehicle brake system consists
                                       of two hydraulic circuits. If one         the vehicle has been pulled off
The vehicle may not pass               circuit is not working, the remaining     the road and carefully stopped,
inspection if:                         circuit can still work to stop the        have the vehicle towed for
.   the Malfunction Indicator Lamp     vehicle. For normal braking               service.
    is on with the engine running,     performance, both circuits need to
    or if the light does not come on   be working
    when the ignition is turned to
    ON/RUN while the engine is off.
                                                                               Instruments and Controls                  5-17

This light should come on briefly            Antilock Brake System                      problem with the regular brakes.
when the ignition is turned to ON.                                                      See Brake System Warning Light on
If it does not come on then, have it
                                             (ABS) Warning Light                        page 5‑16.
fixed so it will be ready to warn if                                                    The ABS warning light will come on
there is a problem.                                                                     briefly when the ignition is turned to
When the ignition is on, the brake                                                      ON/RUN. This is normal. If the light
system warning light will also come                                                     does not come on then, have it fixed
on when the parking brake is set.                                                       so it will be ready to warn if there is
The light will stay on if the parking                                                   a problem.
brake does not fully release. If it          For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
stays on after the parking brake is          System (ABS), this light comes on          Up-Shift Light
fully released, it means there is a          briefly when the engine is started.
brake problem.
                                             If the light stays on, turn the ignition
If the light comes on while driving,         to LOCK/OFF or if the light comes
carefully pull off the road and stop.        on, stop as soon as possible and
The pedal may be harder to push or           turn the ignition off. Then start the
may go closer to the floor. It may           engine again to reset the system.
take longer to stop. If the light is still   If the light still stays on, or comes
on, have the vehicle towed for               on again while driving, the vehicle        The vehicle may have an up-shift
service. See Towing the Vehicle on           needs service. See your dealer.            light.
page 10‑74.                                  If the regular brake system warning        When this light comes on, shift to
                                             light is not on, the brakes will still     the next higher gear if weather,
                                             work, but the antilock brakes will not     road, and traffic conditions allow.
                                             work. If the regular brake system          See Manual Transmission on
                                             warning light is also on, the antilock
                                                                                        page 9‑29 for more information.
                                             brakes will not work and there is a
5-18      Instruments and Controls

Hold Mode Light                         Tire Pressure Light                     When the Light Flashes First and
                                                                                Then is On Steady
                                                                                This indicates that there may be a
                                                                                problem with the Tire Pressure
                                                                                Monitor System. The light flashes
                                                                                for about a minute and then stays
                                                                                on steady for the remainder of the
                                                                                ignition cycle. This sequence will
If the vehicle has this feature, this   For vehicles with the Tire Pressure     repeat with every ignition cycle. See
light comes on when the Hold Mode       Monitoring System, this light comes     Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
is active.                              on briefly when the engine is           page 10‑51 for more information.
If the HOLD mode light flashes,         started.
have the vehicle checked. See           It provides information about tire      Engine Oil Pressure Light
“Hold Mode” under Automatic             pressures and the Tire Pressure
Transmission on page 9‑25 for more      Monitoring System.
information.
                                        When the Light is On Steady
                                        This indicates that one or more of
                                        the tires are significantly
                                        underinflated.
                                                                                If the vehicle has low engine oil
                                        Stop and check the tires as soon as
                                                                                pressure, this light will stay on after
                                        it is safe to do, and inflate them to
                                                                                the engine is started, or come on
                                        the proper pressure. See Tires on
                                                                                while driving.
                                        page 10‑42 for more information.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls              5-19

This indicates that the engine is not                                          Change Engine Oil Light
receiving enough oil. The engine                  { WARNING
could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it          Do not keep driving if the oil
fixed immediately by your dealer.        pressure is low. The engine can
                                         become so hot that it catches fire.
The oil light could also come on in      Someone could be burned. Check
other situations:                        the oil as soon as possible and
.   When the ignition is on but the      have the vehicle serviced.
                                                                               The vehicle may have an engine oil
    engine is not running, the light
                                                                               life system that indicates when the
    will come on as a test to show it
                                        Notice: Lack of proper engine oil      oil needs to be changed.
    is working. The light will go out
                                        maintenance can damage the
    when the ignition is turned on.                                            When the change engine oil light
                                        engine. The repairs would not be       comes on, it means that the engine
    If it does not come on with the
                                        covered by the vehicle warranty.
    ignition on, there may be a                                                oil needs to be changed.
                                        Always follow the maintenance
    problem with the fuse or bulb.                                             Once the engine oil has been
                                        schedule for changing engine oil.
    Have it fixed right away.                                                  changed, the engine oil life system
.   If the vehicle comes to a hard                                             must be reset. After reset, the
    stop, the light may come on for a                                          change engine oil light goes out.
    moment. This is normal.                                                    See Engine Oil Life System on
                                                                               page 10‑12, Scheduled
                                                                               Maintenance on page 11‑2 and
                                                                               Engine Oil on page 10‑9 for more
                                                                               information.
5-20       Instruments and Controls

Low Fuel Warning Light                   High-Beam on Light                  Front Fog Lamp Light




This light comes on when the             This light comes on when the        For vehicles with this feature, the
vehicle is low on fuel.                  high-beam headlamps are in use.     fog lamps light will come on when
The low fuel warning light comes on      See Headlamp High/Low-Beam          the fog lamps are in use.
when there are approximately             Changer on page 6‑2 for more        The light will go out when the fog
6.0 liters (1.7 gallons) of fuel         information.                        lamps are turned off. See Fog
remaining in the tank.                                                       Lamps on page 6‑4 for more
To turn the light off, add fuel to the   Daytime Running Lamps               information.
fuel tank. See Filling the Tank on       (DRL) Indicator Light
page 9‑37.




                                         This light turns on whenever the
                                         Daytime Running Lamps are on.
                                         See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
                                         on page 6‑2 for more information.
                                                                           Instruments and Controls                 5-21

Cruise Control Light                      Door Ajar Light                           Trip Computer
                                                                                    Trip Computer (US Only)
                                                                                    The vehicle may have a trip
                                                                                    computer. It provides the driver with
                                                                                    driving information such as the
                                                                                    driving distance for the remaining
If the vehicle has cruise control, this   The door ajar light comes on and          fuel, outside temperature, average
light comes on whenever the cruise        stays on until all doors, trunk and       fuel economy, and driving time.
control is set                            liftgate are closed and completely        The trip computer button is located
The light will go out when the cruise     latched.                                  in the lower right area of the
control is turned off. See Cruise         If the key is in the ignition while the   tachometer. Each time you press it,
Control on page 9‑32 for more             driver door is open, a warning chime      the display cycles through the
information.                              also sounds.                              available choices.
5-22       Instruments and Controls

Range for Remaining Fuel                 the same amount of fuel is in the      Driving Time
                                         fuel tank. This is because different
                                         driving conditions produce different
                                         fuel economies. Generally, freeway
                                         driving produces better fuel
                                         economy than city driving.
                                         Outside Temperature
This display shows the approximate       This display shows the approximate     This display can be used as a timer.
number of remaining miles the            outside temperature.
                                                                                The display will show the amount of
vehicle can be driven without            Average Fuel Economy                   time that has passed since the timer
refueling.                                                                      was last reset. The timer is only
The minimum display for the range                                               running while the vehicle is moving.
is 45 miles. Once the minimum                                                   To reset the driving time, press and
display range is under 45 miles, you                                            hold the trip computer button.
will see dashes on the display.
The fuel range estimate is based on
an average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history      This display shows the approximate
and the amount of fuel remaining in      average miles per gallon (mpg).
the fuel tank. This estimate will        This number is calculated based on
change if driving conditions change.     the number of mpg recorded since
For example, if driving in traffic and   the last time this menu item was
making frequent stops, this display      reset. To reset the average fuel
may read one number, but if the          economy, press and hold the trip
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the      computer button.
number may change even though
                                                                                                                    Lighting         6-1

Lighting                                                       Exterior Lighting                   The exterior lamp band has
                                                                                                   three positions:
                                                               Exterior Lamp Controls              3 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Exterior Lighting                                                                                  headlamps, together with the
 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1                                                        following:
 Headlamp High/Low-Beam                                                                            .   Taillamps
  Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2                                               .   License Plate Lamp
 Daytime Running                                                                                   .   Instrument Panel Lights
  Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3
                                                                                                   .   Parking Lamps
 Turn and Lane-Change                                                                              The headlamps automatically turn
  Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3                                          off when the ignition key is turned to
 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4                                             LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.
Interior Lighting                                                                                  ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
 Instrument Panel Illumination                                    Uplevel Shown, Base Similar      parking lamps, together with the
   Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4                                         taillamps, license plate lamp, and
 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5              The lever on the left side of the   instrument panel lights.
                                                               steering column operates the
Lighting Features                                                                                  OFF: Turns all the lamps off,
                                                               exterior lamps.
 Inadvertent Power Battery                                                                         except the Daytime Running
   Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5                                       Lamps (DRL).
6-2      Lighting

Headlamp High/                           Daytime Running                         When the DRL system is on, the
                                                                                 taillamps, sidemarker lamps,
Low-Beam Changer                         Lamps (DRL)                             parking lamps, and instrument panel
The headlamps must be on for this        Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can         lights do not come on unless the
feature to work.                         make it easier for others to see the    exterior lamps control is turned to
                                         front of your vehicle during the day.   the parking lamp or headlamp
Push the turn signal lever away
                                         Fully functional daytime running        position.
from you to turn the high beams on.
                                         lamps are required on all vehicles      The DRL system turns off when one
The 3 light comes on in instrument       first sold in Canada.                   of the following conditions are met:
panel cluster while the high beams       The DRL system makes the
are on and the ignition is turned to
                                                                                 .   The ignition is off.
                                         headlamps come on when the
ON/RUN.                                  following conditions are met:           .   The parking brake is on.
Pull the lever toward you to return to   .   The ignition is on.                 .   The high-beam headlamps
low beams.                                                                           are on.
                                         .   The exterior lamp band is in
                                             OFF or in the parking lamp          .   The low-beam headlamps
Flash-to-Pass                                position.                               are on.
This feature is used to signal to the                                            .   The flash-to-pass feature
                                         .   The parking brake is released.
vehicle ahead that you want                                                          is used.
to pass.                                 An indicator light on instrument
                                         panel cluster comes on when the         The regular headlamp system
Pull the turn signal/multifunction                                               should be used when needed.
                                         DRL system is on.
lever toward you until the high-beam
headlamps come on, then release
the lever to turn them off.
                                                                                                    Lighting           6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers                  Turn and Lane-Change                      Raise or lower the lever until the
                                                                                   arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
The hazard warning flasher button        Signals                                   change. Hold it there until the lane
is located to the right of the climate                                             change is completed.
control system on the sedan.
                                                                                   The lever returns to its starting
| Hazard Warning Flasher:                                                          position whenever it is released.
Press to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.                                                If after signaling a turn or a lane
This warns others that you are                                                     change the arrow flashes rapidly or
having trouble. Press the button                                                   does not come on, a signal bulb
again to turn the flashers off.                                                    may be burned out.
When the hazard warning flashers                                                   Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
are on, the turn signals will                                                      is not burned out, check the fuse.
not work.                                                                          See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
                                                                                   page 10‑36.
                                         An arrow on the instrument panel
                                         cluster flashes in the direction of the
                                         turn or lane change.
                                         Move the lever all the way up or
                                         down to signal a turn.
6-4      Lighting

Fog Lamps                               To turn the fog lamps off, turn the   Interior Lighting
                                        band to # again. The fog lamp
For vehicles with fog lamps, they
                                        indicator light will go off.          Instrument Panel
are controlled by the # band
located on the middle of the turn       The fog lamps will also turn off      Illumination Control
signal/multifunction lever.             when the high-beam headlamps are
                                        turned on. When the high-beam         This feature controls the brightness
To use the fog lamps, the ignition      headlamps are turned off, the fog     of the instrument panel lights.
must be turned to ON/RUN and the        lamps will turn on again.
low-beam headlamps or parking
lamps must be on.                       Some localities have laws that
                                        require the headlamps to be on
Turn the band to # to turn the fog      along with the fog lamps.
lamps on. The band automatically
returns to its starting position when
released. The fog lamp indicator
light comes on in the instrument
panel cluster. See Front Fog Lamp
Light on page 5‑20.



                                                                              The thumbwheel for this feature is
                                                                              located on the instrument panel to
                                                                              the left of the steering column. Turn
                                                                              the thumbwheel to brighten or dim
                                                                              the lights.
                                                                              Lighting   6-5

Dome Lamps                           Lighting Features
The vehicle has a dome lamp
located in the overhead console.     Inadvertent Power Battery
Move the switch to the following     Saver
positions:                           This feature is designed to protect
ON: The light comes on and           the vehicle's battery against
stays on.                            drainage. If the exterior lamps
O (Door): The light comes on         control is left in the ; or 2
when a door is opened. The light     position, the key is removed and the
turns off when all the doors are     driver door is opened, the lights will
closed.                              turn off automatically.
OFF: The light remains off even      If the key is removed and the driver
when a door is opened.               door is opened while the dome lamp
                                     is on, the dome lamp will not turn off
Be sure all doors and trunk lid or   automatically.
hatch are completely closed or the
battery may drain.
6-6   Lighting

                 2 NOTES
                                                                                                  Infotainment System                 7-1

Infotainment                                                Introduction                          To minimize taking your eyes off the
                                                                                                  road while driving, do the following
System                                                      Determine which radio the vehicle
                                                            has and read the following pages to
                                                                                                  while the vehicle is parked:
                                                                                                  .   Become familiar with the
                                                            become familiar with its features.
                                                                                                      operation and controls of the
Introduction                                                                                          audio system.
 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1               { WARNING                   .   Set up the tone, speaker
 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
                                                             Taking your eyes off the road for        adjustments, and preset radio
Radio                                                        extended periods could cause a           stations.
 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3           crash resulting in injury or death   For more information, see Defensive
 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6         to you or others. Do not give        Driving on page 9‑2.
 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8             extended attention to
 Fixed Mast Antenna                                                                               Notice: Contact your dealer
                                                             entertainment tasks while driving.   before adding any equipment.
  (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
 Backglass Antenna                                                                                Adding audio or communication
  (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9   This system provides access to        equipment could interfere with
 Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-10                many audio and non‐audio listings.    the operation of the vehicle's
Audio Players                                                                                     engine, radio, or other systems,
 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10                                             and could damage them. Follow
 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15                                                   federal rules covering mobile
                                                                                                  radio and telephone equipment.
7-2   Infotainment System

Operation                                                          Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/
                                                                   Treble)
                                                                   SOUND (Bass/Mid/Treble): Press
                                                                   to adjust the bass, midrange,
                                                                   or treble.
                                                                   Adjusting the Bass
                                                                   To adjust the bass:
                                                                   1. Press SOUND.
                                                                   2. Press the pushbutton below the
                                                                      Bass tab on the display.
                                      Radio with CD
                                                                   3. Turn   O to adjust the setting.
       AM-FM Radio          Playing the Radio
                                                                   4. The settings are saved after
                            O (Power/Volume):      Press and          five seconds.
                            release to turn the system on. Press
                            and hold this knob for more than       Adjusting the Midrange
                            two seconds to turn the system off.    To adjust the midrange:
                            Turn to increase or decrease the       1. Press SOUND.
                            volume.
                                                                   2. Press the pushbutton below the
                            When the system is on, press and          Mid tab on the display.
                            release O to mute the system.
                                                                   3. Turn   O to adjust the setting.
                            Press and release O again to turn
                            the sound back on.                     4. The settings are saved after
                                                                      five seconds.
                                                                           Infotainment System               7-3

Adjusting the Treble                 Adjusting the Fade                    Radio
To adjust the treble:                To adjust the fade:
1. Press SOUND.                      1. Press SOUND.                       AM-FM Radio
2. Press the pushbutton below the    2. Press the pushbutton below the     Finding a Station (AM‐FM
   Treb tab on the display.             Fad tab on the display.            Radio)
3. Turn   O to adjust the setting.   3. Turn   O to adjust the setting.    BAND: Press to choose FM, AM,
                                                                           or XM™ (if equipped). The display
4. The settings are saved after      4. The settings are saved after
                                                                           will show the selection.
   five seconds.                        five seconds.
                                                                           u   SEEK: Press to seek the next
Adjusting the Speakers               Setting the EQ                        radio station with a strong signal in
(Balance/Fade)                       SOUND (Equalization): Press to        the selected band.
SOUND (Balance/Fade): Press to       select an equalization setting.       t SEEK: Press to seek the
adjust the balance or fade.                                                previous radio station with a strong
                                     Setting the EQ
Adjusting the Balance                                                      signal in the selected band.
                                     1. Press SOUND.
To adjust the balance:                                                     [ TUNE:    Press to go to the next
                                     2. Press the pushbutton below the     station manually.
1. Press SOUND.                         P.E.Q. tab on the display. The
                                        Pop, Rock, Ctry, Voice, Jazz,      r TUNE: Press to go to the
2. Press the pushbutton below the                                          previous station manually.
                                        Clas tabs appear on the display.
   Bal tab on the display.
                                     3. Press the pushbutton below the
3. Turn   O to adjust the setting.      desired selection to set the EQ.
4. The settings are saved after         Pressing the same pushbutton
   five seconds.                        again cancels the EQ setting.
7-4      Infotainment System

SCAN: Press to scan radio                To use Automatic Store:                 Finding a Station (Radio with
stations. The radio goes to a station,   1. Press and hold AST to use Auto       CD, and Radio with
plays for a few seconds, then goes          Store mode.                          Six‐Disc CD)
to the next station. Press this button
again to stop scanning.                  2. Press the pushbutton below the       BAND: Press to choose FM, AM,
                                            ON tab on the radio display.         or XM (if equipped). The display will
The radio only scans stations with a                                             show the selection.
strong signal in the selected band.      3. Automatic Store searches for
                                            radio stations with a strong         u   SEEK: Press to seek the next
AST (Automatic Store): Twelve               signal and automatically set         radio station with a strong signal in
preset stations with the strongest          presets A1 and A2 with new           the selected band.
reception in the area can be                stations.
automatically stored. The radio will                                             t SEEK: Press to seek the
only scan stations with a strong         4. After all stations are set, press    previous radio station with a strong
signal that are in the selected AM or       the pushbutton below the arrow       signal in the selected band.
FM band. If the Automatic Store             tab on the radio display to return   [ TUNE:    Press to go to the next
function is started in the FM band,         to the main radio screen             station manually.
only FM stations are stored in           To reset the automatically stored
preset pages A1 and A2. If the                                                   r TUNE: Press to go to the
                                         radio stations, press and hold AST.     previous station manually.
Automatic Store function is started      Then press the pushbutton below
in the AM band, only AM stations         the RESE tab on the radio display.      SCAN/AST: Press to scan radio
are stored in A1 and A2.                 If no stations are stored on preset     stations. The radio goes to a station,
A combination of AM, FM and XM           pages A1 and A2, the RESE option        plays for a few seconds, then goes
(if equipped) stations can be stored     does not appear in the radio display.   to the next station. The radio only
manually into the other four favorite    When the Automatic Store function       scans stations with a strong signal
pages.                                   is used, any stations that were         in the selected band. Press SCAN/
                                         previously set will be deleted and      AST again to stop scanning.
                                         replaced with new stations.
                                                                                Infotainment System               7-5

Press and hold SCAN/AST to use          To use Automatic Store:                 Storing a Radio Station
Automatic Store. The radio only         1. Press and hold SCAN/AST to           Drivers are encouraged to set up
scans stations with a strong signal        use Automatic Store mode.            radio station favorites while the
in the selected band.
                                        2. Press the pushbutton below the       vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
AST (Automatic Store): Twelve              ON tab on the radio display.         favorite stations using the
preset stations with the strongest                                              pushbuttons, favorites button, and
reception in the area can be            3. Automatic Store searches for         steering wheel controls. See
automatically stored. The radio will       radio stations with a strong         Defensive Driving on page 9‑2.
only scan stations with a strong           signal and automatically sets
                                           presets A1 and A2 with new           A maximum of 36 stations can be
signal that are in the selected AM or
                                           stations.                            programmed as favorites using the
FM band. If the Automatic Store
                                                                                6 pushbuttons positioned below the
function is started in the FM band,     4. After all stations are set, press    radio station frequency labels and
only FM stations are stored in             the pushbutton below the arrow       by using the radio favorites page
preset pages A1 and A2. If the             tab on the radio display to return   button (FAV button). Press the FAV
Automatic Store function is started        to the main radio screen.            button to go through up to six pages
in the AM band, only AM stations
                                        To reset the automatically stored       of favorites, each having six favorite
are stored in A1 and A2.
                                        radio stations, press and hold          stations available per page.
A combination of AM, FM, and XM
                                        SCAN/AST. Then press the                If Automatic Store is used, then four
(if equipped) stations can be stored
                                        pushbutton below the RESE tab on        pages of favorites are available.
manually into the other four favorite
                                        the radio display. If no stations are   Each page of favorites can contain
pages.
                                        stored on preset pages A1 and A2,       any combination of AM, FM, or XM
                                        the RESE option does not appear in      (if equipped) stations. To store a
                                        the radio display. When the             station as a favorite:
                                        Automatic Store function is used,       1. Tune in the desired station.
                                        any stations that were previously set
                                        will be deleted and replaced with       2. Press and release the FAV
                                        new stations.                              button to display the page where
                                                                                   the station is to be stored.
7-6       Infotainment System

3. Press and hold one of the six      Satellite Radio                         t SEEK: Press to seek the
   numbered pushbuttons until a                                               previous XM channel.
   beep sounds. When the              XM™ Satelite Radio Service
   pushbutton is pressed and                                                  [ TUNE:  Press to go to the next
                                      XM is a satellite radio service based   XM channel.
   released, the station that was     in the 48 contiguous United States
   set will return.                   and 10 Canadian provinces. XM           r TUNE: Press to go to the
4. Repeat the Steps 1 through 3 for   Satellite Radio has a wide variety of   previous XM channel.
   each radio station to be stored    programming and commercial-free         SCAN/AST: Press to scan XM
   as a favorite.                     music, coast-to-coast, and in           channels. The radio goes to a
To set up the number of favorites     digital-quality sound. A service fee    channel, plays for a few seconds,
                                      is required to receive the XM           then goes to the next channel.
pages:
                                      service. For more information,          Press SCAN/AST again to stop
1.    Press and hold FAV until the    contact XM at www.xmradio.com or        scanning.
     radio setup menu displays.       call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
                                                                              SCAN: Press to scan XM
2. Select the desired number of       www.xmradio.ca or call
                                                                              channels. The radio goes to a
   favorites pages by pressing the    1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
                                                                              channel, plays for a few seconds,
   pushbutton located below the       Finding a Channel                       then goes to the next channel.
   displayed page numbers.                                                    Press this button again to stop
                                      BAND: Press to choose FM, AM,           scanning.
3. Press FAV to return to the         or XM. The display will show the
   original main radio screen         selection.
   showing the radio station
   frequency tabs and to begin the    u  SEEK: Press to seek the next
   process of programming             XM channel.
   favorites for the chosen number
   of numbered pages.
                                                                               Infotainment System                7-7

Storing an XM Channel                    3. Press and hold one of the six      XM Radio Messages
                                            numbered pushbuttons until a
Drivers are encouraged to set up                                               UPDATING: The encryption code
                                            beep sounds. When the
XM Channel favorites while the                                                 in the receiver is being updated, and
                                            pushbutton is pressed and
vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to                                                no action is required. This process
                                            released, the channel that was
favorite stations using the                                                    should take no longer than
                                            set will return.
pushbuttons, favorites button, and                                             30 seconds.
steering wheel controls. See             4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for
                                                                               NO SIGNAL: The system is
Defensive Driving on page 9‑2.              each XM channel to be stored
                                                                               functioning correctly, but the vehicle
                                            as a favorite.
A maximum of 36 stations can be                                                is in a location that is blocking the
programmed as favorites using the        To set up the number of favorites     XM signal. When the vehicle is
6 pushbuttons positioned below the       pages:                                moved into an open area, the signal
radio station frequency labels and       1. Press and hold FAV until the       should return.
by using the radio favorites page           radio setup menu displays.         LOADING: The audio system is
button (FAV button). Press the FAV                                             acquiring and processing audio and
button to go through up to six pages     2. Select the desired number of
                                            favorites pages by pressing the    text data. No action is needed. This
of favorites, each having six favorite                                         message should disappear shortly.
stations available per page.                pushbutton located below the
If Automatic Store is used, then four       displayed page numbers.            OFF AIR: This channel is not
pages of favorites are available.        3. Press FAV to return to the         currently in service. Tune in to
Each page of favorites can contain          original main radio screen         another channel.
any combination of AM, FM, or XM            showing the radio frequency        CH UNAVAILABLE: This
channels. To store an XM channel            tabs and to begin the process of   previously assigned channel is no
as a favorite:                              programming favorites for the      longer assigned. Tune to another
1. Tune in the desired channel.             chosen number of numbered          station. If this station was one of the
                                            pages.                             presets, choose another station for
2. Press and release the FAV                                                   that preset button.
   button to display the page where
   the channel is to be stored.
7-8      Infotainment System

RADIO ID: If tuned to channel 0,         AM                                        XM™ Satellite Radio Service
this message alternates with the XM
                                         The range for most AM stations is         XM Satellite Radio Service gives
Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This
                                         greater than for FM, especially at        digital radio reception from
label is needed to activate the
                                         night. The longer range can cause         coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
service.
                                         station frequencies to interfere with     United States, and in Canada. Just
CHECK XM TUNER: If this                  each other. For better radio              as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
message does not clear within a          reception, most AM radio stations         interfere with satellite radio signals,
short period of time, the receiver       boost the power levels during the         causing the sound to fade in and
could have a fault. Consult with your    day, and then reduce these levels         out. In addition, traveling or standing
dealer.                                  during the night. Static can also         under heavy foliage, bridges,
                                         occur when things like storms and         garages, or tunnels may cause loss
Radio Reception                          power lines interfere with radio          of the XM signal for a period of time.
                                         reception. When this happens, try
Frequency interference and static                                                  Cellular Phone Usage
                                         reducing the treble on the radio.
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone                                              Cellular phone usage may cause
                                         FM Stereo                                 interference with the vehicle's radio.
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic     FM signals only reach about 16 to         This interference may occur when
                                         65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the      making or receiving phone calls,
devices are plugged into the
                                         radio has a built-in electronic circuit   charging the phone's battery,
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the       that automatically works to reduce        or simply having the phone on. This
item from the accessory power            interference, some static can occur,      interference causes an increased
                                         especially around tall buildings or       level of static while listening to the
outlet.
                                         hills, causing the sound to fade in       radio. If static is received while
                                         and out.                                  listening to the radio, unplug the
                                                                                   cellular phone and turn it off.
                                                                                 Infotainment System               7-9

Fixed Mast Antenna                        for proper radio reception, the        Because this antenna is built into
                                          antenna connector at the top-center    the rear window, there is a reduced
(Hatchback)                               of the rear window needs to be         risk of damage caused by car
Vehicles without OnStar® have a           properly attached to the post on the   washes and vandals.
fixed mast antenna that can               glass.                                 If static is heard on the radio, when
withstand most car washes without         Notice: Using a razor blade or         the rear window defogger is turned
being damaged. If the mast should         sharp object to clear the inside       on, it could mean that a defogger
ever become slightly bent,                rear window can damage the rear        grid line has been damaged. If this
straighten it out by hand. If the mast    window antenna and/or the rear         is true, the grid line must be
is badly bent, replace it.                window defogger. Repairs would         repaired.
Check occasionally to make sure           not be covered by the vehicle          If adding a cellular telephone to the
the mast is still tightened to the        warranty. Do not clear the inside      vehicle, and the antenna needs to
antenna base located on the roof of       rear window with sharp objects.        be attached to the glass, make sure
the vehicle. If tightening is required,   Notice: Do not apply aftermarket       that the grid lines for the AM-FM
tighten by hand.                          glass tinting with metallic film.      antenna are not damaged. There is
                                          The metallic film in some tinting      enough space between the grid
Backglass Antenna                         materials will interfere with or       lines to attach a cellular telephone
(Sedan)                                   distort the incoming radio             antenna without interfering with
                                          reception. Any damage caused to        radio reception.
Vehicles without OnStar® have the         your backglass antenna due to
AM-FM antenna integrated with the         metallic tinting materials will not
rear window defogger, located in the      be covered by the vehicle
rear window. Make sure that the           warranty.
inside surface of the rear window is
not scratched and that the lines on
the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could
interfere with radio reception. Also,
7-10      Infotainment System

Multi-Band Antenna                    Audio Players                         Care of CDs
Vehicles with OnStar have a                                                 If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
multi-band antenna located on the     CD Player                             can be reduced due to CD-R quality,
roof of the vehicle. The antenna is                                         the method of recording, the quality
used for the AM/FM radio, OnStar      Care of the CD Player                 of the music that has been
and the XM Satellite Radio Service    Do not add labels to a CD. It could   recorded, and the way the CD-R or
System. Keep the antenna clear of     get caught in the CD player. Use a    CD-RW has been handled. Handle
obstructions for clear reception.     marking pen to write on the top of    them carefully. Store CD-Rs in their
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the     the CD if a description is needed.    original cases or other protective
performance of the AM/FM radio,                                             cases and away from direct sunlight
                                      Do not use CD lens cleaners, they     and dust. The CD player scans the
OnStar, and the XM system may be
                                      could damage the CD player.           bottom surface of the disc. If the
affected if the sunroof is open.
                                      Notice: If a label is added to a      surface of a CD is damaged, such
                                      CD, or more than one CD is            as cracked, broken, or scratched,
                                      inserted into the slot at a time,     the CD does not play properly or not
                                      or an attempt is made to play         at all. Do not touch the bottom side
                                      scratched or damaged CDs, the         of a CD while handling it; this could
                                      CD player could be damaged.           damage the surface. Pick up CDs
                                      While using the CD player, use        by grasping the outer edges or the
                                      only CDs in good condition            edge of the hole and the outer edge.
                                      without any label, load one CD at     If the surface of a CD is soiled,
                                      a time, and keep the CD player        clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or
                                      and the loading slot free of          dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
                                      foreign materials, liquids, and       neutral detergent solution mixed
                                      debris.                               with water. Make sure the wiping
                                      If an error displays, see “CD         process starts from the center to
                                      Messages” earlier in this section.    the edge.
                                                                                      Infotainment System             7-11

Playing a CD                               [ TUNE (Next Track):                        Press CD/AUX while a CD is
                                           Press [ TUNE to go to the next              playing to pause the CD. PAUSE
Radio with CD                                                                          flashes on the display. Press CD/
                                           track. The track number will appear
Insert a CD partway into the slot,                                                     AUX again to start playing the CD.
                                           on the display. The player will
label side up. The player pulls it in      continue moving forward through             Press CD/AUX to play a CD when
and the CD begins playing. A CD            the CD with each press of                   listening to the audio contents from
can be loaded while the ignition is in     [ TUNE.                                     other device (AUX mode). CD
the OFF position.                                                                      Loading appears on the display
When the CD is inserted, CD
                                           r TUNE (Previous Track): Press              when the CD player has been
                                           to go to the start of the current track.
Loading appears on the display. As                                                     selected. The CD symbol will
                                           The track number will appear on the
each new track starts to play, the                                                     appear on the display when a CD is
                                           display. The player will continue
track number displays.                                                                 loaded.
                                           moving backward through the CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off     with each press of r TUNE.                  EJECT: Press to eject a CD. The
with a CD in the player, it will stay in                                               CD can be ejected when the ignition
the player. When a CD is in the            BAND: Press to listen to the radio          or the radio is turned off.
player and the ignition is in the ON/      while a CD is playing. The CD
                                           remains inside the radio for future         INFO/DISP (Information/Display):
RUN position, the radio must be                                                        : Press to display additional text
turned on before the CD will start         listening.
                                                                                       information related to the current
playing. When the ignition and radio       CD/AUX: Press to play a CD when             MP3/WMA song. A choice of
are turned on, the CD will start           listening to the radio. CD Loading          additional information such as: Song
playing where it stopped, if it was        appears on the display when the CD          Title , Album Title, Artist, Bit rate
the last selected audio source.            player has been selected. The CD            may appear.
The CD player can play the smaller         symbol will appear on the display
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an             when a CD is loaded.
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
7-12      Infotainment System

RPT (Repeat): Press the                 Using an MP3                              The player is able to read and play
pushbutton under the RPT tab on                                                   a maximum of 50 folders,
the display to repeat the current       MP3/WMA CD-R Disc Format                  5 sessions, and 999 files. Long file
track, RPT appears on the display.      If you burn your own MP3/WMA              names and folder names can use
Press the pushbutton again to stop      disc on a personal computer:              more disc memory space than
repeat.                                                                           necessary. To conserve space on
                                        .   Make sure the MP3/WMA files
RDM (Random): Press the                                                           the disc, minimize the length of the
                                            are recorded on a CD-R disc.
pushbutton below the RDM tab on                                                   file and folder names. An MP3/WMA
                                        .   Do not mix standard audio and         CD that was recorded using no file
the display to play tracks in random,
                                            MP3/WMA files on one disc.            folders can also be played. The
rather than sequential order, RDM
appears on the display. Press the       .   Make sure each MP3/WMA file           system can support up to eight
pushbutton again to stop                    has a .m3u or .wma extension,         folders in depth; however, keep the
random play.                                other file extensions might           depth of the folders to a minimum in
                                            not work.                             order to keep down the complexity
INT (Scan): Press the pushbutton                                                  and confusion in trying to locate a
below the INT tab on the display to     .   Files can be recorded with a          particular folder during playback. If a
listen to the first few seconds of          variety of fixed or variable bit      CD contains more than the
each track on the CD, INTRO                 rates. Song title, artist name,       maximum of 50 folders, 5 sessions,
appears on the display. Press the           and album are available for           and 999 files, the player lets you
pushbutton again to stop scanning           display by the radio when             access and navigate up to the
and the current track begins to play.       recorded using ID3 tags version       maximum, but all items over the
                                            1 and 2.                              maximum are ignored.
                                        .   Make sure to finalize the disc
                                            when burning an MP3/WMA disc
                                            using multiple sessions. It is
                                            usually better to burn the disc all
                                            at once.
                                                                                    Infotainment System              7-13

Root Directory                             recorded without folders or playlists.    Track names longer than
The root directory is treated as a         When displaying the name of the           32 characters or 4 pages are
folder. If the root directory has          folder the radio displays ROOT.           shortened. Parts of words on the
compressed audio files, the                When a CD contains only                   last page of text and the extension
directory is displayed as ROOT. All        compressed audio files, but no            of the filename do not display.
files contained directly under the         folders, all files are located under      Playing an MP3/WMA
root directory are accessed prior to       the root folder. When the radio
any other directory.                       displays the name of the folder, the      With the ignition in the ON/RUN
                                           radio displays ROOT.                      position, insert a CD partway into
Empty Directory or Folder                                                            the slot, label side up. The player
If a root directory or a folder exists     Order of Play                             pulls the disc in. The CD should
somewhere in the file structure that       Play will begin from the first track      begin playing. As each new track
contains only folders/subfolders and       under the root directory. When all        starts to play, the track number and
no compressed files directly               tracks from the root directory have       the song name will appear on the
beneath them, the player advances          been played, play will continue from      display. If the ignition or radio is
to the next folder in the file structure   files according to their numerical        turned off with a CD in the player, it
that contains compressed audio             listing. After playing the last track     will stay in the player. When a CD is
files. The empty folder does not           from the last folder, the player will     in the player and the ignition is
display.                                   begin playing again at the first track    turned on, the radio must be turned
                                           of the first folder or root directory.    on before the CD will start playback.
No Folder                                                                            When the ignition and radio are
When a CD contains only                    File System and Naming                    turned on, the CD will start playing
compressed files, the files are            The song name in the ID3 tag is           where it stopped, if it was the last
located under the root folder. The         displayed. If the song name is not        selected audio source.
next and previous folder function          present in the ID3 tag, then the
does not function on a CD that was         radio displays the file name without
                                           the extension (such as MP3/WMA)
                                           instead.
7-14       Infotainment System

The CD player can play the smaller     [ TUNE (Next Track):    Press the       SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only):
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an         up TUNE arrow to go to the next         Press the SOUND button for longer
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the    track. The track number displays.       than two seconds. The song title or
smaller CDs are loaded in the same     The player continues moving             other available information of a song
manner.                                forward through the CD each time        scrolls on/off. The offset is scroll on.
Sound quality may be reduced due       TUNE is pressed.                        The scroll mode can be changed
to CD-R quality, the method of                                                 only when the SOUND button is
                                       r TUNE (Previous Track): Press          pressed for longer than
recording, the quality of the music    the down TUNE arrow to go to the
that has been recorded, and the                                                two seconds.
                                       start of the current track. The track
way the CD-R has been handled.         number displays. The player             CD Player Messages (Radio
DIR (Directory): Press to repeat       continues moving backward through       with CD, and Radio with
the tracks in the current directory.   the CD each time TUNE is pressed.       Six‐Disc CD)
DIR displays.                          INFO/DISP (Information/Display):        CHECK CD: If this message
Press DIR again to repeat the tracks   Press to display additional text        displays and/or the CD comes out, it
in all of the directories. ALL         information related to the current      could be for one of the following
displays.                              MP3/WMA song. A choice of               reasons:
                                       additional information such as: Song
Press DIR again to turn off            Title, Album Title, and Artist. Bit
                                                                               .   It is very hot. When the
repeat play.                           Rate might also display.                    temperature returns to normal,
u   SEEK t (Next/Previous                                                          the CD should play.
                                       When information is not available,
Folder) (in MP3/WMA Mode):             No Info displays.
                                                                               .   The road is very rough. When
Press to change the folder. If CD-R                                                the road becomes smoother, the
does not have any folders, “ROOT”      Press this button for longer than           CD should play.
flashes on the display for a           two seconds to change
                                       display mode.
                                                                               .   The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
short time.                                                                        or upside down.
                                                                                   Infotainment System              7-15
.   The air is very humid. If so, wait
    about an hour and try again.
                                          Auxiliary Devices                         O (Power/Volume):      Turn to adjust
                                                                                    the volume. Additional volume
.                                         The infotainment system has a
    The format of the CD is not                                                     adjustments may have to be made
                                          3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack
    compatible. See “Using an MP3”                                                  from the portable device if the
                                          located on the lower right side of the
    earlier in this section.                                                        volume is too quiet or too loud.
                                          faceplate. This is not an audio
.   There was a problem while             output; do not plug headphones into       AUX (Auxiliary): Press to listen to
    burning the CD.                       the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input       the radio while a portable audio
.   The label is caught in the CD         jack. An external audio device such       device is playing. Press again and
    player.                               as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3         the system begins playing audio
                                          player, CD changer, etc. can be           from the connected portable audio
If the CD is not playing correctly, for   connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)          player. If a portable audio player is
any other reason, try a known             auxiliary input jack for use as           not connected, No Aux Input Device
good CD.                                  another audio source.                     Found may display.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if      Drivers are encouraged to set up          CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
an error cannot be corrected,             any auxiliary device while the            a CD while a portable audio device
contact your dealer. If the radio         vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive     is playing. Press CD/AUX a second
displays an error message, write it       Driving on page 9‑2 for more              time for the system to begin playing
down and provide it to your dealer        information on driver distraction.        audio from the connected portable
when reporting the problem.                                                         audio player. The portable audio
                                          To use a portable audio player,
                                                                                    device continues playing until it is
                                          connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
                                                                                    turned off.
                                          the radio's 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary
                                          input jack. When a device is
                                          connected, press the radio AUX
                                          button to begin playing audio from
                                          the device over the vehicle
                                          speakers.
7-16   Infotainment System

                             2 NOTES
                                                                                                              Climate Controls            8-1

Climate Controls                                                 Climate Control Systems
                                                                 For vehicles with these climate control systems, the heating, cooling, and
Climate Control Systems                                          ventilation can be controlled for the vehicle.
 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Maintenance
 Passenger Compartment Air
  Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5




                                                                         Climate Control System with Heater and Air Conditioning

                                                                 A. Temperature Control                  D. Air Conditioning (A/C)
                                                                 B. Fan Control                          E. Recirculation
                                                                 C. Air Delivery Mode Control            F.   Rear Window Defogger
8-2     Climate Controls

                                                                            Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
                                                                            clockwise or counterclockwise to
                                                                            change the current airflow mode.
                                                                            Select from the following air delivery
                                                                            modes:
                                                                            Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
                                                                            instrument panel outlets.
                                                                            \ (Bi-Level):   Air is divided
                                                                            between the instrument panel and
                                                                            floor outlets.
                 Climate Control System with Heater Only                    [     (Floor): Air is directed to the
                                                                            floor outlets, with some air directed
A. Temperature Control                OFF: Turns the fan off.               to the rear outlets. Keep the area
                                                                            under the front seats clear to allow
B. Fan Control                        Temperature Control: Turn             the flow of air to the rear
C. Air Delivery Mode Control          clockwise or counterclockwise to      compartment.
                                      increase or decrease the
D. Rear Window Defogger               temperature of the air flowing from   É (Defog):      This mode clears
                                      the system.                           the windows of fog or moisture. Air
E. Outside Air/Recirculation                                                is directed to the windshield,
                                      9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise       floor, and side window outlets.
                                      or counterclockwise to increase or    When this mode is selected, the
                                      decrease the fan speed. The fan       system automatically runs the
                                      must be turned on to run the air      air-conditioning. To defog the
                                      conditioning compressor.              windows faster, turn the temperature
                                                                            control to the warmest setting.
                                                                                      Climate Controls              8-3

1 (Defrost): This mode quickly           For quick cool down on hot days, do     ? (Recirculation):       This mode
clears the windshield of fog or          the following:                          recirculates and helps to quickly
frost. Air is directed to the            1. Open the windows to let hot air      cool the air inside the vehicle. It can
windshield and side window outlets.         escape.                              be used to prevent outside air and
When this mode is selected, the                                                  odors from entering the vehicle.
system automatically runs the            2. Press   ?.                           For vehicles with a recirculation
air-conditioning. To defrost the         3. Press A/C.                           button, press the button to turn the
windows faster, turn the temperature                                             recirculation mode on. An indicator
control to the warmest setting.          4. Select the coolest temperature.
                                                                                 light comes on to show that the
Do not drive the vehicle until all the   5. Select the highest   9 speed.        recirculation is on. Press the button
windows are clear.                                                               again to return to outside air mode.
                                         Using these settings together for
A/C (Air Conditioning): For              long periods of time may cause the      For vehicles with a lever, move the
vehicles with air conditioning, follow   air inside of the vehicle to become     lever to choose the
these steps to use the system. Turn      too dry. To prevent this from           recirculation mode.
9 to the desired speed. The air          happening, after the air in the         Using the recirculation mode for
conditioning does not operate when       vehicle has cooled, turn the            extended periods may cause the
the fan control knob is in the off       recirculation mode off.                 windows to fog. If this happens,
position. Press A/C to turn the air                                              select the defrost mode.
                                         The air conditioning system
conditioning on and off. When A/C
                                         removes moisture from the air, so a
is pressed, an indicator light comes
                                         small amount of water might drip
on to show that the air conditioning
                                         under the vehicle while idling or
is on.
                                         after turning off the engine. This is
                                         normal.
8-4      Climate Controls

: (Outside Air):      This mode         If the vehicle does not have air        Air Vents
brings outside air into the vehicle.    conditioning, the rear window
                                        defogger may turn off about             To open an outlet, press on its
For vehicles with a recirculation       10 minutes after the button is          cover. Turn the cover to change the
button, press the button until the      pressed. If it remains on, it can be    direction of the airflow.
recirculation mode is turned off. The
vehicle then returns to the outside     turned off by pressing < again or       Operation Tips
air mode.                               by turning off the engine.              .   Clear away any ice, snow or
For vehicles with a lever, move the     If the vehicle has air conditioning,        leaves from the air inlets at the
lever to choose the outside             the rear window defogger turns off          base of the windshield that may
air mode.                               about 10 minutes after the button is        block the flow of air into the
                                        pressed. The defogger can also be           vehicle.
Rear Window and Outside                 turned off by turning the engine off.   .   Use of non-GM approved hood
Mirror Defogger                         Notice: Do not use anything                 deflectors may adversely affect
For vehicles with a rear window and     sharp on the inside of the rear             the performance of the system.
outside mirror defogger, they only      window. If you do, you could cut
                                        or damage the warming grid, and
                                                                                .   Keep the path under the front
work when the ignition is turned to
                                        the repairs would not be covered            seats clear of objects to help
ON/RUN.
                                        by the vehicle warranty. Do not             circulate the air inside of the
The rear window defogger uses a         attach a temporary vehicle                  vehicle more effectively.
warming grid to remove fog or frost     license, tape, a decal or anything
from the rear window.
                                        similar to the defogger grid.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window and
outside mirror defogger on or off. An
indicator light comes on to show
that the feature is on.
                                                                                    Climate Controls             8-5

Maintenance                             To change the passenger
                                        compartment air filter, use the
                                        following steps:
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
For vehicles with a passenger
compartment air filter, it is located
behind the glove box. It can be
accessed after removing the glove
box from its housing.
Pollen and dust are removed by the
filter. The filter should be replaced                                          3. Remove the filter cover.
as part of routine scheduled
maintenance. For a replacement
filter see your dealer. See
Scheduled Maintenance on                1. Open the glove box
page 11‑2 for replacement intervals.       halfway down.
                                        2. Grip the glove box by both the
                                           upper and lower sides and pull it
                                           out of its housing.




                                                                               4. Replace the air conditioner filter.
8-6   Climate Controls

                         2 NOTES
                                                                                                                        Driving and Operating                                 9-1

Driving and                                                    Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
                                                               Parking (Manual
                                                                                                                         Fuel
                                                                                                                          Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Operating                                                       Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
                                                               Parking Over Things
                                                                                                                          Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35
                                                                                                                          Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-35
                                                                That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24        California Fuel
Driving Information                                                                                                        Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
                                                              Engine Exhaust                                              Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36
 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2               Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
 Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2                                                                      Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
                                                               Running the Vehicle While                                  Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3                 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3                                                                Filling a Portable Fuel
 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4   Automatic Transmission                                       Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5                 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25                     Towing
 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
                                                              Manual Transmission                                         General Towing
 Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7
                                                               Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-29                    Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8                      Brakes                                                     Conversions and Add-Ons
 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9          Antilock Brake                                             Add-On Electrical
 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11                   System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30              Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12                  Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Starting and Operating                                        Cruise Control
 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . .              9-17        Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .        9-17
 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .           9-19
 Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       9-20
 Shifting Into Park (Automatic
   Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       9-21
9-2        Driving and Operating

Driving Information                         WARNING (Continued)
                                                                                Death and injury associated with
                                                                                drinking and driving is a global
                                                                                tragedy.
Defensive Driving                        Driver distraction can cause
                                         collisions resulting in injury or      Alcohol affects four things that
Defensive driving means “always                                                 anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
expect the unexpected.” The first        possible death. These simple
                                         defensive driving techniques           judgment, muscular coordination,
step in driving defensively is to wear                                          vision, and attentiveness.
your safety belt. See Safety Belts on    could save your life.
page 3‑11.                                                                      Police records show that almost
                                                                                40 percent of all motor
                                         Drunk Driving                          vehicle-related deaths involve
            { WARNING                                                           alcohol. In most cases, these
 Assume that other road users                     { WARNING                     deaths are the result of someone
                                                                                who was drinking and driving.
 (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other     Drinking and then driving is very      In recent years, more than
 drivers) are going to be careless       dangerous. Your reflexes,              17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
 and make mistakes. Anticipate           perceptions, attentiveness, and        deaths have been associated with
 what they might do and be ready.        judgment can be affected by even       the use of alcohol, with about
 In addition:                            a small amount of alcohol. You         250,000 people injured.
   .   Allow enough following            can have a serious — or even           For persons under 21, it is against
       distance between you and          fatal — collision if you drive after   the law in every U.S. state to drink
       the driver in front of you.       drinking. Do not drink and drive or    alcohol. There are good medical,
   .   Focus on the task of driving.     ride with a driver who has been        psychological, and developmental
                                         drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if    reasons for these laws.
                         (Continued)
                                         you are with a group, designate a
                                                                                The obvious way to eliminate the
                                         driver who will not drink.             leading highway safety problem is
                                                                                for people never to drink alcohol
                                                                                and then drive.
                                                                                 Driving and Operating                9-3

Medical research shows that alcohol     Braking                                   And, of course, actual stopping
in a person's system can make                                                     distances vary greatly with the
crash injuries worse, especially        See Brake System Warning Light on         surface of the road, whether it is
injuries to the brain, spinal cord,     page 5‑16.                                pavement or gravel; the condition of
or heart. This means that               Braking action involves perception        the road, whether it is wet, dry,
when anyone who has been                time and reaction time. Deciding to       or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
drinking — driver or passenger — is     push the brake pedal is perception        brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
in a crash, that person's chance of     time. Actually doing it is                and the amount of brake force
being killed or permanently disabled    reaction time.                            applied.
is higher than if the person had not                                              Avoid needless heavy
been drinking.                          Average reaction time is about
                                        three‐fourths of a second. But that is    braking. Some people drive in
                                        only an average. It might be less         spurts — heavy acceleration
Control of a Vehicle                    with one driver and as long as            followed by heavy braking — rather
The following three systems             two or three seconds or more with         than keeping pace with traffic. This
help to control the vehicle while       another. Age, physical condition,         is a mistake. The brakes might not
driving — brakes, steering, and         alertness, coordination, and              have time to cool between hard
accelerator. At times, as when          eyesight all play a part. So do           stops. The brakes will wear out
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to   alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But      much faster with a lot of heavy
ask more of those control systems       even in three‐fourths of a second, a      braking. Keeping pace with the
than the tires and road can provide.    vehicle moving at 100 km/h                traffic and allowing realistic following
Meaning, you can lose control of the    (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That       distances eliminates a lot of
vehicle.                                could be a lot of distance in an          unnecessary braking. That means
                                        emergency, so keeping enough              better braking and longer brake life.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
                                        space between the vehicle and
affect vehicle performance. See
                                        others is important.
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑4.
9-4      Driving and Operating

If the engine ever stops while the      Steering Tips                            Steering in Emergencies
vehicle is being driven, brake
                                        It is important to take curves at a      There are times when steering can
normally but do not pump the
                                        reasonable speed.                        be more effective than braking. For
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
                                        Traction in a curve depends on the       example, you come over a hill and
the pedal could get harder to push
                                        condition of the tires and the road      find a truck stopped in your lane,
down. If the engine stops, there will
                                        surface, the angle at which the          or a car suddenly pulls out from
still be some power brake assist but
                                        curve is banked, and vehicle speed.      nowhere, or a child darts out from
it will be used when the brake is
                                        While in a curve, speed is the one       between parked cars and stops right
applied. Once the power assist is
                                        factor that can be controlled.           in front of you. These problems can
used up, it can take longer to stop
                                                                                 be avoided by braking — if you can
and the brake pedal will be harder      If there is a need to reduce speed,      stop in time. But sometimes you
to push.                                do it before entering the curve, while   cannot stop in time because there is
Adding non‐dealer accessories can       the front wheels are straight.           no room. That is the time for
affect vehicle performance. See         Try to adjust the speed so you can       evasive action — steering around
Accessories and Modifications on        drive through the curve. Maintain a      the problem.
page 10‑4.                              reasonable, steady speed. Wait to        The vehicle can perform very well in
                                        accelerate until out of the curve, and   emergencies like these. First apply
Steering                                then accelerate gently into the          the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
                                        straightaway.                            has antilock brakes, not enough to
Power Steering
                                                                                 lock the wheels. See Braking on
If power steering assist is lost                                                 page 9‑3. It is better to remove as
because the engine stops or the                                                  much speed as possible from a
system is not functioning, the                                                   collision. Then steer around the
vehicle can be steered but it will                                               problem, to the left or right
take more effort.                                                                depending on the space available.
                                                                                   Driving and Operating            9-5

                                          Off-Road Recovery                         tire contacts the pavement edge.
                                                                                    Then turn the steering wheel to go
                                          The vehicle's right wheels can drop       straight down the roadway.
                                          off the edge of a road onto the
                                          shoulder while driving.                   Loss of Control
                                                                                    Let us review what driving experts
                                                                                    say about what happens when the
                                                                                    three control systems — brakes,
                                                                                    steering, and acceleration — do not
                                                                                    have enough friction where the tires
                                                                                    meet the road to do what the driver
                                                                                    has asked.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.                                               In any emergency, do not give up.
If holding the steering wheel at the                                                Keep trying to steer and constantly
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock                                                         seek an escape route or area of
positions, it can be turned a full                                                  less danger.
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have        If the level of the shoulder is only
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as   slightly below the pavement,
quickly straighten the wheel once         recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
you have avoided the object.              off the accelerator and then, if there
                                          is nothing in the way, steer so that
The fact that such emergency              the vehicle straddles the edge of the
situations are always possible is a       pavement. Turn the steering wheel
good reason to practice defensive         8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about
driving at all times and wear safety      one-eighth turn, until the right front
belts properly.
9-6      Driving and Operating

Skidding                                  Of course, traction is reduced when     If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake
                                          water, snow, ice, gravel, or other      System (ABS), remember: It helps
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
                                          material is on the road. For safety,    avoid only the braking skid. If the
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
                                          slow down and adjust your driving to    vehicle does not have ABS, then in
most skids by taking reasonable
                                          these conditions. It is important to    a braking skid, where the wheels
care suited to existing conditions,
                                          slow down on slippery surfaces          are no longer rolling, release
and by not overdriving those
                                          because stopping distance will be       enough pressure on the brakes to
conditions. But skids are always
                                          longer and vehicle control more         get the wheels rolling again. This
possible.
                                          limited.                                restores steering control. Push the
The three types of skids correspond                                               brake pedal down steadily when you
                                          While driving on a surface with
to the vehicle's three control                                                    have to stop suddenly. As long as
                                          reduced traction, try to avoid
systems. In the braking skid, the                                                 the wheels are rolling, you will have
                                          sudden steering, acceleration,
wheels are not rolling. In the                                                    steering control.
                                          or braking, including reducing
steering or cornering skid, too much
                                          vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
speed or steering in a curve causes
                                          gear. Any sudden changes could
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
                                          cause the tires to slide. You may not
And in the acceleration skid, too
                                          realize the surface is slippery until
much throttle causes the driving
                                          the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
wheels to spin.
                                          recognize warning clues — such as
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease      enough water, ice, or packed snow
your foot off the accelerator pedal       on the road to make a mirrored
and quickly steer the way you want        surface — and slow down when you
the vehicle to go. If you start           have any doubt.
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
                                                                               Driving and Operating              9-7

Driving on Wet Roads                       WARNING (Continued)
                                                                                Other Rainy Weather Tips
Rain and wet roads can reduce                                                   Besides slowing down, other wet
vehicle traction and affect your        Flowing or rushing water creates        weather driving tips include:
ability to stop and accelerate.         strong forces. Driving through          .   Allow extra following distance.
Always drive slower in these types      flowing water could cause your
of driving conditions and avoid
                                                                                .   Pass with caution.
                                        vehicle to be carried away. If this
driving through large puddles and       happens, you and other vehicle
                                                                                .   Keep windshield wiping
deep‐standing or flowing water.         occupants could drown. Do not               equipment in good shape.
                                        ignore police warnings and be           .   Keep the windshield washer fluid
          { WARNING                     very cautious about trying to drive         reservoir filled.
                                        through flowing water.                  .   Have good tires with proper
 Wet brakes can cause crashes.
 They might not work as well in a                                                   tread depth. See Tires on
 quick stop and could cause            Hydroplaning                                 page 10‑42.
 pulling to one side. You could        Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
                                                                                .   Turn off cruise control.
 lose control of the vehicle.          can build up under your vehicle's
 After driving through a large         tires so they actually ride on the
 puddle of water or a car/vehicle      water. This can happen if the road is
 wash, lightly apply the brake         wet enough and you are going fast
 pedal until the brakes work           enough. When your vehicle is
 normally.                             hydroplaning, it has little or no
                                       contact with the road.
                         (Continued)
                                       There is no hard and fast rule about
                                       hydroplaning. The best advice is to
                                       slow down when the road is wet.
9-8      Driving and Operating

Highway Hypnosis                        Hill and Mountain Roads
                                                                                          { WARNING
Always be alert and pay attention to    Driving on steep hills or through
your surroundings while driving.        mountains is different than driving      If you do not shift down, the
If you become tired or sleepy, find a   on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for     brakes could get so hot that they
safe place to park your vehicle         driving in these conditions include:     would not work well. You would
and rest.                               .   Keep the vehicle serviced and in     then have poor braking or even
Other driving tips include:                 good shape.                          none going down a hill. You could
                                                                                 crash. Shift down to let the engine
.   Keep the vehicle well ventilated.   .   Check all fluid levels and brakes,   assist the brakes on a steep
.   Keep interior temperature cool.         tires, cooling system, and           downhill slope.
                                            transmission.
.   Keep your eyes moving — scan        .
    the road ahead and to the sides.        Shift to a lower gear when going
                                            down steep or long hills.
.   Check the rearview mirror and                                                         { WARNING
    vehicle instruments often.
                                                                                 Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
                                                                                 or with the ignition off is
                                                                                 dangerous. The brakes will have
                                                                                 to do all the work of slowing down
                                                                                 and they could get so hot that
                                                                                 they would not work well. You
                                                                                 would then have poor braking or
                                                                                                           (Continued)
                                                                                    Driving and Operating              9-9


       WARNING (Continued)
                                           Winter Driving                            The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
                                                                                     on page 9‑30 improves vehicle
                                           Driving on Snow or Ice                    stability during hard stops on
    even none going down a hill. You                                                 slippery roads, but apply the brakes
                                           Drive carefully when there is snow
    could crash. Always have the           or ice between the tires and the          sooner than when on dry pavement.
    engine running and the vehicle in      road, creating less traction or grip.     Allow greater following distance on
    gear when going downhill.              Wet ice can occur at about 0°C            any slippery road and watch for
                                           (32°F) when freezing rain begins to       slippery spots. Icy patches can
.     Stay in your own lane. Do not        fall, resulting in even less traction.    occur on otherwise clear roads in
      swing wide or cut across the         Avoid driving on wet ice or in            shaded areas. The surface of a
      center of the road. Drive at         freezing rain until roads can be          curve or an overpass can remain icy
      speeds that let you stay in your     treated with salt or sand.                when the surrounding roads are
      own lane.                            Drive with caution, whatever the          clear. Avoid sudden steering
.                                          condition. Accelerate gently so           maneuvers and braking while
      Top of hills: Be                                                               on ice.
      alert — something could              traction is not lost. Accelerating too
      be in your lane (stalled car,        quickly causes the wheels to spin         Turn off cruise control on slippery
      accident).                           and makes the surface under the           surfaces.
.
                                           tires slick, so there is even less
      Pay attention to special road        traction.
      signs (falling rocks area, winding
      roads, long grades, passing or       Try not to break the fragile traction.
      no-passing zones) and take           If you accelerate too fast, the drive
      appropriate action.                  wheels will spin and polish the
                                           surface under the tires even more.
9-10       Driving and Operating

Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
                                                 { WARNING                         WARNING (Continued)
serious situation. Stay with the       Snow can trap engine exhaust            .   Open a window about 5 cm
vehicle unless there is help nearby.   under the vehicle. This may                 (2 in) on the side of the
If possible, use the Roadside          cause exhaust gases to get                  vehicle that is away from the
Assistance Program on page 13‑6.       inside. Engine exhaust contains             wind to bring in fresh air.
To get help and keep everyone in       Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
the vehicle safe:                      cannot be seen or smelled. It can
                                                                               .   Fully open the air outlets on
.   Turn on the hazard warning         cause unconsciousness and even              or under the instrument
    flashers.                          death.                                      panel.
.   Tie a red cloth to an outside
                                                                               .   Adjust the climate control
                                       If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
                                                                                   system to a setting that
    mirror.                             .   Clear away snow from around            circulates the air inside the
                                            the base of your vehicle,              vehicle and set the fan speed
                                            especially any that is blocking        to the highest setting. See
                                            the exhaust pipe.                      Climate Control System in the
                                        .   Check again from time to               Index.
                                            time to be sure snow does         For more information about
                                            not collect there.                carbon monoxide, see Engine
                                                               (Continued)    Exhaust on page 9‑24.
                                                                                                    (Continued)
                                                                               Driving and Operating              9-11


    WARNING (Continued)
                                       To save fuel, run the engine for only     If the Vehicle is Stuck
                                       short periods as needed to warm
                                       the vehicle and then shut the engine      Slowly and cautiously spin the
 Snow can trap exhaust gases           off and close the window most of          wheels to free the vehicle when
 under your vehicle. This can          the way to save heat. Repeat this         stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
 cause deadly CO (Carbon               until help arrives but only when you      If stuck too severely for the traction
 Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO       feel really uncomfortable from the        system to free the vehicle, turn the
 could overcome you and kill you.      cold. Moving about to keep warm           traction system off and use the
 You cannot see it or smell it, so     also helps.                               rocking method.
 you might not know it is in your      If it takes some time for help to
 vehicle. Clear away snow from         arrive, now and then when you run                   { WARNING
 around the base of your vehicle,      the engine, push the accelerator
 especially any that is blocking the   pedal slightly so the engine runs          If the vehicle's tires spin at high
 exhaust.                              faster than the idle speed. This           speed, they can explode, and you
                                       keeps the battery charged to restart       or others could be injured. The
                                       the vehicle and to signal for help         vehicle can overheat, causing an
Run the engine for short periods
                                       with the headlamps. Do this as little      engine compartment fire or other
only as needed to keep warm, but
                                       as possible to save fuel.                  damage. Spin the wheels as little
be careful.
                                                                                  as possible and avoid going
                                                                                  above 55 km/h (35 mph) as
                                                                                  shown on the speedometer.

                                                                                 For information about using tire
                                                                                 chains on the vehicle, see Tire
                                                                                 Chains on page 10‑61.
9-12       Driving and Operating

Rocking the Vehicle to Get               Vehicle Load Limits
it Out                                                                              { WARNING
                                         It is very important to know how
Turn the steering wheel left and         much weight your vehicle can       Do not load the vehicle any
right to clear the area around the       carry. This weight is called the   heavier than the Gross
front wheels. Turn off any traction                                         Vehicle Weight Rating
                                         vehicle capacity weight or
system. Shift back and forth                                                (GVWR), or either the
between R (Reverse) and a forward        maximum load amount and
                                         includes the weight of all         maximum front or rear Gross
gear, or with a manual transmission,
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and      occupants, cargo, and all          Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as      nonfactory‐installed options.      If you do, parts on the vehicle
little as possible. To prevent           Two labels on your vehicle show    can break, and it can change
transmission wear, wait until the        how much weight it may             the way the vehicle handles.
wheels stop spinning before shifting     properly carry, the Tire and       These could cause you to lose
gears. Release the accelerator           Loading Information label and      control and crash. Also,
pedal while shifting, and press          the Certification label.           overloading can shorten the
lightly on the accelerator pedal                                            life of the vehicle.
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑74.
                                                                            Driving and Operating         9-13

Tire and Loading Information           positions (A), and the maximum         2. Determine the combined
Label                                  vehicle capacity weight (B) in            weight of the driver and
                                       kilograms and pounds.                     passengers that will be riding
                                       The Tire and Loading                      in your vehicle.
                                       Information label also shows the       3. Subtract the combined
                                       tire size of the original                 weight of the driver and
                                       equipment tires (C) and the               passengers from XXX kg or
                                       recommended cold tire inflation           XXX lbs.
                                       pressures (D). For more                4. The resulting figure equals
                                       information on tires and inflation
                                                                                 the available amount of cargo
                                       see Tires on page 10‑42 and
                                                                                 and luggage load capacity.
                                       Tire Pressure on page 10‑48.
                                                                                 For example, if the “XXX”
                                       There is also important loading           amount equals 1400 lbs and
          Label Example                information on the Certification          there will be five 150 lb
A vehicle-specific Tire and            label. See “Certification Label”          passengers in your vehicle,
Loading Information label is           later in this section.                    the amount of available cargo
attached to the vehicle's center       Steps for Determining Correct             and luggage load capacity is
pillar (B‐pillar). With the driver's   Load Limit                                650 lbs (1400 ‐ 750 (5 x 150)
door open, you will find the label                                               = 650 lbs).
attached below the door lock           1. Locate the statement “The
post (striker). The Tire and              combined weight of
Loading Information label shows           occupants and cargo should
the number of occupant seating            never exceed XXX kg or
                                          XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
                                          placard.
9-14      Driving and Operating

5. Determine the combined
   weight of luggage and cargo
   being loaded on the vehicle.
   That weight may not safely
   exceed the available cargo
   and luggage load capacity
   calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
   a trailer, the load from your
   trailer will be transferred to
   your vehicle. Consult this
   manual to determine how this                 Example 1                           Example 2
   reduces the available cargo      A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for      A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
   and luggage load capacity of        Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)      Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
   your vehicle.                    B. Subtract Occupant Weight @       B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
Your vehicle is neither designed       68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg        68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
nor intended to tow a trailer.         (300 lbs)                           (750 lbs)
                                    C. Available Occupant and Cargo     C. Available Cargo Weight =
                                       Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)           113 kg (250 lbs)
                                                                       Driving and Operating           9-15

                                    Refer to your vehicle's tire and
                                    loading information label for
                                    specific information about your
                                    vehicle's capacity weight and
                                    seating positions. The combined
                                    weight of the driver, passenger,
                                    and cargo should never exceed
                                    your vehicle's capacity weight.
                                    Certification Label

            Example 3                                                         Label Example ‐ Canada
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for                                           A vehicle-specific Certification
   Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)                                        label is attached to the center
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @                                            pillar (B‐pillar), below the driver
   91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg                                          door latch. This label tells you
   (1,000 lbs)                                                           the gross weight capacity of
C. Available Cargo Weight =                                              your vehicle, called the Gross
   0 kg (0 lbs)                                                          Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

                                      Label Example ‐ United States
9-16      Driving and Operating

The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel       WARNING (Continued)                         { WARNING
and cargo. Never exceed the            control and crash. Also,              Things you put inside your
GVWR for your vehicle, or the          overloading can shorten the           vehicle can strike and injure
Gross Axle Weight Rating               life of the vehicle.                  people in a sudden stop or
(GAWR) for either the front or                                               turn, or in a crash.
rear axle.
                                      Notice : Overloading the                .   Put things in the cargo
If there is a heavy load, it should   vehicle may cause damage.                   area of your vehicle. Try to
be spread out. See “Steps for         Repairs would not be covered                spread the weight evenly.
Determining Correct Load Limit”       by the vehicle warranty. Do
earlier in this section.
                                                                              .   Never stack heavier
                                      not overload the vehicle.
                                                                                  things, like suitcases,
                                      If you put things inside your
         { WARNING                    vehicle — like suitcases,
                                                                                  inside the vehicle so that
                                                                                  some of them are above
 Do not load the vehicle any          tools, packages, or anything                the tops of the seats.
 heavier than the Gross               else — they will go as fast as          .   Do not leave an
 Vehicle Weight Rating                the vehicle goes. If you have to
                                                                                  unsecured child restraint
 (GVWR), or either the                stop or turn quickly, or if there is
                                                                                  in your vehicle.
 maximum front or rear Gross          a crash, they will keep going.
 Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).                                                   .   When you carry something
 If you do, parts on the vehicle                                                  inside the vehicle, secure
 can break, and it can change                                                     it whenever you can.
 the way the vehicle handles.                                                 .   Do not leave a seat folded
 These could cause you to lose                                                    down unless you need to.
                      (Continued)
                                                                                Driving and Operating             9-17

Starting and                           Following break‐in, engine speed
                                       and load can be gradually                            { WARNING
Operating                              increased.
                                                                                   On manual transmission vehicles,
                                                                                   turning the key to LOCK/OFF will
New Vehicle Break-In                   Ignition Positions                          lock the steering column and
Notice: The vehicle does not                                                       result in a loss of ability to steer
need an elaborate break-in. But it                                                 the vehicle. This could cause a
will perform better in the long run                                                collision. If you need to turn the
if you follow these guidelines:                                                    engine off while the vehicle is
 .   Do not drive at any one                                                       moving, turn the key only to ACC/
     constant speed, fast or slow,                                                 ACCESSORY. Do not push the
     for the first 805 km                                                          key in while the vehicle is moving.
     (500 miles). Do not make
     full-throttle starts. Avoid                                                  Notice: Using a tool to force the
     downshifting to brake or                                                     key to turn in the ignition could
     slow the vehicle.                                                            cause damage to the switch or
 .   Avoid making hard stops for                                                  break the key. Use the correct
     the first 322 km (200 miles) or   The ignition switch has four different     key, make sure it is all the way in,
     so. During this time the new      positions.                                 and turn it only with your hand.
     brake linings are not yet                                                    If the key cannot be turned by
     broken in. Hard stops with                                                   hand, see your dealer.
     new linings can mean
     premature wear and earlier
     replacement. Follow this
     breaking-in guideline every
     time you get new brake
     linings.
9-18       Driving and Operating

LOCK (STOPPING THE ENGINE/              3. Come to a complete stop. Shift      ON (ON/RUN): This position can
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is             to P (Park) with an automatic       be used to operate the electrical
stopped, turn the ignition switch to       transmission, or neutral with a     accessories, and to display some
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.           manual transmission. Turn the       instrument panel cluster warning
This position locks the steering           ignition to LOCK/OFF.               and indicator lights. The switch
wheel, ignition, shift lever and        4. Set the parking brake. See          stays in this position when the
transmission. This is the only             Parking Brake on page 9‑31          engine is running. If you leave the
position in which you can insert or                                            key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
                                        The steering can bind with the         ON/RUN position with the engine
remove the key.                         wheels turned off center. If this      off, the battery could be drained.
Do not turn the engine off when the     happens, move the steering wheel       You may not be able to start the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a    from right to left while turning the   vehicle if the battery is allowed to
loss of power assist in the brake       key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this          drain for an extended period of time.
and steering systems and disable        doesn't work, then the vehicle needs
the airbags.                            service.                               START: This is the position that
                                                                               starts the engine. When the engine
In an emergency:                        ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This              cranks, release the key. The ignition
1. Brake using a firm and steady        position operates some of the          switch returns to ON/RUN for
   pressure. Do not pump the            electrical accessories, such as the    driving. Do not turn the key to
   brakes repeatedly. This may          radio, but not the climate control     START if the engine is running.
   deplete power assist, requiring      system.
   increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
   can be done while the vehicle is
   moving. After shifting to neutral,
   firmly apply the brakes and steer
   the vehicle to a safe location.
                                                                             Driving and Operating               9-19

Starting the Engine                      Starting Procedure                      Notice: Holding the key in START
                                                                                 for longer than 15 seconds at a
Automatic Transmission                   1. With your foot off the accelerator
                                                                                 time will cause the battery to be
                                            pedal, turn the ignition to START.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or                                              drained much sooner. And the
                                            When the engine cranks, let go
N (Neutral). The engine will not start                                           excessive heat can damage the
                                            of the key. The idle speed will go
in any other position. To restart the                                            starter motor. Wait about
                                            down as the engine gets warm.
engine when the vehicle is already                                               15 seconds between each try to
moving, use N (Neutral) only.               The vehicle has a Computer‐          help avoid draining the battery or
                                            Controlled Cranking System.          damaging the starter.
Notice: Do not try to shift to              It assists in starting the engine
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.                                               2. If the engine does not start, wait
                                            and protects components. If the
If you do, you could damage the                                                     about 15 seconds and try again.
                                            ignition key is turned to START
transmission. Shift to P (Park)                                                     Wait about 15 seconds between
                                            and then released when the
only when the vehicle is stopped.                                                   each try.
                                            engine begins cranking, the
                                            engine will continue cranking for       When the engine has run about
Manual Transmission                         a few seconds or until the engine       10 seconds to warm up, the
The shift lever should be in                starts. If the engine does not          vehicle is ready to be driven. Do
N (Neutral) and the parking brake           start and the key is held in            not run the engine at high speed
engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to           START, cranking will be stopped         when it is cold.
the floor and start the engine. The         after 15 seconds to prevent             If the weather is below freezing
vehicle will not start if the clutch        damage. To prevent gear                 (0°C or 32°F), let the engine run
pedal is not all the way down.              damage, cranking is not allowed         for a few minutes to warm up.
                                            if the engine is running. Engine
                                            cranking can be stopped by
                                            turning the ignition key to ACC/
                                            ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
9-20       Driving and Operating

3. If the engine still will not start,   Engine Heater
   or starts but then stops, it could
   be flooded with too much              The engine heater can provide
   gasoline. Try pushing the             easier starting and better fuel
   accelerator pedal all the way to      economy during engine warm-up in
   the floor and holding it there as     cold weather conditions at or
   you hold the key in START for         below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an
   about three seconds. If the           engine heater should be plugged in
   vehicle starts briefly but then       at least four hours before starting.
   stops again, do the same thing,       1. Turn off the engine.
   but this time keep the pedal
   down for five or six seconds.
   This clears the extra gasoline                                               2. Open the hood and unwrap the
   from the engine.                                                                electrical cord. The cord is
Notice: The engine is designed to                                                  located in the driver side of the
work with the electronics in the                                                   engine compartment, near the
vehicle. If electrical parts or                                                    battery.
accessories are added, you could
change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
                                                                               Driving and Operating            9-21

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded    The length of time the heater should       2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
   110-volt AC outlet.                remain plugged in depends on                  by pressing the button on the
                                      several factors. Ask a dealer in the          shift lever and pushing the lever
         { WARNING                    area where you will be parking the
                                      vehicle for the best advice on this.
                                                                                    all the way toward the front of
                                                                                    the vehicle.
 Plugging the cord into an                                                       3. Turn the ignition key to
 ungrounded outlet could cause an     Shifting Into Park                            LOCK/OFF.
 electrical shock. Also, the wrong    (Automatic Transmission)
 kind of extension cord could                                                    4. Remove the key and take it with
                                                                                    you. If you can leave the vehicle
 overheat and cause a fire. You
 could be seriously injured. Plug
                                                { WARNING                           with the ignition key in your
                                                                                    hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
 the cord into a properly grounded     It can be dangerous to get out of
 three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.       the vehicle if the shift lever is not
 If the cord will not reach, use a     fully in P (Park) with the parking
 heavy-duty three-prong extension      brake firmly set. The vehicle can
 cord rated for at least 15 amps.      roll. If you have left the engine
                                       running, the vehicle can move
4. Before starting the engine, be      suddenly. You or others could be
   sure to unplug and store the        injured. To be sure the vehicle will
   cord as it was before to keep it    not move, even when you are on
   away from moving engine parts.      fairly level ground, use the steps
   If you do not it could be           that follow.
   damaged.
                                      1. Hold the brake pedal down and
                                         set the parking brake. See
                                         Parking Brake on page 9‑31 for
                                         more information.
9-22     Driving and Operating

Leaving the Vehicle With the          If you have to leave the vehicle with      This is called “torque lock.”
Engine Running (Automatic             the engine running, be sure the            To prevent torque lock, set the
Transmission)                         vehicle is in P (Park) and the             parking brake and then shift into
                                      parking brake is firmly set before         P (Park) properly before you leave
                                      you leave it. After you have moved         the driver seat. To find out how, see
         { WARNING                    the shift lever into P (Park), hold the    “Shifting Into Park (Automatic
It can be dangerous to leave the      brake pedal down. Then see if you          Transmission)” in this section.
vehicle with the engine running.      can move the shift lever away from         When you are ready to drive, move
                                      P (Park) without first pushing the         the shift lever out of P (Park) before
The vehicle could move suddenly
                                      shift lock release button. If you can,     you release the parking brake.
if the shift lever is not fully in    it means that the shift lever was not
P (Park) with the parking brake       fully locked into P (Park).                If torque lock does occur, you may
firmly set. And, if you leave the                                                need to have another vehicle push
vehicle with the engine running, it   Torque Lock (Automatic                     yours a little uphill to take some of
could overheat and even catch         Transmission)                              the pressure from the parking pawl
fire. You or others could be          If you are parking on a hill and you       in the transmission, so you can pull
injured. Do not leave the vehicle     do not shift your transmission into        the shift lever out of P (Park).
with the engine running.              P (Park) properly, the weight of
                                      the vehicle may put too much
                                      force on the parking pawl in the
                                      transmission. You may find it difficult
                                      to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
                                                                                Driving and Operating              9-23

Shifting Out of Park                                                              Parking (Manual
Vehicles with an automatic                                                        Transmission)
transmission have a shift interlock                                               Before leaving the vehicle, do the
system. You have to apply the brake                                               following:
pedal before you can shift from
P (Park) when the ignition is in the                                              1. Hold the brake pedal down and
ON/RUN position. See Automatic                                                       firmly apply the parking brake.
Transmission on page 9‑25.                                                        2. Fully press in the clutch pedal
If you cannot shift out of P (Park)                                                  and place the shift lever into the
while holding the brake pedal down,                                                  gear position as stated below:
try this:                                                                            .     When parking on level
1. Set the parking brake.               4. Insert the key into the shift lock              ground, place the shift lever
                                           slot and press and hold the key.                into N (Neutral).
2. Turn the ignition off and remove
   the key.                             5. Shift to N (Neutral).                     .     When parking downhill,
                                        6. Remove the key from the slot,                   place the shift lever in
3. Remove the hole cover from the                                                          R (Reverse).
   shift lock slot by prying it off        insert the key into the ignition
   using a small, flat object. The         and start the engine.                     .     When parking uphill, place
   shift lock release slot is located   7. Replace the shift lock release                  the shift lever in 1 (First).
   at the top of the shift lever.          slot cover.                            3. After shifting, turn the ignition to
                                        8. Apply and hold the brake pedal            LOCK/OFF, remove the key and
                                           fully and release the parking             release the clutch.
                                           brake.
                                        9. Shift to the gear you want.
                                        10. Have the vehicle fixed as soon
                                            as you can.
9-24     Driving and Operating

Parking Over Things                Engine Exhaust                             WARNING (Continued)
That Burn
                                             { WARNING                    .   There are holes or openings
        {   WARNING
                                   Engine exhaust contains Carbon
                                                                              in the vehicle body from
                                                                              damage or after-market
Things that can burn could touch   Monoxide (CO) which cannot be              modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the        seen or smelled. Exposure to CO            completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park    can cause unconsciousness and         If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass,    even death.                           if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn.     Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:     coming into the vehicle:
                                    .   The vehicle idles in areas        .   Drive it only with the windows
                                        with poor ventilation (parking        completely down.
                                        garages, tunnels, deep snow       .   Have the vehicle repaired
                                        that may block underbody              immediately.
                                        airflow or tail pipes).
                                                                         Never park the vehicle with the
                                    .   The exhaust smells or            engine running in an enclosed
                                        sounds strange or different.     area such as a garage or a
                                    .   The exhaust system leaks         building that has no fresh air
                                        due to corrosion or damage.      ventilation.
                                    .   The vehicle’s exhaust system
                                        has been modified, damaged
                                        or improperly repaired.
                                                           (Continued)
                                                                                Driving and Operating             9-25

Running the Vehicle                                                               Automatic
While Parked
                                                 { WARNING
                                        It can be dangerous to get out of
                                                                                  Transmission
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have    the vehicle if the automatic
to, here are some things to know.       transmission shift lever is not fully
                                        in P (Park) with the parking brake
                                        firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
          { WARNING                     not leave the vehicle when the
 Idling a vehicle in an enclosed        engine is running unless you
 area with poor ventilation is          have to. If you have left the
 dangerous. Engine exhaust may          engine running, the vehicle can
 enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust      move suddenly. You or others
 contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)          could be injured. To be sure the
 which cannot be seen or smelled.       vehicle will not move, even when
 It can cause unconsciousness           it is on fairly level ground, always
 and even death. Never run the          set the parking brake and move            If the vehicle has an automatic
 engine in an enclosed area that        the automatic transmission shift          transmission, the shift lever is
 has no fresh air ventilation. For      lever to P (Park), or the manual          located on the console between the
 more information, see Engine           transmission shift lever to Neutral.      seats.
 Exhaust on page 9‑24.                                                            Movement between certain
                                       Follow the proper steps to be sure         positions requires pushing the
                                       the vehicle will not move. If the          release button on the front of the
                                       vehicle has an automatic                   shifter.
                                       transmission, see Shifting Into Park
                                       (Automatic Transmission) on
                                       page 9‑21.
9-26       Driving and Operating

P (Park): This position locks the          Ensure that the shift lever is fully in   To rock the vehicle back and forth to
front wheels. It is the best position      P (Park) before starting the engine.      get out of snow, ice or sand without
to use when you start the engine           The vehicle has an automatic              damaging the transmission, see If
because the vehicle cannot move            transmission shift lock control           the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.
easily.                                    system. You have to apply the brake       N (Neutral): In this position, the
                                           pedal before you can shift from           engine does not connect with the
           { WARNING                       P (Park) when the key is in ON/
                                           RUN. If you cannot shift out of
                                                                                     wheels. To restart the engine while
                                                                                     the vehicle is already moving, use
 It is dangerous to get out of the         P (Park) while holding the brake          N (Neutral) only. Also, use
 vehicle if the shift lever is not fully   pedal down, see Shifting Out of           N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
 in P (Park) with the parking brake        Park on page 9‑23.                        being towed.
 firmly set. The vehicle can roll.         R (Reverse): Use this gear to
 Do not leave the vehicle when the         back up.                                            { WARNING
 engine is running unless you              When shifting from N (Neutral) to
 have to. If you have left the             R (Reverse), you need to apply the         Shifting into a drive gear while the
 engine running, the vehicle can           brake pedal and push the release           engine is running at high speed is
 move suddenly. You or others              button on the front of the shifter.        dangerous. Unless your foot is
 could be injured. To be sure the                                                     firmly on the brake pedal, the
                                           Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)            vehicle could move very rapidly.
 vehicle will not move, even when          while the vehicle is moving
 you are on fairly level ground,                                                      You could lose control and hit
                                           forward could damage the
 always set the parking brake and                                                     people or objects. Do not shift
                                           transmission. The repairs would
 move the shift lever to P (Park).         not be covered by the vehicle              into a drive gear while the engine
 See Shifting Into Park (Automatic         warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only        is running at high speed.
 Transmission) on page 9‑21.               after the vehicle is stopped.
                                                                               Driving and Operating               9-27

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or   2 (Second): This position gives you          Notice: Spinning the tires or
N (Neutral) with the engine           more power but lower fuel economy.           holding the vehicle in one
running at high speed may             You can use 2 (Second) on hills.             place on a hill using only the
damage the transmission. The          It can help control vehicle speed as         accelerator pedal may damage
repairs would not be covered by       you go down steep mountain roads,            the transmission. The repair will
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the     while using the brakes off and on.           not be covered by the vehicle
engine is not running at high         Notice: Do not drive in 2 (Second)           warranty. If you are stuck, do not
speed when shifting the vehicle.      at speeds over 105 km/h (65 mph),            spin the tires. When stopping on
D4 (Automatic Overdrive): This        or you can damage the                        a hill, use the brakes to hold the
position is for normal driving.       transmission. Use D4 (Automatic              vehicle in place.

When operating the vehicle in         Overdrive) as much as possible.              If there is a malfunction with the
severe cold conditions, the           Do not shift into 2 (Second)                 automatic transmission, the
transmission may be prevented from    unless you are going slower than             malfunction indicator lamp or the
shifting into D4 gear until the       105 km/h (65 mph) or you can                 HOLD indicator light will turn on or
transmission fluid has warmed up to   damage the engine.                           flash. See Malfunction Indicator
its operational temperature.          1 (First): This position gives you           Lamp on page 5‑14.

Notice: If the vehicle seems to       even more power but lower fuel               Have the vehicle fixed as soon as
start up rather slowly or not shift   economy than 2 (Second). You can             possible.
gears when you go faster, and         use it on very steep hills, or in deep
you continue to drive the vehicle     snow or mud. If the shift lever is put
that way, you could damage the        in 1 (First), the transmission will not
transmission. Have the vehicle        shift into first gear until the vehicle is
serviced right away. You can          going slowly enough.
drive in 2 (Second) when you are
driving less than 55 km/h (35 mph)
and D4 (Automatic Overdrive) for
higher speeds until then.
9-28       Driving and Operating

Hold Mode                               When Hold Mode is activated, the       When Hold Mode is selected in
                                        transmission runs as follows:          2 (Second), the transmission will
If the vehicle's transmission has
                                           Selector Lever                      start in 2 (Second) gear instead of
Hold Mode, you can select this
                                              Position        Gear Range       1 (First), helping to reduce wheel
mode to allow the automatic
                                                                               spin when starting out on slippery
transmission to stay in a specific               D4             Third Gear     surfaces such as snow, mud, or ice.
gear range.
                                                  2           Second Gear      Since selecting Hold Mode in
                                                  1             First Gear     D4 (Drive) locks the transmission in
                                                                               3 (Third), and prevents downshifts to
                                        See Hold Mode Light on page 5‑18.      2 (Second) or 1 (First), acceleration
                                                                               from a stop or near stop on dry
                                        When Hold Mode is selected in          pavement will be slower than
                                        D4 (Drive), the transmission is held   expected. Hold Mode should not be
                                        in 3 (Third) gear, which locks out     selected during these situations.
                                        D4 (Drive). This allows for engine
                                        braking when slowing from higher
                                        speeds.


Press the HOLD button on the shift
lever console to turn on Hold Mode.
The HOLD light on the instrument
panel cluster will turn on. Press the
button again to turn off Hold Mode,
and return to normal automatic
transmission operation.
                                                                                 Driving and Operating               9-29

Manual Transmission                      N (Neutral) and let up on the clutch.     R (Reverse): To back up, press
                                         Press the clutch pedal back down.         down the clutch pedal, lift up the
Five-Speed                               Then shift into 1 (First).                ring on the shift lever and shift into
                                         2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal        R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
                                         as you let up on the accelerator          pedal slowly while pressing the
                                         pedal and shift into 2 (Second).          accelerator pedal.
                                         Then, slowly let up on the clutch         Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
                                         pedal as you press the accelerator        while the vehicle is moving
                                         pedal.                                    forward could damage the
                                         3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and 5 (Fifth):     transmission. The repairs would
                                         Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), and     not be covered by the vehicle
                                         5 (Fifth) the same way you do for         warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
                                         2 (Second). Slowly let up on the          after the vehicle is stopped.
                                         clutch pedal as you press the             Also, use R (Reverse), along with
                                         accelerator pedal.                        the parking brake, for parking the
                                         To stop, let up on the accelerator        vehicle.
This is your shift pattern.
                                         pedal and press the brake pedal.          Shift Speeds
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal        Just before the vehicle stops, press
and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly   the clutch pedal and the brake
let up on the clutch pedal as you        pedal, and shift to N (Neutral).                     { WARNING
press the accelerator pedal.
                                         N (Neutral): Use this position when        If you skip a gear when you
You can shift into 1 (First) when you    you start or idle the engine.              downshift, you could lose control
are going less than 32 km/h                                                         of the vehicle. You could injure
(20 mph). If you have come to a                                                     yourself or others. Do not shift
complete stop and it is hard to shift                                               down more than one gear at a
into 1 (First), put the shift lever in
                                                                                    time when you downshift.
9-30       Driving and Operating

Up‐Shift Light                            Brakes                                 Let us say the road is wet and you
                                                                                 are driving safely. Suddenly, an
                                                                                 animal jumps out in front of you.
                                          Antilock Brake                         You slam on the brakes and
                                          System (ABS)                           continue braking. Here is what
                                                                                 happens with ABS:
                                          The vehicle might have the Antilock
                                          Brake System (ABS), an advanced        A computer senses that the wheels
                                          electronic braking system that helps   are slowing down. If one of the
Vehicles equipped with a manual           prevent a braking skid.                wheels is about to stop rolling, the
transmission may have an up-shift                                                computer will separately work the
light. This light indicates when to                                              brakes at each wheel.
shift to the next higher gear for
better fuel economy.                                                             ABS can change the brake pressure
                                                                                 to each wheel, as required, faster
For the best fuel economy,                                                       than any driver could. This can help
accelerate slowly and shift when the                                             the driver steer around the obstacle
light comes on, and if the weather,                                              while braking hard.
road, and traffic conditions allow.       If the vehicle has ABS, this warning
                                          light comes on briefly when the        As the brakes are applied, the
It is normal for the light to go on and                                          computer keeps receiving updates
                                          vehicle is started.
off if the accelerator position                                                  on wheel speed and controls
changes quickly. Ignore the light         The warning light is on the            braking pressure accordingly.
during downshifts.                        instrument panel cluster. See
                                          Antilock Brake System (ABS)
                                          Warning Light on page 5‑17.
                                                                                 Driving and Operating              9-31

Remember: ABS does not change            the wrong thing to do. The wheels         Parking Brake
the time needed to get a foot up to      can stop rolling. Once they do, the
the brake pedal or always decrease       vehicle cannot respond to the
stopping distance. If you get too        driver's steering. Momentum will
close to the vehicle in front of you,    carry it in whatever direction it was
there will not be enough time to         headed when the wheels stopped
apply the brakes if that vehicle         rolling. That could be off the road,
suddenly slows or stops. Always          into the very thing the driver was
leave enough room up ahead to            trying to avoid, or into traffic.
stop, even with ABS.                     If the vehicle does not have ABS,
Using ABS                                use a “squeeze” braking technique.
                                         This gives maximum braking while
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold        maintaining steering control. Do this
the brake pedal down firmly and let      by pushing on the brake pedal with
antilock work. You might feel a slight   steadily increasing pressure. In an
brake pedal pulsation or hear some                                                 The parking brake lever is located
                                         emergency, you will probably want         between the bucket seats.
noise, but this is normal.               to squeeze the brakes hard without
                                         locking the wheels. If you hear or        To set the parking brake, hold the
Braking in Emergencies                                                             brake pedal down and pull up on the
                                         feel the wheels sliding, ease off the
At some time, nearly every driver        brake pedal. This helps retain            parking brake lever. If the ignition is
gets into a situation that requires      steering control.                         on, the brake system warning light
hard braking.                                                                      will come on. See Brake System
                                         In many emergencies, steering can         Warning Light on page 5‑16.
If the vehicle has ABS, it allows the    help more than even the very best
driver to steer and brake at the         braking.
same time. However, if the vehicle
does not have ABS, the first
reaction — to hit the brake pedal
hard and hold it down — might be
9-32      Driving and Operating

To release the parking brake, hold     Cruise Control
the brake pedal down. Pull the
parking brake lever up until you can   For vehicles with cruise control, a
press the release button. Hold the     speed of about 39 km/h (24 mph) or
release button in as you move the      more can be maintained without
brake lever all the way down.          keeping your foot on the
                                       accelerator. Cruise control does not
Notice: Driving with the parking
                                       work at speeds below 39 km/h
brake on can overheat the brake
                                       (24 mph).
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system         When the brakes are applied, or the
parts. Make sure that the parking      clutch pedal if you have a manual
brake is fully released and the        transmission, the cruise control
brake warning light is off before      turns off.                             The cruise control buttons are
driving.                                                                      located on the right side of the
                                                 { WARNING                    steering wheel.
                                                                              I / O (On/Off):    Press to turn the
                                        Cruise control can be dangerous       cruise control on or off.
                                        where you cannot drive safely at
                                        a steady speed. So, do not use        RES+ (Resume/Accelerate):
                                        the cruise control on winding         Press briefly to make the vehicle
                                                                              resume to a previously set speed,
                                        roads or in heavy traffic.
                                                                              or press and hold to accelerate.
                                        Cruise control can be dangerous       SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set the
                                        on slippery roads. On such roads,     speed and activate cruise control or
                                        fast changes in tire traction can     make the vehicle decelerate.
                                        cause excessive wheel slip, and
                                        you could lose control. Do not use
                                        cruise control on slippery roads.
                                                                               Driving and Operating               9-33

Setting Cruise Control                   Resuming a Set Speed                    Increasing Speed While Using
If the cruise button is on when not in   If the cruise control is set at a       Cruise Control
use, it could get bumped and go into     desired speed and then the brakes       If the cruise control system is
cruise when not desired. Keep the        are applied, or the clutch pedal if     already activated,
cruise control switch off when cruise    you have a manual transmission,         .   Press and hold the RES+ button
is not being used.                       the cruise control is disengaged            on the steering wheel until the
The cruise control light on the          without erasing the set speed from          desired speed is reached, then
instrument panel cluster will come       memory.                                     release it.
on after the cruise control has been     Once the vehicle speed reaches          .    To increase the vehicle speed in
set to the desired speed.                about 39 km/h (24 mph) or more,             small amounts, press the RES+
                                         press the RES+ button on the                button. Each time this is done,
1. Press I /     O to turn cruise        steering wheel. The vehicle returns
   control on.                                                                       the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
                                         to the previous set speed and stays         (1 mph) faster.
2. Accelerate to the speed desired.      there.
                                                                                 The accelerate feature only works
3. Press the SET− button and             If the RES+ button is held, the         after the cruise control is turned on
   release it.                           vehicle speed will continue to          by pressing the SET− button.
                                         increase until the button is released
4. Take your foot off the accelerate     or the brake pedal is applied. Do not
   pedal.                                hold in the RES+ button, unless you
                                         want the vehicle to go faster.
9-34       Driving and Operating

Reducing Speed While Using              accelerator pedal to maintain the       Fuel
Cruise Control                          vehicle speed. When going
                                        downhill, you might have to brake or    Use of the recommended fuel is
If the cruise control system is
                                        shift to a lower gear to keep the       an important part of the proper
already activated,
                                        vehicle speed down. When the            maintenance of this vehicle. To help
.   Press the SET− button until the     brakes are applied the cruise control   keep the engine clean and maintain
    lower speed desired is reached,     turns off.                              optimum vehicle performance, we
    then release it.                                                            recommend the use of gasoline
                                        Ending Cruise Control                   advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
.   To slow down in small amounts,
    briefly press the SET− button.      There are two ways to end cruise        Gasoline.
    Each time this is done, the         control:                                Look for the TOP TIER label on the
    vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h         .   Step lightly on the brake pedal,    fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
    (1 mph) slower.                         or press the clutch pedal, if you   enhanced detergency standards
                                            have a manual transmission.         developed by auto companies. A list
Passing Another Vehicle While
                                                                                of marketers providing TOP TIER
Using Cruise Control                    .   Press I / O on the cruise           Detergent Gasoline can be found at
Use the accelerator pedal to                control pad.                        www.toptiergas.com.
increase the vehicle speed. When
                                        Erasing Speed Memory
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the           The cruise control set speed is
previous set cruise speed.              erased from memory by pressing
                                        the I / O button or if the ignition
Using Cruise Control on Hills
                                        is turned off.
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
                                       Driving and Operating              9-35

Recommended Fuel                         California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with       Requirements
a posted octane rating of 87 or          If the vehicle is certified to meet
higher. If the octane rating is less     California Emissions Standards, it is
than 87, an audible knocking noise,      designed to operate on fuels that
commonly referred to as spark            meet California specifications. See
knock, might be heard when driving.      the underhood emission control
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated     label. If this fuel is not available in
at 87 octane or higher as soon as        states adopting California emissions
possible. If heavy knocking is heard     standards, the vehicle will operate
when using gasoline rated at             satisfactorily on fuels meeting
87 octane or higher, the engine          federal specifications, but emission
needs service.                           control system performance might
                                         be affected. The malfunction
Gasoline Specifications                  indicator lamp could turn on and the
At a minimum, gasoline                   vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
should meet ASTM specification           See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
D 4814 in the United States or           page 5‑14. If this occurs, return to
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.         your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
Some gasolines contain an                If it is determined that the condition
octane-enhancing additive called         is caused by the type of fuel used,
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese         repairs might not be covered by the
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend          vehicle warranty.
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑36 for additional
information.
9-36       Driving and Operating

Fuels in Foreign                         Fuel Additives                          For customers who do not use TOP
                                                                                 TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
Countries                                To provide cleaner air, all gasolines   one bottle of GM Fuel System
If you plan on driving in another        in the United States are now            Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
country outside the United States or     required to contain additives that      tank at every engine oil change, can
Canada, the proper fuel might be         help prevent engine and fuel system     help clean deposits from fuel
hard to find. Never use leaded           deposits from forming, allowing the     injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
gasoline or any other fuel not           emission control system to work         System Treatment PLUS is the only
recommended in the previous text         properly. In most cases, nothing        gasoline additive recommended by
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by        should have to be added to the fuel.    General Motors. It is available at
use of improper fuel would not be        However, some gasolines contain         your dealer.
covered by the vehicle warranty.         only the minimum amount of
                                         additive required to meet U.S.          Gasolines containing oxygenates,
To check the fuel availability, ask an   Environmental Protection Agency         such as ethers and ethanol, and
auto club, or contact a major oil        regulations. To help keep fuel          reformulated gasolines might be
company that does business in the        injectors and intake valves clean,      available in your area. We
country where you will be driving.       or if the vehicle experiences           recommend that you use these
                                         problems due to dirty injectors or      gasolines, if they comply with the
                                         valves, look for gasoline that is       specifications described earlier.
                                         advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
                                         Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER
                                         label on the fuel pump to ensure
                                         gasoline meets enhanced
                                         detergency standards developed by
                                         the auto companies. A list of
                                         marketers providing TOP TIER
                                         Detergent Gasoline can be found at
                                         www.toptiergas.com.
                                                                                 Driving and Operating              9-37

However, E85 (85% ethanol) and         malfunction indicator lamp might
other fuels containing more than       turn on. If this occurs, return to your
10% ethanol must not be used in        dealer for service.
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.                           Filling the Tank
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains                  { WARNING
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can             Fuel vapor burns violently and a
corrode metal parts in the fuel         fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
system and also damage plastic          To help avoid injuries to you and
and rubber parts. That damage           others, read and follow all the
would not be covered under the          instructions on the fuel pump              To open the fuel filler door, pull up
vehicle warranty.                       island. Turn off the engine when           on the release lever with this symbol
                                        refueling. Do not smoke near fuel          on it. It is located on the floor on the
Some gasolines that are
                                        or when refueling the vehicle. Do          outboard side of the driver seat.
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an                not use cellular phones. Keep
octane-enhancing additive called        sparks, flames, and smoking
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese        materials away from fuel. Do not
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant    leave the fuel pump unattended
where you buy gasoline whether the      when refueling the vehicle. This is
fuel contains MMT. We recommend         against the law in some places.
against the use of such gasolines.      Do not re-enter the vehicle while
Fuels containing MMT can reduce         pumping fuel. Keep children away
the life of spark plugs and the         from the fuel pump; never let
performance of the emission control     children pump fuel.
system could be affected. The
9-38       Driving and Operating

                                                                                allow fuel to evaporate into the
                                                   { WARNING                    atmosphere. See Malfunction
                                                                                Indicator Lamp on page 5‑14.
                                          Fuel can spray out on you if you
                                          open the fuel cap too quickly.
                                          If you spill fuel and then                      { WARNING
                                          something ignites it, you could be     If a fire starts while you are
                                          badly burned. This spray can           refueling, do not remove the
                                          happen if the tank is nearly full,     nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
                                          and is more likely in hot weather.     shutting off the pump or by
                                          Open the fuel cap slowly and wait      notifying the station attendant.
                                          for any hiss noise to stop. Then       Leave the area immediately.
Hatchback Shown. Sedan Similar            unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located                                                Notice: If a new fuel cap is
behind a hinged fuel door on the         Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not   needed, be sure to get the right
passenger side of the vehicle.           top off or overfill the tank. Wait a   type of cap from your dealer. The
                                         few seconds after you have finished    wrong type fuel cap might not fit
To remove the fuel cap, turn it          pumping before removing the
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel                                               properly, might cause the
                                         nozzle. Clean fuel from painted        malfunction indicator lamp to
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is    surfaces as soon as possible. See
released too soon, it will spring back                                          light, and could damage the fuel
                                         “Washing the Vehicle” in Exterior      tank and emissions system. See
to the right.                            Care on page 10‑76.                    Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
                                         When replacing the fuel cap, turn it   page 5‑14.
                                         clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
                                         the cap is fully installed. The
                                         diagnostic system can determine if
                                         the fuel cap has been left off or
                                         improperly installed. This would
                                                                                Driving and Operating           9-39

Filling a Portable Fuel                      WARNING (Continued)                  Towing
Container
                                         .   Bring the fill nozzle in contact     General Towing
           {   WARNING                       with the inside of the fill          Information
                                             opening before operating the
Never fill a portable fuel container                                              The vehicle is neither designed nor
                                             nozzle. Contact should be            intended to tow a trailer.
while it is in the vehicle. Static           maintained until the filling is
electricity discharge from the               complete.
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
                                         .   Do not smoke while
and the vehicle damaged if this              pumping fuel.
occurs. To help avoid injury to you      .   Do not use a cellular phone
and others:                                  while pumping fuel.
  .   Dispense fuel only into
      approved containers.
  .   Do not fill a container while it
      is inside a vehicle, in a
      vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
      or on any surface other than
      the ground.
                          (Continued)
9-40       Driving and Operating

Conversions and                          The vehicle has an airbag system.
                                         Before attempting to add anything
Add-Ons                                  electrical to the vehicle, see
                                         Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Add-On Electrical                        Vehicle on page 3‑36 and Adding
                                         Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Equipment                                Vehicle on page 3‑36.
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
                                                                                                                                      Vehicle Care                           10-1

                                                              Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-23
Vehicle Care                                                  Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
                                                                                                                         Center High-Mounted
                                                                                                                          Stoplamp (CHMSL)
                                                              Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24      (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          10-34
                                                              Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26        Center High-Mounted
General Information                                           Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27     Stoplamp (CHMSL)
 General Information . . . . . . . . . .          10-3        Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-28                    (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      10-34
 California Proposition                                       Automatic Transmission Shift                               License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . .                  10-35
  65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    10-3          Lock Control Function                                    Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . .                 10-35
 California Perchlorate                                         Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
  Materials Requirements . . . .                  10-3        Ignition Transmission Lock                                Electrical System
 Accessories and                                                Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29    Electrical System
  Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     10-4        Park Brake and P (Park)                                      Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      10-36
                                                                Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29                    Fuses and Circuit
Vehicle Checks                                                                                                             Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      10-36
 Doing Your Own                                               Wiper Blade
                                                                Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30            Engine Compartment Fuse
  Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5                                                                          Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   10-37
 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6   Headlamp Aiming                                             Instrument Panel Fuse
 Engine Compartment                                           Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30                    Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   10-40
  Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9       Bulb Replacement                                           Wheels and Tires
 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12                       Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31                 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
 Automatic Transmission                                       Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31            Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-42
  Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13     Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31          Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
 Manual Transmission                                          Front Turn Signal,                                         Tire Terminology and
  Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15      Sidemarker, and Parking                                    Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
 Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15                Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32       Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16                      Taillamps, Turn Signal,                                    Tire Pressure Monitor
 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17                  Sidemarker, Stoplamps,                                     System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18                and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-33
 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21
10-2           Vehicle Care

 Tire Pressure Monitor                                       Jump Starting
   Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51          Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54           Towing
 When It Is Time for New                                      Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-74
   Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55    Recreational Vehicle
 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56                  Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
 Different Size Tires and                                    Appearance Care
   Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
                                                              Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
 Uniform Tire Quality
                                                              Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
   Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
                                                              Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
 Wheel Alignment and Tire
   Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60
 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-69
                                                                                    Vehicle Care         10-3

General Information                  California Proposition                California Perchlorate
For service and parts needs, visit   65 Warning                            Materials Requirements
your dealer. You will receive        Most motor vehicles, including this   Certain types of automotive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained      one, contain and/or emit chemicals    applications, such as airbag
and supported service people.        known to the State of California to   initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
Genuine GM parts have one of         cause cancer and birth defects or     and lithium batteries contained in
these marks:                         other reproductive harm. Engine       remote keyless transmitters, may
                                     exhaust, many parts and systems,      contain perchlorate materials.
                                     many fluids, and some component       Special handling may be necessary.
                                     wear by-products contain and/or       For additional information, see
                                     emit these chemicals.                 www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
                                                                           perchlorate.
10-4       Vehicle Care

Accessories and                           Damage to vehicle components             GM Accessories are designed to
                                          resulting from the installation or use   complement and function with other
Modifications                             of non‐GM certified parts, including     systems on the vehicle. Your GM
Adding non‐dealer accessories to          control module modifications, is not     dealer can accessorize the vehicle
the vehicle can affect vehicle            covered under the terms of the           using genuine GM Accessories.
performance and safety, including         vehicle warranty and may affect          When you go to your GM dealer and
such things as airbags, braking,          remaining warranty coverage for          ask for GM Accessories, you will
stability, ride and handling,             affected parts.                          know that GM-trained and
emissions systems, aerodynamics,                                                   supported service technicians will
durability, and electronic systems                                                 perform the work using genuine GM
like antilock brakes, traction control,                                            Accessories.
and stability control. Some of these                                               Also, see Adding Equipment to the
accessories could even cause                                                       Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
malfunction or damage not covered                                                  page 3‑36.
by the vehicle warranty.
                                                                                     Vehicle Care          10-5

Vehicle Checks                              WARNING (Continued)
                                                                            This vehicle has an airbag system.
                                                                            Before attempting to do your own
                                                                            service work, see Servicing the
Doing Your Own                          .   Be sure to use the proper       Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Service Work                                nuts, bolts, and other          page 3‑36.
                                            fasteners. English and metric   Keep a record with all parts receipts
         { WARNING                          fasteners can be easily
                                            confused. If the wrong
                                                                            and list the mileage and the date of
                                                                            any service work performed. See
You can be injured and the                  fasteners are used, parts can   Maintenance Records on page 11‑9.
vehicle could be damaged if you             later break or fall off. You
try to do service work on a vehicle         could be hurt.
without knowing enough about it.
 .   Be sure you have sufficient      If doing some of your own service
     knowledge, experience, the       work, use the proper service
     proper replacement parts,        manual. It tells you much more
     and tools before attempting      about how to service the vehicle
     any vehicle                      than this manual can. To order the
     maintenance task.                proper service manual, see Service
                        (Continued)   Publications Ordering Information
                                      on page 13‑12.
10-6       Vehicle Care

Hood
To open the hood:




                                       2. At the front of the vehicle, lift up   3. Lift the hood and release the
                                          on the secondary hood release             hood prop from its retainer,
                                          lever, located under the front            located on the underside of the
                                          center of the hood.                       hood. Securely place the hood
1. Pull the hood release handle
                                                                                    prop into the slot on the inner
   inside the vehicle. It is located
                                                                                    fender.
   on the lower left side of the
   instrument panel.
                                                                                   Vehicle Care   10-7

To close the hood:                        2. Lower the hood 30 cm
                                             (12 inches) above the vehicle
                                             and release it so it fully latches.
                                             Check to make sure the hood is
                                             closed and repeat the process if
                                             necessary.




1. Before closing the hood, be sure
   all the filler caps are on properly.
   Then, lift the hood to relieve
   pressure on the hood prop.
   Remove the hood prop from the
   slot in the inner fender and
   return the prop to its retainer.
   The prop rod must click into
   place when returning it to the
   retainer to prevent hood
   damage.
10-8   Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview




                 Automatic Transmission Shown, Manual Transmission Similar
                                                                                       Vehicle Care          10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on     G. Windshield Washer Fluid
                                                                              .   Check the engine oil level
   page 10‑16.                         Reservoir. See “Adding Washer              regularly and maintain the
                                       Fluid” under Washer Fluid on               proper oil level. See “Checking
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When                                                 Engine Oil” and “When to Add
   to Add Engine Oil” under            page 10‑24.
                                                                                  Engine Oil.”
   Engine Oil on page 10‑9.         H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
                                       “Checking Engine Oil” under
                                                                              .   Change the engine oil at the
C. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.                                                  appropriate time. See Engine Oil
   See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes      Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
                                                                                  Life System on page 10‑12.
   on page 10‑24 and Hydraulic      I.   Automatic Transmission
   Clutch on page 10‑15.                 Dipstick. See Automatic
                                                                              .   Always dispose of engine oil
                                         Transmission Fluid on                    properly. See “What to Do With
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.                                                     Used Oil.”
   See Cooling System on                 page 10‑13.
   page 10‑17.                      J.   Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse               See Power Steering Fluid on
   Block on page 10‑37.                  page 10‑23.

F.   Battery on page 10‑27.         Engine Oil
                                    To ensure proper engine
                                    performance and long life, careful        If the engine oil pressure light
                                    attention must be paid to engine oil.     comes on, check the engine oil level
                                    Following these simple, but               right away. The oil pressure light is
                                    important steps will help protect         on the instrument panel cluster. See
                                    your investment:                          Engine Oil Pressure Light on
                                                                              page 5‑18. Check the engine oil
                                    .    Always use engine oil approved       level regularly; this is an added
                                         to the proper specification and of   reminder.
                                         the proper viscosity grade. See
                                         “Selecting the Right Engine Oil.”
10-10        Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil                        When to Add Engine Oil                  Add enough oil to put the level
                                                                                   somewhere in the proper operating
It is a good idea to check the engine
                                                                                   range. Push the dipstick all the way
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
                                                                                   back in when through.
get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must                                                  Selecting the Right Engine Oil
be on level ground. The engine oil
dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See                                              Selecting the right engine oil
Engine Compartment Overview on                                                     depends on both the proper oil
page 10‑8 for the location of the          If the oil is below the MIN             specification and viscosity grade:
engine oil dipstick.                       (minimum) mark on the dipstick, add     Specification
                                           one liter/quart of the recommended
1. If the engine has been running                                                  Use and ask for engine oils with the
                                           oil and then recheck the level. See
   recently, turn off the engine and                                               dexos™ certification mark. Oils
                                           “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” for
   allow several minutes for the oil                                               meeting the requirements of your
                                           an explanation of what kind of oil to
   to drain back into the oil pan.                                                 vehicle should have the dexos™
                                           use. For engine oil crankcase
   Checking your oil level too soon                                                certification mark on the container.
                                           capacity, see Capacities and
   after engine shut off will not                                                  This certification mark indicates that
                                           Specifications on page 12‑2.
   provide an accurate oil level                                                   the oil has been approved to the
   reading.                                Notice: Do not add too much oil.        dexos™ specification.
                                           If the engine has so much oil that
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
                                           the oil level gets above the upper
   with a paper towel or cloth, then
                                           mark that shows the proper
   push it back in all the way.
                                           operating range, the engine could
   Remove it again, keeping the tip
                                           be damaged.
   down, and check the level.
                                           See Engine Compartment Overview
                                           on page 10‑8 for the location of the
                                           engine oil fill cap.
                                                                                     Vehicle Care         10-11

                                      Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
                                      dexos™ is unavailable: In the event
                                      that dexos™ approved engine oil is
                                      not available at an oil change or for
                                      maintaining proper oil level, you
                                      may use substitute engine oil
Notice: Use only engine oil that is   displaying the API Starburst symbol
approved to the dexos™                and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
specification or an equivalent        Use of oils that do not meet the
engine oil of the appropriate         dexos™ specification, however, may
viscosity grade. Engine oils          result in reduced performance under
approved to the dexos™                certain circumstances.
specification will show the
                                      Viscosity Grade
dexos™ symbol on the container.
Failure to use the recommended        SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
engine oil or equivalent can result   grade for the vehicle. Do not use
in engine damage not covered by       other viscosity oils such as
the vehicle warranty. If you are      SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
unsure whether your oil is
approved to the dexos™
specification, ask your service
provider.



                                                                              Cold Temperature Operation: In an
                                                                              area of extreme cold, where the
                                                                              temperature falls below −29°C
                                                                              (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
10-12       Vehicle Care

be used. An oil of this viscosity       What to Do with Used Oil                 Engine Oil Life System
grade will provide easier cold
                                        Used engine oil contains certain         When to Change Engine Oil
starting for the engine at extremely
                                        elements that can be unhealthy for
low temperatures. When selecting                                                 This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life
                                        your skin and could even cause
an oil of the appropriate viscosity                                              System, a computer system that
                                        cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
grade, be sure to always select an                                               indicates when to change the
                                        your skin for very long. Clean your
oil that meets the required                                                      engine oil and filter. This is based
                                        skin and nails with soap and water,
specification, dexos™. See                                                       on engine revolutions and engine
                                        or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
“Specification” for more information.                                            temperature, and not on mileage.
                                        properly dispose of clothing or rags
Engine Oil Additives/Engine             containing used engine oil. See the      Based on driving conditions, the
Oil Flushes                             manufacturer's warnings about the        mileage at which an oil change is
                                        use and disposal of oil products.        indicated can vary considerably. For
Do not add anything to the oil. The                                              the oil life system to work properly,
recommended oils with the dexos™        Used oil can be a threat to the
                                                                                 the system must be reset every time
specification and displaying the        environment. If you change your          the oil is changed.
dexos™ certification mark are all       own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
that is needed for good performance     from the filter before disposal. Never   When the system has calculated
and engine protection.                  dispose of oil by putting it in the      that oil life has been diminished, it
                                        trash or pouring it on the ground,       indicates that an oil change is
Engine oil system flushes are not       into sewers, or into streams or          necessary. A change engine oil light
recommended and could cause             bodies of water. Recycle it by taking    displays. Change the oil as soon as
engine damage not covered by the        it to a place that collects used oil.    possible within the next 1 000 km
vehicle warranty.                                                                (600 miles). It is possible that,
                                                                                 if driving under the best conditions,
                                                                                 the oil life system might indicate that
                                                                                 an oil change is not necessary for
                                                                                 up to a year. The engine oil and
                                                                                 filter must be changed at least once
                                                                                 a year and, at this time, the system
                                                                                         Vehicle Care           10-13

must be reset. Your dealer has          If the change engine oil light comes     Notice: Too much or too
trained service people who will         back on when the vehicle is started,     little fluid can damage the
perform this work and reset the         the engine oil life system has not       transmission. Too much can
system. It is also important to check   reset. Repeat the procedure.             mean that some of the fluid could
the oil regularly over the course of                                             come out and fall on hot engine
an oil drain interval and keep it at    Automatic Transmission                   parts or exhaust system parts,
the proper level.                                                                starting a fire. Too little fluid
                                        Fluid                                    could cause the transmission to
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be           When to Check Automatic                  overheat. Be sure to get an
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)       Transmission Fluid                       accurate reading if checking the
since the last oil change.                                                       transmission fluid.
                                        Check the automatic transmission
Remember to reset the oil life          fluid level at least twice a year. Add   Wait at least 30 minutes before
system whenever the oil is changed.     fluid if needed. See Scheduled           checking the transmission fluid level
                                        Maintenance on page 11‑2.                if the vehicle has been driven:
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
                                                                                 .   When outside temperatures are
                                        How to Check Automatic                       above 32°C (90°F).
Reset the system whenever the           Transmission Fluid
engine oil is changed so that the
                                                                                 .   At high speed for quite a while.
                                        Because this operation can be a
system can calculate the next           little difficult, it may be decided to
                                                                                 .   In heavy traffic — especially in
engine oil change. To reset the         have this done at the dealer service         hot weather.
system:                                 department.                              To get the right reading, the fluid
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,         If not taken to the dealer, be sure to   should be at normal operating
   with the engine off.                 follow all the instructions here, or a   temperature, which is 70°C to 80°C
2. Fully press and release the          false reading on the dipstick could      (158°F to 176°F).
   accelerator pedal three times        result.
   within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
10-14       Vehicle Care

Get the vehicle warmed up by             Then, without shutting off the         5. If the fluid level is in the
driving about 24 km (15 miles) when      engine, follow these steps:               acceptable range, push the
outside temperatures are above           1. Locate the automatic                   dipstick back in all the way.
10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C      transmission dipstick which is
(50°F), you may have to drive                                                   How to Add Automatic
                                            located toward the front of the     Transmission Fluid
longer.                                     engine compartment, near the
Checking the Fluid Level                    power steering fluid reservoir.     Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
                                                                                to determine what kind of
Prepare the vehicle as follows:             See Engine Compartment              transmission fluid to use. See
                                            Overview on page 10‑8 for more      Recommended Fluids and
1. Park the vehicle on a level              information on location.
   place. Keep the engine running.                                              Lubricants on page 11‑6.
                                         2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it   If the fluid level is low, add only
2. With the parking brake applied,          with a clean rag or paper towel.
   place the shift lever in P (Park).                                           enough of the proper fluid to bring
                                         3. Push the dipstick back in all the   the level into the area between the
3. With your foot on the brake              way, wait three seconds, and        two dimples in the hot range on the
   pedal, move the shift lever              then pull it back out again.        dipstick.
   through each gear range,
   pausing for about three seconds                                              1. Pull out the dipstick.
   in each range. Then, position the                                            2. Using a long-neck funnel, add
   shift lever in P (Park).                                                        enough fluid at the dipstick hole
4. Let the engine run at idle for                                                  to bring it to the proper level.
   three to five minutes.                                                          It does not take much fluid,
                                                                                   generally less than 0.5 L (1 pint).
                                         4. Check both sides of the dipstick.      Do not overfill.
                                            The fluid should be between the
                                            MIN (A) and MAX (B) mark of
                                            the hot area of the dipstick.
                                                                                        Vehicle Care           10-15

Notice: Use of the incorrect            Recommended Fluids and                  How to Check and Add Fluid
automatic transmission fluid may        Lubricants on page 11‑6 for the
                                                                                The reservoir is located near the
damage the vehicle, and the             proper fluid to use.
                                                                                back of the engine compartment on
damages may not be covered by
                                                                                the driver side of the vehicle. See
the vehicle's warranty. Always          Hydraulic Clutch                        Engine Compartment Overview on
use the automatic transmission
                                        There is one reservoir for both the     page 10‑8 for more information on
fluid listed in Recommended
                                        brake and the hydraulic clutch fluid.   location.
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11‑6.                              See Brakes on page 10‑24 for more
                                        information.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the
   fluid level as described under       The hydraulic clutch linkage in the
   “How to Check Automatic              vehicle is self-adjusting. The master
   Transmission Fluid” earlier in       cylinder reservoir is filled with
   this section.                        hydraulic fluid.
4. When the correct fluid level is      A fluid loss in this system could
   obtained, push the dipstick back     indicate a problem. Have the
   in all the way.                      system inspected and repaired.
                                        When to Check and What
Manual Transmission                     to Use
Fluid                                   Refer to the Maintenance Schedule       To check the fluid level, look on the
It is not necessary to check the        to determine how often to check the     side of the reservoir. If the fluid
manual transmission fluid level.        fluid level in the master cylinder      reaches the MAX (A) mark on the
A transmission fluid leak is the only   reservoir and for the proper fluid.     reservoir, the fluid level is correct.
reason for fluid loss. If a leak        See Scheduled Maintenance on            If the fluid does not reach the
occurs, take the vehicle to the         page 11‑2 and Recommended               MIN (B) mark on the reservoir, then
dealer service department and have      Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑6.     fluid needs to be added.
it repaired as soon as possible. See
10-16        Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter                 release loose dust and dirt. If the
                                          filter remains caked with dirt, a new               { WARNING
The engine air cleaner/filter is          filter is required.
located in the engine compartment                                                   Operating the engine with the air
on the passenger side of the              To inspect or replace the air cleaner/    cleaner/filter off can cause you or
vehicle. See Engine Compartment           filter:                                   others to be burned. The air
Overview on page 10‑8 for more                                                      cleaner not only cleans the air; it
information on location.                                                            helps to stop flames if the engine
                                                                                    backfires. Use caution when
When to Inspect the Engine Air
                                                                                    working on the engine and do not
Cleaner/Filter                                                                      drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
                                                                                   Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
and replace it at the first oil change
                                                                                   off, dirt can easily get into the
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)
                                                                                   engine, which could damage it.
interval. See Scheduled
                                                                                   Always have the air cleaner/filter
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
                                                                                   in place when you are driving.
information. If you are driving in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.         1. Remove the screws and lift off
                                             the cover.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
                                          2. Inspect or replace the engine air
Cleaner/Filter
                                             cleaner/filter.
To inspect the engine air cleaner/
                                          3. Put the cover back on tightly and
filter, remove the filter from the
                                             tighten the screws.
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
                                          See Scheduled Maintenance on
                                          page 11‑2 for replacement intervals.
                                                                              Vehicle Care        10-17

Cooling System                                                         Notice: Using coolant other than
                                          { WARNING                    DEX‐COOL® can cause premature
The cooling system allows the                                          engine, heater core, or radiator
engine to maintain the correct   An electric engine cooling fan        corrosion. In addition, the engine
working temperature.             under the hood can start up even      coolant may require changing
                                 when the engine is not running        sooner, at the first maintenance
                                 and can cause injury. Keep            service after each 30,000 miles
                                 hands, clothing, and tools away       (50 000 km) or 24 months,
                                 from any underhood electric fan.      whichever occurs first. Any
                                                                       repairs would not be covered by
                                                                       the vehicle warranty. Always use
                                                                       DEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolant
                                          { WARNING                    in the vehicle.
                                 Heater and radiator hoses, and
                                 other engine parts, can be very
                                 hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
                                 you can be burned.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan   Do not run the engine if there is a
   (Out of View)                 leak. If you run the engine, it
B. Coolant Surge Tank with       could lose all coolant. That could
   Pressure Cap                  cause an engine fire, and you
                                 could be burned. Get any leak
                                 fixed before you drive the vehicle.
10-18        Vehicle Care

Engine Coolant                          What to Use                          Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
                                                                             drinkable water and DEX-COOL
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL® engine                    { WARNING                    coolant. If using this mixture,
                                                                             nothing else needs to be added.
coolant. This coolant is designed to                                         This mixture:
                                        Adding only plain water or some
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
                                        other liquid to the cooling system   .   Gives freezing protection down
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.                           can be dangerous. Plain water            to −37°C (−34°F), outside
                                        and other liquids, can boil before       temperature.
The following explains the cooling      the proper coolant mixture will.
system and how to check and add
                                                                             .   Gives boiling protection up to
                                        The vehicle's coolant warning            129°C (265°F), engine
coolant when it is low. If there is a   system is set for the proper
problem with engine overheating,                                                 temperature.
                                        coolant mixture. With plain water
see Engine Overheating on               or the wrong mixture, the engine
                                                                             .   Protects against rust and
page 10‑21.                                                                      corrosion.
                                        could get too hot but you would
                                        not get the overheat warning. The    .   Will not damage aluminum parts.
                                        engine could catch fire and you or   .   Helps keep the proper engine
                                        others could be burned. Use a            temperature.
                                        50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
                                        water and DEX-COOL coolant.          Notice: If an improper coolant
                                                                             mixture is used, the engine could
                                                                             overheat and be badly damaged.
                                                                             The repair cost would not be
                                                                             covered by the vehicle warranty.
                                                                             Too much water in the mixture
                                                                             can freeze and crack the engine,
                                                                             radiator, heater core, and other
                                                                             parts.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care           10-19

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or       cool before this is done. See Engine
additives are used in the vehicle's      Coolant on page 10‑18 for more                   { WARNING
cooling system, the vehicle could        information.
be damaged. Use only the proper                                                  Turning the surge tank pressure
mixture of the engine coolant                                                    cap when the engine and radiator
listed in this manual for the                                                    are hot can allow steam and
cooling system. See                                                              scalding liquids to blow out and
Recommended Fluids and                                                           burn you badly. Never turn the
Lubricants on page 11‑6 for                                                      surge tank pressure cap — even a
more information.                                                                little — when the engine and
                                                                                 radiator are hot.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level                                                  When the engine is cold, the coolant
surface when checking the coolant                                               level should be between the
level.                                                                          Maximum (A) and Minimum (B)
Check to see if coolant is visible in                                           marks on the coolant surge tank.
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant   The engine coolant surge tank is       The level rises at engine operation
inside the coolant surge tank is         located in the rear of the engine      temperature and drops again when
boiling, do not do anything else until   compartment on the driver side of      the engine cools down.
it cools down. If coolant is visible     the vehicle. See Engine
                                                                                The coolant should be between the
but the coolant level is not between     Compartment Overview on
                                                                                Maximum (A) and Minimum (B)
the Minimum and Maximum marks,           page 10‑8 for more information on
                                                                                marks, when the engine is cold. If it
add a 50/50 mixture of clean,            location.
                                                                                is not, there could be a leak in the
drinkable water and DEX-COOL                                                    cooling system.
coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system is
10-20       Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to the                                                          If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
Coolant Surge Tank                                { WARNING                        stop. This will allow any
                                                                                   pressure still left to be vented
                                         Steam and scalding liquids from a         out the discharge hose.
          { WARNING                      hot cooling system can blow out
                                         and burn you badly. They are
 You can be burned if you spill
                                         under pressure, and if you turn
 coolant on hot engine parts.
                                         the surge tank pressure
 Coolant contains ethylene glycol
                                         cap — even a little — they can
 and it will burn if the engine parts
                                         come out at high speed. Never
 are hot enough. Do not spill
                                         turn the cap when the cooling
 coolant on a hot engine.
                                         system, including the surge tank
                                         pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
Notice: This vehicle has a               cooling system and surge tank
specific coolant fill procedure.         pressure cap to cool if you ever
Failure to follow this procedure         have to turn the pressure cap.
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely                                                        2. Then keep turning the pressure
damaged.                                If no coolant is visible in the surge
                                        tank, add coolant as follows:              cap slowly and remove it.

          { WARNING                     1. Remove the coolant surge tank
                                           pressure cap when the cooling
 An electric engine cooling fan            system, including the coolant
 under the hood can start up even          surge tank pressure cap and
 when the engine is not running            upper radiator hose, is no longer
 and can cause injury. Keep                hot. Turn the pressure cap
 hands, clothing, and tools away           slowly counterclockwise about
 from any underhood electric fan.          two or two and one-half turns.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care            10-21

                                         4. With the coolant surge tank        Engine Overheating
                                            pressure cap off, start the
                                            engine and let it run until the    The vehicle has an indicator to warn
                                            upper radiator hose can be felt    of the engine overheating.
                                            getting hot. Watch out for the     There is a coolant temperature
                                            engine cooling fan.                gauge on the instrument panel
                                            By this time, the coolant level    cluster. See Engine Coolant
                                            inside the coolant surge tank      Temperature Gauge on page 5‑11.
                                            may be lower. If the level is      If the decision is made not to lift the
                                            lower than the Maximum mark,       hood when this warning appears,
                                            add more of the proper mixture     get service help right away. See
                                            to the coolant surge tank until    Roadside Assistance Program on
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with         the level reaches the mark.        page 13‑6.
   the proper mixture to the
                                         5. Replace the pressure cap. Be       If the decision is made to lift the
   Maximum mark on the coolant
                                            sure the pressure cap is           hood, make sure the vehicle is
   surge tank. Wait about
                                            hand-tight and fully seated.       parked on a level surface.
   5 minutes, then check to see if
   the level is below the mark. If the   Notice: If the pressure cap is not
   level is below the Maximum            tightly installed, coolant loss and
   mark, add additional coolant to       possible engine damage may
   bring the level up to the mark.       occur. Be sure the cap is properly
                                         and tightly secured.
   Repeat this procedure until the
   level remains constant at the
   Maximum mark for at least
   five minutes.
10-22        Vehicle Care

Then check to see if the engine          If Steam is Coming from the           If No Steam is Coming from
cooling fan is running. If the engine    Engine Compartment                    the Engine Compartment
is overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, do not continue                                         If an engine overheat warning is
to run the engine. Have the vehicle
                                                  { WARNING                    displayed but no steam can be seen
serviced.                                                                      or heard, the problem may not be
                                         Steam from an overheated engine       too serious. Sometimes the engine
Notice: Engine damage from               can burn you badly, even if you       can get a little too hot when the
running the engine without               just open the hood. Stay away         vehicle:
coolant is not covered by the            from the engine if you see or hear    .
warranty.                                steam coming from it. Just turn it        Climbs a long hill on a hot day
Notice: If the engine catches fire       off and get everyone away from        .   Stops after high-speed driving
because of being driven with no          the vehicle until it cools down.      .   Idles for long periods in traffic
coolant, your vehicle can be             Wait until there is no sign of
                                         steam or coolant before you open      If the overheat warning is displayed
badly damaged. The costly
                                         the hood.                             with no sign of steam:
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.                                                          1. Turn the air conditioning off,
                                         If you keep driving when your
                                                                                  if equipped.
                                         engine is overheated, the liquids
                                         in it can catch fire. You or others   2. Turn the heater on to the highest
                                         could be badly burned. Stop your         temperature and to the highest
                                         engine if it overheats, and get out      fan speed. Open the windows as
                                         of the vehicle until the engine          necessary.
                                         is cool.                              3. If in a traffic jam, let the engine
                                                                                  idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
                                                                                  If it is safe to do so, pull off the
                                                                                  road, shift to P (Park) or
                                                                                  N (Neutral) and let the
                                                                                  engine idle.
                                                                                         Vehicle Care          10-23

If the temperature overheat gauge         Power Steering Fluid
is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer             When to Check Power Steering
displays, the vehicle can be driven.      Fluid
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
                                          The power steering fluid reservoir is
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
                                          located toward the front of the
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
                                          engine compartment on the driver
front. If the warning does not come
                                          side of the vehicle. See Engine
back on, continue to drive normally.
                                          Compartment Overview on
If the warning continues, pull over,      page 10‑8 for reservoir location.
stop, and park the vehicle
                                          It is not necessary to regularly
right away.
                                          check power steering fluid unless       The level should be above the MIN
If there is no sign of steam, idle the    there is a leak suspected in the        mark on the reservoir. If the level
engine for three minutes while            system or an unusual noise is           drops below the MIN mark, add
parked. If the warning is still           heard. A fluid loss in this system      power steering fluid. Do not overfill
displayed, turn off the engine until it   could indicate a problem. Have the      the reservoir and remember to
cools down.                               system inspected and repaired.          replace the cap tightly when finished
                                          How to Check Power Steering             and clean up any spilled fluid.
                                          Fluid                                   What to Use
                                          Turn the key off and let the engine     To determine what kind of fluid to
                                          compartment cool down.                  use, see Recommended Fluids and
                                                                                  Lubricants on page 11‑6. Always
                                                                                  use the proper fluid. Failure to use
                                                                                  the proper fluid can cause leaks and
                                                                                  damage hoses and seals.
10-24       Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid                           Notice:                                Brakes
                                        .   When using concentrated           This vehicle has front disc brakes
What to Use                                 washer fluid, follow the          and could have rear drum brakes or
When the vehicle needs windshield           manufacturer's instructions       rear disc brakes.
washer fluid, be sure to read the           for adding water.
manufacturer's instructions before                                            Disc brake pads have built-in wear
                                        .   Do not mix water with             indicators that make a high-pitched
use. If operating the vehicle in an
                                            ready-to-use washer fluid.        warning sound when the brake pads
area where the temperature may fall
                                            Water can cause the solution      are worn and new pads are needed.
below freezing, use a fluid that has        to freeze and damage the
sufficient protection against                                                 The sound can come and go or be
                                            washer fluid tank and other       heard all the time the vehicle is
freezing.
                                            parts of the washer system.       moving, except when applying the
Adding Washer Fluid                         Also, water does not clean as     brake pedal firmly.
                                            well as washer fluid.
                                        .   Fill the washer fluid tank only
                                            three-quarters full when it is
                                                                                       { WARNING
                                            very cold. This allows for         The brake wear warning sound
                                            fluid expansion if freezing        means that soon the brakes will
                                            occurs, which could damage         not work well. That could lead to
                                            the tank if it is                  a crash. When the brake wear
Open the cap with the washer                completely full.                   warning sound is heard, have the
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until                                           vehicle serviced.
the tank is full. See Engine
                                        .   Do not use engine coolant
Compartment Overview on                     (antifreeze) in the windshield
page 10‑8 for reservoir location.           washer. It can damage the         Notice: Continuing to drive with
                                            windshield washer system          worn-out brake pads could result
                                            and paint.                        in costly brake repair.
                                                                                    Vehicle Care           10-25

Some driving conditions or climates    Brake linings should always be        Replacing Brake System Parts
can cause a brake squeal when the      replaced as complete axle sets.
                                                                             The braking system on a vehicle is
brakes are first applied or lightly
                                       Brake Pedal Travel                    complex. Its many parts have to be
applied. This does not mean
                                                                             of top quality and work well together
something is wrong with the brakes.    See your dealer if the brake pedal    if the vehicle is to have really good
Properly torqued wheel nuts are        does not return to normal height,     braking. The vehicle was designed
necessary to help prevent brake        or if there is a rapid increase in    and tested with top-quality brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,     pedal travel. This could be a sign    parts. When parts of the braking
inspect brake pads for wear and        that brake service might be           system are replaced, be sure to get
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the       required.                             new, approved replacement parts.
proper sequence to torque              Brake Adjustment                      If this is not done, the brakes might
specifications in Capacities and                                             not work properly. For example,
Specifications on page 12‑2.           Every moderate brake stop, the disc   installing disc brake pads that are
                                       brakes adjust for wear. If rarely     wrong for the vehicle, can change
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,   making moderate or heavier brake
they do not have wear indicators,                                            the balance between the front and
                                       stops, the brakes might not adjust    rear brakes — for the worse. The
but if a rear brake rubbing noise is   correctly. Very carefully making a
heard, have the rear brake linings                                           braking performance expected can
                                       few moderate brake stops about        change in many other ways if the
inspected immediately. Rear brake      every 1 600 km (1,000 miles) will
drums should be removed and                                                  wrong replacement brake parts are
                                       adjust the brakes properly.           installed.
inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing.      If the vehicle has rear drum brakes
Drum brakes have an inspection         and the brake pedal goes down
hole to inspect lining wear during     farther than normal, the rear drum
scheduled maintenance. When the        brakes might need adjustment.
front brake pads are replaced, have    Adjust them by backing up and
the rear brakes inspected, too.        firmly applying the brakes a few
                                       times.
10-26       Vehicle Care
                                       .   A fluid leak in the brake/clutch
Brake Fluid                                hydraulic system can also cause                { WARNING
                                           a low fluid level. Have the brake/
                                           clutch hydraulic system fixed,        If too much brake fluid is added, it
                                           since a leak means that sooner        can spill on the engine and burn,
                                           or later the brakes and/or clutch     if the engine is hot enough. You
                                           will not work well.                   or others could be burned, and
                                       Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.    the vehicle could be damaged.
                                       Adding fluid does not correct a leak.     Add brake fluid only when work is
The brake/clutch master cylinder
                                       If fluid is added when the linings are    done on the brake/clutch
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake
fluid as indicated on the reservoir    worn, there will be too much fluid        hydraulic system.
cap. See Engine Compartment            when new brake linings are
Overview on page 10‑8 for the          installed. Add or remove brake fluid,    When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a
location of the reservoir.             as necessary, only when work is          low level, the brake warning light
                                       done on the brake/clutch hydraulic       comes on. See Brake System
There are only two reasons why the     system.
fluid level in the reservoir might                                              Warning Light on page 5‑16.
go down:                                                                        What to Add
.   The fluid level goes down                                                   Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
    because of normal brake lining                                              from a sealed container. See
    wear. When new linings are                                                  Recommended Fluids and
    installed, the fluid level goes                                             Lubricants on page 11‑6.
    back up.
                                                                                Always clean the brake/clutch fluid
                                                                                reservoir cap and the area around
                                                                                the cap before removing it. This
                                                                                helps keep dirt from entering the
                                                                                reservoir.
                                                                                     Vehicle Care           10-27
                                        .    If brake fluid is spilled on     Vehicle Storage
           { WARNING                        the vehicle's painted
                                            surfaces, the paint finish can
 With the wrong kind of fluid in the        be damaged. Be careful not                  { WARNING
 brake/clutch hydraulic system, the         to spill brake fluid on the        Batteries have acid that can burn
 brakes might not work well. This           vehicle. If you do, wash it off
                                                                               you and gas that can explode.
 could cause a crash. Always use            immediately.
                                                                               You can be badly hurt if you are
 the proper brake/clutch fluid.
                                                                               not careful. See Jump Starting on
                                       Battery                                 page 10‑70 for tips on working
Notice:                                Refer to the replacement number         around a battery without
 .   Using the wrong fluid can         shown on the original battery label     getting hurt.
     badly damage brake/clutch         when a new battery is needed. See
     hydraulic system parts. For       Engine Compartment Overview on
                                       page 10‑8 for battery location.        Infrequent Usage: Remove the
     example, just a few drops of                                             black, negative (−) cable from the
     mineral-based oil, such as                                               battery to keep the battery from
     engine oil, in the brake                      { DANGER                   running down.
     hydraulic system can
     damage brake hydraulic             Battery posts, terminals, and         Extended Storage: Remove the
     system parts so badly that         related accessories contain lead      black, negative (−) cable from the
     they will have to be replaced.     and lead compounds, chemicals         battery or use a battery trickle
     Do not let someone put in          known to the State of California to   charger.
     the wrong kind of fluid.           cause cancer and reproductive
                                        harm. Wash hands after handling.
10-28       Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check                 3. For automatic transmission           Automatic Transmission
                                        vehicles, try to start the engine
                                        in each gear. The vehicle
                                                                             Shift Lock Control
          { WARNING                     should start only in P (Park) or     Function Check
 When you are doing this                N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
 inspection, the vehicle could
                                        in any other position, contact
                                        your dealer for service.
                                                                                       { WARNING
 move suddenly. If the vehicle
                                        For manual transmission               When you are doing this
 moves, you or others could be
                                        vehicles, put the shift lever in      inspection, the vehicle could
 injured.
                                        Neutral, push the clutch pedal        move suddenly. If the vehicle
                                        down halfway, and try to start        moves, you or others could be
1. Before starting this check, be       the engine. The vehicle should        injured.
   sure there is enough room            start only when the clutch pedal
   around the vehicle.                  is pushed down all the way to        1. Before starting this check, be
2. Firmly apply both the parking        the floor. If the vehicle starts        sure there is enough room
   brake and the regular brake.         when the clutch pedal is not            around the vehicle. It should be
   See Parking Brake on                 pushed all the way down,                parked on a level surface.
   page 9‑31.                           contact your dealer for service.
                                                                             2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
   Do not use the accelerator                                                   See Parking Brake on
   pedal, and be ready to turn off                                              page 9‑31.
   the engine immediately if it
   starts.                                                                      Be ready to apply the regular
                                                                                brake immediately if the vehicle
                                                                                begins to move.
                                                                                        Vehicle Care           10-29

3. With the engine off, turn the         On all vehicles, the ignition key      Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
   ignition to ON/RUN, but do not        should come out only in LOCK/OFF.      vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
   start the engine. Without             Contact your dealer if service is      your foot on the regular brake, set
   applying the regular brake, try to    required.                              the parking brake.
   move the shift lever out of                                                  .   To check the parking brake's
   P (Park) with normal effort. If the
   shift lever moves out of P (Park),    Park Brake and P (Park)                    holding ability: With the engine
                                                                                    running and the transmission in
   contact your dealer for service.      Mechanism Check                            N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
                                                                                    pressure from the regular brake
Ignition Transmission                              { WARNING                        pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Lock Check                                                                          held by the parking brake only.
                                          When you are doing this check,
While parked, and with the parking        the vehicle could begin to move.
                                                                                .   To check the P (Park)
brake set, try to turn the ignition to    You or others could be injured            mechanism's holding ability:
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever              and property could be damaged.            With the engine running, shift to
position.                                 Make sure there is room in front          P (Park). Then release the
                                                                                    parking brake followed by the
.   For automatic transmission            of the vehicle in case it begins to
                                                                                    regular brake.
    vehicles, the ignition should turn    roll. Be ready to apply the regular
    to LOCK/OFF only when the             brake at once should the vehicle      Contact your dealer if service is
    shift lever is in P (Park).           begin to move.                        required.
.    For manual transmission
    vehicles, the ignition should turn
    to LOCK/OFF only when the
    shift lever is in neutral.
10-30       Vehicle Care

Wiper Blade Replacement                Here is how to remove and replace      Headlamp Aiming
                                       the windshield wiper blade:
Windshield wiper blades should be                                             Headlamp aim has been preset at
inspected for wear or cracking. See    1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
                                                                              the factory and should need no
“Wiper Blade Check” for more              away from the windshield.
                                                                              further adjustment.
information.
                                                                              However, if the vehicle is damaged
Replacement blades come in                                                    in a crash, the headlamp aim may
different types and are removed in                                            be affected. Aim adjustment to the
different ways. For the proper type,                                          low-beam headlamps may be
see Maintenance Replacement                                                   necessary if oncoming drivers flash
Parts on page 11‑8.                                                           their high-beam headlamps at you
                                                                              (for vertical aim).
                                                                              If the headlamps need to be
                                                                              re-aimed, it is recommended that
                                                                              the vehicle be taken to the dealer
                                                                              for service.

                                       2. Press the retaining clip (A) and
                                          pull the wiper blade off the arm.
                                       3. Install a new blade by reversing
                                          Steps 1 and 2.
                                                                                 Vehicle Care           10-31

Bulb Replacement                       Headlamps
For the proper type of replacement     To replace a headlamp bulb:
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on        1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑35.                               page 10‑6.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

          { WARNING                                                       4. Remove the headlamp cap.
 Halogen bulbs have pressurized                                           5. Release the spring that retains
 gas inside and can burst if you                                             the bulb by loosening the screw.
 drop or scratch the bulb. You or                                         6. Remove the old bulb and install
 others could be injured. Be sure                                            the new bulb.
 to read and follow the instructions
 on the bulb package.                  2. Remove the three bolts to       7. Install the bulb retaining spring
                                          remove the headlamp assembly.      and tighten the screw.
                                       3. Disconnect the wiring harness   8. Reinstall the headlamp cap.
                                          connector from the rear of
                                                                          9. Reconnect the wiring harness at
                                          the bulb.
                                                                             the rear of the bulb.
10-32      Vehicle Care

                                      Front Turn Signal,
                                      Sidemarker, and Parking
                                      Lamps
                                      To replace a front turn signal or
                                      parking lamp bulb:
                                      1. Open the hood. See Hood on
                                         page 10‑6 for more information.



10. Reinstall the headlamp                                                 4. Turn the front turn signal bulb
    assembly using the three bolts.                                           socket counterclockwise.
                                                                           5. Pull the front turn signal bulb
                                                                              socket out of the lamp housing.
                                                                           6. Press the bulb inward and turn it
                                                                              counterclockwise to remove it
                                                                              from the bulb socket.
                                                                           7. Install the new bulb into the
                                      2. Remove the three bolts to            socket by pressing it in and
                                         remove the headlamp assembly.        turning it clockwise.
                                      3. Disconnect the wiring harness
                                         connector from the rear of
                                         the bulb.
                                                                                     Vehicle Care         10-33

8. Install the socket into the lamp     Taillamps, Turn Signal,
   housing by turning it clockwise.
                                        Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
9. Reconnect the wiring harness         and Back-Up Lamps
   connector at the rear of the bulb.
                                        To replace a taillamp, turn signal
                                        lamp, stoplamp, or back-up bulb:
                                        1. Open the liftgate or trunk. See
                                           Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 2‑9
                                           or Trunk on page 2‑7.


                                                                                            Sedan
                                                                              2. Remove the two screws and the
                                                                                 lamp assembly.
                                                                              3. Turn the bulb socket
10. Reinstall the headlamp                                                       counterclockwise and remove
    assembly using the three bolts.                                              the socket.
                                                                              4. Press the bulb in and turn
                                                                                 counterclockwise to remove it
                                                                                 from the socket.
                                                     Hatchback
10-34       Vehicle Care

5. Press the new bulb in and turn                                             Center High-Mounted
   clockwise to install the bulb into
   the socket.
                                                                              Stoplamp (CHMSL)
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
                                                                              (Sedan)
   to reinstall.                                                              To replace a CHMSL bulb on the
                                                                              sedan:
7. Reinstall the lamp assembly and
   two screws.                                                                1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
                                                                                 page 2‑7 for more information.
Center High-Mounted                                                           2. Remove the two screws and the
Stoplamp (CHMSL)                                                                 lamp housing. Disconnect the
(Hatchback)                                                                      wiring harness connector before
                                        2. Pull down on the lamp assembly        removing the lamp housing.
To replace a CHMSL bulb on the             while holding the end of the
hatchback:                                 bracket.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate      3. Remove the lens cover using a
   (Hatchback) on page 2‑9 for             flat head screwdriver.
   more information.                    4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
                                           straight out of the bulb holder.
                                        5. Install the new bulb.
                                        6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
                                           reinstall.


                                                                              3. Remove the five screws and the
                                                                                 reflector assembly.
                                                                                   Vehicle Care          10-35

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it      3. Turn the bulb socket                                        Bulb
   straight out of the bulb holder.      counterclockwise and pull the        Exterior Lamp
                                                                                                    Number
5. Install the new bulb.                 bulb straight out of the socket.
                                                                            Front Sidemarker
                                      4. Install the new bulb.                                     94535578
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to                                             Lamps
   reinstall.                         5. Push the bulb straight into the
                                                                            Headlamps              94535548
                                         socket and turn clockwise to
License Plate Lamp                       reinstall.                         License
                                                                                                   94535587
                                      6. Push and turn the license plate    Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
                                         lamp away from you through the     Rear Sidemarker
                                         opening.                                                  94535577
                                                                            Lamps
                                      7. Reinstall the two screws holding   Rear Turn Signal
                                         the license plate lamp.                                   94535572
                                                                            Lamps
                                                                            Stoplamp/
                                      Replacement Bulbs                     Taillamps
                                                                                                   94535577
                                                                  Bulb
                                         Exterior Lamp
                                                                 Number     For replacement bulbs not listed
                                      Back-Up Lamps              94535571   here, contact your dealer.

                                      Center
                                      High-Mounted
                                                                 94535587
1. Remove the two screws holding      Stoplamp
   each of the license plate lamps.   (CHMSL)
2. Turn and pull the license plate    Front Parking/Turn
                                                                 94535578
   lamp toward you through the        Signal Lamps
   opening.
10-36       Vehicle Care

Electrical System                       If there is a problem on the road and
                                        a fuse needs to be replaced, the
                                                                                 If the overload is caused by an
                                                                                 electrical problem and not snow or
                                        same amperage fuse can be                ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Electrical System                       borrowed. Choose some feature of
Overload                                the vehicle that is not needed to use    Fuses and Circuit
                                        and replace it as soon as possible.
The vehicle has fuses and circuit                                                Breakers
breakers to protect against an          Headlamp Wiring                          The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
electrical system overload.
                                        An electrical overload may cause         protected from short circuits by a
When the current electrical load is     the lamps to go on and off, or in        combination of fuses, circuit
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens    some cases to remain off. Have the       breakers, and fusible thermal links.
and closes, protecting the circuit      headlamp wiring checked right away       This greatly reduces the chance of
until the current load returns to       if the lamps go on and off or            fires caused by electrical problems.
normal or the problem is fixed. This    remain off.                              Look at the silver-colored band
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
                                        Windshield Wipers                        inside the fuse. If the band is broken
overload and fire caused by
                                                                                 or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
electrical problems.                    If the wiper motor overheats due to      you replace a bad fuse with a new
Fuses and circuit breakers protect      heavy snow or ice, the windshield        one of the identical size and rating.
the following in the vehicle:           wipers will stop until the motor cools
                                        and will then restart.                   Fuses of the same amperage can
.   Headlamp Wiring                                                              be temporarily borrowed from
.
                                        Although the circuit is protected        another fuse location, if a fuse goes
    Windshield Wiper Motor              from electrical overload, overload       out. Replace the fuse as soon as
.   Power Windows and Other             due to heavy snow or ice may             you can.
    Power Accessories                   cause wiper linkage damage.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one       Always clear ice and heavy snow
of the identical size and rating.       from the windshield before using the
                                        windshield wipers.
                                                                    Vehicle Care          10-37

Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block
is located on the driver side of the
vehicle, near the battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑8 for more information on
location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
To access the fuses, press in the
side flaps to release the cover. To
reinstall the cover, push the cover
until it is secure.                    Fuses         Usage        Fuses           Usage
                                                Cooling Fan HI    ABS‐2     EBCM
                                       FAN HI
                                                Relay                       Instrument Panel
                                                                 SJB BATT
                                       ABS‐1    EBCM                        Fuse Block
10-38      Vehicle Care

   Fuses           Usage            Fuses          Usage            Fuses            Usage
  ACC/IG1    IGN1 Relay                      Tail Lamp (LH),       F/PUMP      Fuel Pump Relay
                                             Side Marker (LH),
             IGN2 Relay, Starter                                               Hazard Switch,
  IG2/ST                           PKLP LH   Turn Signal &
             Relay                                                 HAZARD      Hood Contact
                                             Parking Lamp (LH),
                                                                               Switch
             Instrument Panel                License Lamp
 ACC/RAP
             Fuse Block                                                        Head Lamp
                                             Tail Lamp (RH),      HDLP HI LH
                                                                               (LH), IPC
    P/       Power Window                    Side Marker (RH),
 WINDOW‐2    Switch                          Turn Signal &        HDLP HI RH Head Lamp (RH)
                                   PKLP RH   Parking Lamp
    P/W      Power Window                                            IPC       IPC
 WINDOW‐1    Switch                          (RH), License
                                             Lamp, I/P Fuse                    Head Lamp (LH),
                                                                  HDLP LO LH
             Cooling Fan LOW                 Block                             I/P Fuse Block
 FAN LOW
             Relay
                                    ECU      ECM, TCM             HDLP LO RH Head Lamp (RH)
             A/C Compressor
  A/CON                                      Front Fog Lamp         EMS‐1      ECM, Injector
             Relay                 FRT FOG
                                             Relay                   DLIS      Ignition Switch
                                                                    Vehicle Care         10-39

  Fuses          Usage            Relays          Usage          Relays          Usage
           EVAP Canister        FRONT FOG                       ENGINE
                                          Fog Lamp                        Main Power
           Purge Solenoid,        RELAY                        MAIN RELAY
  EMS‐2    Thermostat Heater,
                                HDLP HIGH                       ACC/RAP
           HO2S, MAF                        Head Lamp High                I/P Fuse Block
                                  RELAY                          RELAY
           Sensor
                                HDLP LOW                         IGN‐2
 SPARE     Not Used                         Head Lamp Low                 Ignition
                                 RELAY                           RELAY

  Relays         Usage          FAN HIGH
                                            Cooling Fan High      Misc.          Usage
                                 RELAY
 F/PUMP
           Fuel Pump             FAN LOW                         FUSE
 RELAY                                      Cooling Fan Low               Fuse Puller
                                  RELAY                         PULLER
STARTER
           Starter                A/CON
 RELAY                                      Air Conditioner
                                  RELAY
PARK LAMP
          Park Lamp
  RELAY
10-40        Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located on the end of the instrument
panel on the driver side of the
vehicle.




                                            Fuses           Usage            Fuses          Usage
                                                      Audio, Clock,                    PNP Switch,
To access the fuses, open the fuse         AUDIO                           B/UP LAMP   Reverse Lamp
                                                      Immobilizer
panel door by pulling the door out.                                                    Switch
                                                      A/C Switch, Clock,
To reinstall the door, first insert the               Power Mirror Unit,    BLANK      Not Used
rear edge of the fuse panel door,         AUDIO/RKE
                                                      Audio, Anti-Theft     BLANK      Not Used
then push the front of the door into                  Module, TPMS
the end of the instrument panel to
secure it.
                                                                   Vehicle Care         10-41

  Fuses          Usage            Fuses           Usage          Fuses          Usage
  BLANK    Not Used               EMS2     Stoplamp Switch       SOKET    Power Jack
  CIGAR    Cigar Lighter          HORN     Horn                STOP LAMP Brake Switch
           Brake Switch,           OBD     DLC, Immobilizer               Sunroof
                                                               SUNROOF
 CLUSTER   TPMS, Anti‐Theft                                               Module (Option)
                                          Trunk Room Lamp,
           Module
                                 CLUSTER/ Trunk Open             T/SIG    Hazard Switch
 DEFOG     Power Mirror Unit,   ROOM LAMP Switch, IPC,
                                                                          Wiper Switch,
 MIRROR    A/C Switch                     Room Lamp              WIPER
                                                                          Wiper Motor
RR DEFOG   Rear Defog                      Sensing and
                                   SDM
                                           Diagnostic Module
DOOR LOCK Door Lock
 NA DRL    NA DRL Circuit
           Mirror Control
 MIRROR/
           Switch, Room
SUNROOF
           Lamp, A/C Switch
           Engine Room Fuse
  EMS1     Block, TCM, VSS,
           Fuel Pump
10-42        Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires                           WARNING (Continued)                    WARNING (Continued)
Tires                                  .   Under inflated tires pose the      .   Improperly repaired tires can
                                           same danger as overloaded              cause a crash. Only your
Your new vehicle comes with                tires. The resulting crash             dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a               could cause serious injury.            service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. If you          Check all tires frequently to          replace, dismount, and mount
ever have questions about your             maintain the recommended               the tires.
tire warranty and where to                 pressure. Tire pressure            .   Do not spin the tires in
obtain service, see your vehicle           should be checked when your            excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
Warranty booklet for details. For          tires are cold.                        on slippery surfaces such as
additional information refer to        .   Over inflated tires are more           snow, mud, ice, etc.
the tire manufacturer.                     likely to be cut, punctured,           Excessive spinning may
                                           or broken by a sudden                  cause the tires to explode.
           { WARNING                       impact — such as when you
                                           hit a pothole. Keep tires at
  .   Poorly maintained and                the recommended pressure.        Tire Sidewall Labeling
      improperly used tires are        .   Worn or old tires can cause a    Useful information about a tire is
      dangerous.                           crash. If your tread is badly    molded into its sidewall. The
  .   Overloading your tires can           worn, replace them.              examples below show a typical
      cause overheating as a result    .   Replace any tires that have      passenger car tire and a
      of too much flexing. You             been damaged by impacts          compact spare tire sidewall.
      could have a blowout and a           with potholes, curbs, etc.
      serious accident. See Vehicle
      Load Limits on page 9‑12.                               (Continued)
                         (Continued)
                                                                                   Vehicle Care        10-43

                                         (B) DOT (Department of              (E) Uniform Tire Quality
                                         Transportation): The                Grading (UTQG): Tire
                                         Department of Transportation        manufacturers are required to
                                         (DOT) code indicates that the       grade tires based on three
                                         tire is in compliance with          performance factors: treadwear,
                                         the U.S. Department of              traction and temperature
                                         Transportation Motor Vehicle        resistance. For more information
                                         Safety Standards.                   see Uniform Tire Quality
                                         (C) Tire Identification Number      Grading on page 10‑58.
                                         (TIN): The letters and numbers      (F) Maximum Cold Inflation
                                         following DOT code are the Tire     Load Limit: Maximum load that
   Passenger Car Tire Example            Identification Number (TIN). The    can be carried and the
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a        TIN shows the manufacturer and      maximum pressure needed to
combination of letters and               plant code, tire size, and date     support that load. For
numbers used to define a                 the tire was manufactured. The      information on recommended
particular tire's width, height,         TIN is molded onto both sides of    tire pressure see Tire Pressure
aspect ratio, construction type          the tire, although only one side    on page 10‑48 and Vehicle Load
and service description. See the         may have the date of                Limits on page 9‑12.
“Tire Size” illustration later in this   manufacture.
section for more detail.                 (D) Tire Ply Material: The type
                                         of cord and number of plies in
                                         the sidewall and under the tread.
10-44      Vehicle Care

                                     (B) Tire Ply Material: The type     (E) Tire Inflation: The
                                     of cord and number of plies in      temporary use tire or compact
                                     the sidewall and under the tread.   spare tire should be inflated to
                                     (C) Tire Identification Number      60 psi (420 kPa). For more
                                     (TIN): The letters and numbers      information on tire pressure and
                                     following the DOT (Department       inflation see Tire Pressure on
                                     of Transportation) code is the      page 10‑48.
                                     Tire Identification Number (TIN).   (F) Tire Size : A combination of
                                     The TIN shows the                   letters and numbers define a
                                     manufacturer and plant code,        tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
                                     tire size, and date the tire was    construction type and service
  Compact Spare Tire Example         manufactured. The TIN is            description. The letter T as the
(A) Temporary Use Only: The          molded onto both sides of the       first character in the tire size
compact spare tire or temporary      tire, although only one side may    means the tire is for temporary
use tire has a tread life of         have the date of manufacture.       use only.
approximately 3,000 miles            (D) Maximum Cold Inflation
(5 000 km) and should not be         Load Limit: Maximum load that
driven at speeds over 65 mph         can be carried and the
(105 km/h). The compact spare        maximum pressure needed to
tire is for emergency use when a     support that load. See Compact
regular road tire has lost air and   Spare Tire on page 10‑69 and
gone flat. See Compact Spare         Vehicle Load Limits on
Tire on page 10‑69 and If a Tire     page 9‑12.
Goes Flat on page 10‑61.
                                                                                   Vehicle Care        10-45

Tire Designations                    (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit        (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
                                     number indicates the tire section      the wheel in inches.
Tire Size                            width in millimeters from              (F) Service Description: These
The following illustration shows     sidewall to sidewall.                  characters represent the load
an example of a typical              (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit          index and speed rating of the
passenger car tire size.             number that indicates the tire         tire. The load index represents
                                     height‐to‐width measurements.          the load carrying capacity a tire
                                     For example, if the tire size          is certified to carry. The speed
                                     aspect ratio is 70, as shown in        rating is the maximum speed a
                                     item C of the illustration, it would   tire is certified to carry a load.
                                     mean that the tire's sidewall is
                                     70% as high as it is wide.             Tire Terminology and
                                     (D) Construction Code: A               Definitions
                                     letter code is used to indicate        Air Pressure: The amount of
                                     the type of ply construction in        air inside the tire pressing
                                     the tire. The letter R means           outward on each square inch of
                                     radial ply construction; the           the tire. Air pressure is
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:       letter D means diagonal or bias        expressed in psi (pounds per
The United States version of a       ply construction; and the letter B     square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
metric tire sizing system. The       means belted‐bias ply
letter P as the first character in   construction.
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U. S. Tire
and Rim Association.
10-46     Vehicle Care

Accessory Weight: This             Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire     includes the Tire Identification
means the combined weight of       in which the plies are laid at      Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
optional accessories. Some         alternate angles less than          designator which can also
examples of optional               90 degrees to the centerline of     identify the tire manufacturer,
accessories are, automatic         the tread.                          production plant, brand, and
transmission, power steering,      Cold Tire Pressure: The             date of production.
power brakes, power windows,       amount of air pressure in a tire,   GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
power seats, and air               measured in psi (pounds per         Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
conditioning.                      square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)    on page 9‑12.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship     before a tire has built up heat     GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
of a tire's height to its width.   from driving. See Tire Pressure     Rating for the front axle. See
Belt: A rubber coated layer of     on page 10‑48.                      Vehicle Load Limits on
cords that is located between      Curb Weight: The weight of a        page 9‑12.
the plies and the tread. Cords     motor vehicle with standard and     GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
may be made from steel or other    optional equipment including the    Rating for the rear axle. See
reinforcing materials.             maximum capacity of fuel, oil,      Vehicle Load Limits on
Bead: The tire bead contains       and coolant, but without            page 9‑12.
steel wires wrapped by steel       passengers and cargo.
                                                                       Intended Outboard Sidewall :
cords that hold the tire onto      DOT Markings: A code molded         The side of an asymmetrical tire,
the rim.                           into the sidewall of a tire         that must always face outward
                                   signifying that the tire is in      when mounted on a vehicle.
                                   compliance with the U.S.
                                   Department of Transportation        Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
                                   (DOT) motor vehicle safety          unit for air pressure.
                                   standards. The DOT code
                                                                                 Vehicle Care        10-47

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A      Normal Occupant Weight: The          Recommended Inflation
tire used on light duty trucks and   number of occupants a vehicle        Pressure: Vehicle
some multipurpose passenger          is designed to seat multiplied by    manufacturer's recommended
vehicles.                            68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle         tire inflation pressure as shown
Load Index: An assigned              Load Limits on page 9‑12.            on the tire placard. See Tire
number ranging from 1 to 279         Occupant Distribution :              Pressure on page 10‑48 and
that corresponds to the load         Designated seating positions.        Vehicle Load Limits on
carrying capacity of a tire.                                              page 9‑12.
                                     Outward Facing Sidewall: The
Maximum Inflation Pressure:          side of an asymmetrical tire that    Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
The maximum air pressure to          has a particular side that faces     tire in which the ply cords that
which a cold tire can be inflated.   outward when mounted on a            extend to the beads are laid at
The maximum air pressure is          vehicle. The side of the tire that   90 degrees to the centerline of
molded onto the sidewall.            contains a whitewall, bears          the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The             white lettering, or bears            Rim: A metal support for a tire
load rating for a tire at the        manufacturer, brand, and/or          and upon which the tire beads
maximum permissible inflation        model name molding that is           are seated.
pressure for that tire.              higher or deeper than the same       Sidewall: The portion of a tire
                                     moldings on the other sidewall       between the tread and the bead.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle               of the tire.
Weight: The sum of curb                                                   Speed Rating: An
weight, accessory weight,            Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A         alphanumeric code assigned to
vehicle capacity weight, and         tire used on passenger cars and      a tire indicating the maximum
production options weight.           some light duty trucks and           speed at which a tire can
                                     multipurpose vehicles.               operate.
10-48      Vehicle Care

Traction: The friction between      sidewall of the tire. See Uniform   Tire Pressure
the tire and the road surface.      Tire Quality Grading on
The amount of grip provided.        page 10‑58.                         Tires need the correct amount of
                                                                        air pressure to operate
Tread: The portion of a tire that   Vehicle Capacity Weight: The        effectively.
comes into contact with             number of designated seating
the road.                           positions multiplied by             Notice: Do not let anyone tell
                                    68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated      you that under‐inflation or
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow                                            over‐inflation is all right. It is
bands, sometimes called wear        cargo load. See Vehicle Load
                                    Limits on page 9‑12.                not. If your tires do not have
bars, that show across the tread                                        enough air (under‐inflation),
of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/      Vehicle Maximum Load on the         you can get the following:
16 inch) of tread remains. See      Tire: Load on an individual tire
When It Is Time for New Tires       due to curb weight, accessory
                                                                         .   Tire overloading and
on page 10‑55.                      weight, occupant weight, and             over-heating which could
                                    cargo weight.                            lead to a blowout.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards):                 Vehicle Placard: A label
                                                                         .   Premature or
A tire information system that      permanently attached to a                irregular wear.
provides consumers with             vehicle showing the vehicle's        .   Poor handling.
ratings for a tire's traction,      capacity weight and the original     .   Reduced fuel economy.
temperature, and treadwear.         equipment tire size and
Ratings are determined by           recommended inflation pressure.
tire manufacturers using            See “Tire and Loading
government testing procedures.      Information Label” under Vehicle
The ratings are molded into the     Load Limits on page 9‑12.
                                                                            Vehicle Care         10-49

If your tires have too much air    The recommended cold tire          When to Check
(over‐inflation), you can get      inflation pressure, shown on the   Check your tires once a month
the following:                     label, is the minimum amount of    or more. Do not forget to check
 .   Unusual wear.                 air pressure needed to support     the compact spare tire, if the
                                   your vehicle's maximum load        vehicle has one. The compact
 .   Poor handling.                carrying capacity.                 spare should be at 420 kPa
 .   Rough ride.                   For additional information         (60 psi). For additional
 .   Needless damage from          regarding how much weight your     information regarding the
     road hazards.                 vehicle can carry, and an          compact spare tire, see
                                   example of the Tire and Loading    Compact Spare Tire on
A vehicle-specific Tire and        Information label, see Vehicle     page 10‑69.
Loading Information label is       Load Limits on page 9‑12. How
attached to your vehicle. This                                        How to Check
                                   you load your vehicle affects
label shows your vehicle's         vehicle handling and ride          Use a good quality pocket-type
original equipment tires and the   comfort. Never load your vehicle   gauge to check tire pressure.
correct inflation pressures for    with more weight than it was       You cannot tell if your tires are
your tires when they are cold.     designed to carry.                 properly inflated simply by
                                                                      looking at them. Radial tires may
                                                                      look properly inflated even when
                                                                      they are under‐inflated. Check
                                                                      the tire's inflation pressure when
                                                                      the tires are cold. Cold means
                                                                      your vehicle has been sitting for
                                                                      at least three hours or driven no
                                                                      more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
10-50       Vehicle Care

Remove the valve cap from the           Tire Pressure Monitor                     pressure telltale when one or more
tire valve stem. Press the tire                                                   of your tires is significantly
                                        System                                    under‐inflated.
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.             The Tire Pressure Monitor System          Accordingly, when the low tire
If the cold tire inflation pressure     (TPMS) uses radio and sensor              pressure telltale illuminates, you
                                        technology to check tire pressure         should stop and check your tires as
matches the recommended                 levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
pressure on the Tire and                                                          soon as possible, and inflate them
                                        the air pressure in your tires and        to the proper pressure. Driving on a
Loading Information label, no           transmit tire pressure readings to a
further adjustment is necessary.                                                  significantly under‐inflated tire
                                        receiver located in the vehicle.          causes the tire to overheat and can
If the inflation pressure is low,                                                 lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
                                        Each tire, including the spare
add air until you reach the             (if provided), should be checked          also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
recommended amount.                     monthly when cold and inflated to         tread life, and may affect the
If you overfill the tire, release air   the inflation pressure recommended        vehicle's handling and stopping
by pushing on the metal stem in         by the vehicle manufacturer on the        ability.
the center of the tire valve.           vehicle placard or tire inflation         Please note that the TPMS is not a
                                        pressure label. (If your vehicle has      substitute for proper tire
Re‐check the tire pressure with         tires of a different size than the size
the tire gauge.                                                                   maintenance, and it is the driver's
                                        indicated on the vehicle placard or       responsibility to maintain correct tire
Be sure to put the valve caps           tire inflation pressure label, you        pressure, even if under‐inflation has
back on the valve stems. They           should determine the proper tire          not reached the level to trigger
help prevent leaks by keeping           inflation pressure for those tires.)      illumination of the TPMS low tire
out dirt and moisture.                  As an added safety feature, your          pressure telltale.
                                        vehicle has been equipped with a          Your vehicle has also been
                                        tire pressure monitoring system           equipped with a TPMS malfunction
                                        (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire        indicator to indicate when the
                                                                                  system is not operating properly.
                                                                                           Vehicle Care          10-51

The TPMS malfunction indicator is          Federal Communications
combined with the low tire pressure        Commission (FCC) and
telltale. When the system detects a        Industry Canada
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then          See Radio Frequency Statement on
remain continuously illuminated.           page 13‑16 for information
This sequence will continue upon           regarding Part 15 of the Federal         When a low tire pressure condition
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as            Communications Commission (FCC)          is detected, the TPMS illuminates
long as the malfunction exists.            rules and Industry Canada                the low tire pressure warning light
                                           Standards RSS-210/220/310.               on the instrument panel cluster.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be                                                  If the warning light comes on, stop
able to detect or signal low tire
                                           Tire Pressure Monitor                    as soon as possible and inflate the
pressure as intended. TPMS                 Operation                                tires to the recommended pressure
malfunctions may occur for a variety                                                shown on the Tire and Loading
                                           This vehicle may have a Tire             Information label. See Vehicle Load
of reasons, including the installation     Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
of replacement or alternate tires or                                                Limits on page 9‑12.
                                           The TPMS is designed to warn the
wheels on the vehicle that prevent         driver when a low tire pressure          The low tire pressure warning light
the TPMS from functioning properly.        condition exists. If your vehicle has    comes on at each ignition cycle until
Always check the TPMS malfunction          this feature, the TPMS sensors are       the tires are inflated to the correct
telltale after replacing one or more       mounted onto each tire and wheel         inflation pressure.
tires or wheels on your vehicle to         assembly, excluding the spare tire
ensure that the replacement or             and wheel assembly. The TPMS
alternate tires and wheels allow the       sensors monitor the air pressure in
TPMS to continue to function               your vehicle's tires and transmit tire
properly.                                  pressure readings to a receiver
See Tire Pressure Monitor                  located in the vehicle.
Operation on page 10‑51 for
additional information.
10-52       Vehicle Care

The low tire pressure warning light      Your vehicle's TPMS system can       TPMS Malfunction Light
may come on in cool weather when         warn you about a low tire pressure
                                                                              The TPMS will not function properly
the vehicle is first started, and then   condition but it does not replace
                                                                              if one or more of the TPMS sensors
turn off as you start to drive. This     normal tire maintenance. See Tire
                                                                              are missing or inoperable. When the
could be an early indicator that the     Inspection on page 10‑53, Tire
                                                                              system detects a malfunction, the
tire pressures are getting low and       Rotation on page 10‑54, and Tires
                                                                              low tire warning light flashes for
need to be inflated to the proper        on page 10‑42.
                                                                              about one minute and then stays on
pressure.                                Notice: Tire sealant materials are   for the remainder of the ignition
A Tire and Loading Information           not all the same. A non-approved     cycle. The low tire warning light
label, attached to your vehicle,         tire sealant could damage the Tire   comes on at each ignition cycle until
shows the size of your vehicle's         Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)       the problem is corrected. Some of
original equipment tires and the         sensors. TPMS sensor damage          the conditions that can cause the
correct inflation pressure for your      caused by using an incorrect tire    malfunction light to come on are:
vehicle's tires when they are cold.      sealant is not covered by the        .   One of the road tires has been
See Vehicle Load Limits on               vehicle warranty. Always use only
                                                                                  replaced with the spare tire. The
page 9‑12, for an example of the tire    the GM approved tire sealant
                                                                                  spare tire does not have a
information label and its location on    available through your dealer or
                                                                                  TPMS sensor. The TPMS
your vehicle. Also see Tire Pressure     included in the vehicle.
                                                                                  malfunction light should go off
on page 10‑48.
                                                                                  once you re‐install the road tire
                                                                                  containing the TPMS sensor.
                                                                                          Vehicle Care        10-53
.   One or more TPMS sensors are        TPMS Sensor Identification                 Always remove the tires if any of
    missing or damaged. The TPMS        Codes                                      the following statements
    malfunction light should go off
    when the TPMS sensors are           Each TPMS sensor has a unique              are true:
    installed and the sensor            identification code. Any time you          .   You can see the indicators at
    matching process is performed       replace one or more of the TPMS                three or more places around
    successfully. See your dealer for   sensors, or rotate the vehicle's tires,        the tire.
    service.                            the identification codes need to be
                                        matched to the new tire/wheel              .   You can see cord or fabric
.   Replacement tires or wheels do      position. The sensors are matched,             showing through the tire's
    not match your vehicle's original   to the tire/wheel positions, in the
    equipment tires or wheels. Tires                                                   rubber.
                                        following order: driver side front tire,
    and wheels other than those         passenger side front tire, passenger
                                                                                   .   The tread or sidewall is
    recommended for your vehicle        side rear tire, and driver side rear           cracked, cut, or snagged
    could prevent the TPMS from         tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.             deep enough to show cord or
    functioning properly. See Buying    See your dealer for service.                   fabric.
    New Tires on page 10‑56.
                                                                                   .   The tire has a bump, bulge,
.   Operating electronic devices or     Tire Inspection                                or split.
    being near facilities using radio
    wave frequencies similar to the     We recommend that you                      .   The tire has a puncture, cut,
    TPMS could cause the TPMS           regularly inspect your vehicle's               or other damage that cannot
    sensors to malfunction.             tires, including the spare tire,               be repaired well because of
If the TPMS is not functioning it       if the vehicle has one, for signs              the size or location of the
cannot detect or signal a low tire      of wear or damage at least once                damage.
condition. See your dealer for          a month.
service if the TPMS malfunction
light comes on and stays on.
10-54      Vehicle Care

Tire Rotation                                                             all wheel nuts are properly
                                                                          tightened. See “Wheel Nut
Tires should be rotated every                                             Torque” under Capacities and
12 000 km (7,500 miles). See                                              Specifications on page 12‑2.
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.                                                                See your dealer to reset the Tire
                                                                          Pressure Monitor System
The purpose of a regular tire                                             (TPMS) after rotating the tires,
rotation is to achieve a uniform                                          if a tire pressure monitor
wear for all tires on the vehicle.                                        reception error occurs.
This will ensure that your vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.         When rotating your tires, always
                                                                                    { WARNING
Any time you notice unusual          use the correct rotation pattern      Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
wear, rotate your tires as soon      shown here.                           parts to which it is fastened, can
as possible and check wheel                                                make wheel nuts become loose
                                     Do not include the compact            after time. The wheel could come
alignment. Also check for            spare tire in the tire rotation.
damaged tires or wheels. See                                               off and cause an accident. When
When It Is Time for New Tires        After the tires have been             changing a wheel, remove any
                                     rotated, adjust the front and rear    rust or dirt from places where the
on page 10‑55 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑60 for        inflation pressures as shown on                                (Continued)
more information.                    the tire and loading information
                                     label. See Vehicle Load Limits
                                     on page 9‑12 for an example of
                                     the Tire and Loading Information
                                     label and where it is located on
                                     your vehicle. Make certain that
                                                                                      Vehicle Care          10-55


    WARNING (Continued)
                                         When It Is Time for New               Inspection on page 10‑54 and Tire
                                                                               Rotation on page 10‑54 for
                                         Tires                                 additional information.
 wheel attaches to the vehicle. In       Various factors, such as              The rubber in tires ages over time.
 an emergency, use a cloth or a          maintenance, temperatures, driving    This is also true for the spare tire,
 paper towel to do this; but be sure     speeds, vehicle loading, and road     if the vehicle has one, even if it is
 to use a scraper or wire brush          conditions influence when you need    not being used. Multiple conditions
 later, if needed, to get all the rust   new tires.                            affect how fast this aging takes
 or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat                                          place, including temperatures,
 on page 10‑61.                                                                loading conditions, and inflation
                                                                               pressure maintenance. Tires will
Lightly coat the center of the                                                 typically need to be replaced due to
                                                                               wear before they may need to be
wheel hub with wheel bearing
                                                                               replaced due to age. Consult the tire
grease after a wheel change or                                                 manufacturer for more information
tire rotation to prevent corrosion                                             on when tires should be replaced.
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel                                                       Vehicle Storage
mounting surface or on the                                                     Tires age when stored normally
wheel nuts or bolts.                                                           mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
                                                                               a vehicle that will be stored for at
                                         One way to tell when it is time for   least a month in a cool, dry, clean
                                         new tires is to check the treadwear   area away from direct sunlight to
                                         indicators, which appear when the     slow aging. This area should be free
                                         tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or   of grease, gasoline, or other
                                         less of tread remaining. See Tire     substances that can deteriorate
                                                                               rubber.
10-56       Vehicle Care

Parking for an extended period can       GM recommends replacing tires in
cause flat spots on the tires that       sets of four. This is because uniform             { CAUTION
may result in vibrations while           tread depth on all tires will help
driving. When storing a vehicle for      keep the vehicle performing most          Mixing tires could cause you
at least a month, remove the tires or    like it did when the tires were new.      to lose control while driving.
raise the vehicle to reduce the          Replacing less than a full set of tires   If you mix tires of different
weight from the tires.                   can affect the braking and handling       sizes, brands, or types (radial
                                         performance of the vehicle. See Tire      and bias-belted tires), the
Buying New Tires                         Inspection on page 10‑53 and Tire         vehicle may not handle
                                         Rotation on page 10‑54.                   properly, and you could have
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for the vehicle. If you                                             a crash. Using tires of different
need replacement tires, GM strongly                { WARNING                       sizes, brands, or types may
recommends that you get tires that                                                 also cause damage to your
                                          Tires could explode during
are the same size, brand, load                                                     vehicle. Be sure to use the
                                          improper service. You or others
range, speed rating, and                                                           correct size, brand, and type
construction type (radial and             could be injured or killed if you
                                          attempt to mount or dismount a           of tires on all wheels. It is all
bias‐belted tires) as the vehicle's                                                right to drive with your
original tires. This way, the vehicle     tire. Only your dealer or an
                                          authorized tire service center           compact spare temporarily, as
will continue to have tires that are
                                          should mount and dismount the            it was developed for use on
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,           tires.                                   your vehicle. See Compact
during normal use, as the original                                                 Spare Tire on page 10‑69.
tires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 10‑42 for additional
information.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care          10-57

                                       The vehicle's original equipment
          { CAUTION                    tires are listed on the Tire and                   { WARNING
                                       Loading Information label. See
 If you use bias-ply tires on the      Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12,         If you add different sized
 vehicle, the wheel rim flanges        for more information about the Tire       wheels, your vehicle may not
 could develop cracks after            and Loading Information label and         provide an acceptable level of
 many miles of driving. A tire         its location on the vehicle.              performance and safety if tires not
 and/or wheel could fail                                                         recommended for those wheels
 suddenly, causing a crash.            Different Size Tires and                  are selected. You may increase
 Use only radial-ply tires with                                                  the chance that you will crash and
                                       Wheels                                    suffer serious injury. Only use GM
 the wheels on the vehicle.
                                       If you add wheels or tires that are a     specific wheel and tire systems
                                       different size than your original         developed for your vehicle, and
Vehicles that have a tire pressure     equipment wheels and tires, this          have them properly installed by a
monitoring system could give an        could affect the way your vehicle         GM certified technician.
inaccurate low‐pressure warning if     performs, including its braking, ride
tires not recommended for the          and handling characteristics,
vehicle are installed. Tires that do   stability, and resistance to rollover.   See Buying New Tires on
not match the original equipment       Additionally, if your vehicle has        page 10‑56 and Accessories and
tires could give a low‐pressure        electronic systems such as antilock      Modifications on page 10‑4 for
warning that is higher or lower than   brakes, rollover airbags, traction       additional information.
the proper warning level you would     control, and electronic stability
get with original equipment tires.     control, the performance of these
See Tire Pressure Monitor System       systems can be affected.
on page 10‑50.
10-58      Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire Quality                use spare tires, tires with      Treadwear
Grading                             nominal rim diameters of         The treadwear grade is a
                                    10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),   comparative rating based on the
Quality grades can be found         or to some limited-production
where applicable on the tire                                         wear rate of the tire when tested
                                    tires.                           under controlled conditions on a
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For      While the tires available on     specified government test
example:                            General Motors passenger cars    course. For example, a tire
                                    and light trucks may vary with   graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA           respect to these grades, they    a half (1½) times as well on the
Temperature A                       must also conform to federal     government course as a tire
The following information relates   safety requirements and          graded 100. The relative
to the system developed by the      additional General Motors Tire   performance of tires depends
United States National Highway      Performance Criteria (TPC)       upon the actual conditions of
Traffic Safety Administration       standards.                       their use, however, and may
(NHTSA), which grades tires by      All Passenger Car Tires Must     depart significantly from the
treadwear, traction, and            Conform to Federal Safety        norm due to variations in driving
temperature performance. This       Requirements In Addition To      habits, service practices and
applies only to vehicles sold in    These Grades.                    differences in road
the United States. The grades                                        characteristics and climate.
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver, or temporary
                                                                                 Vehicle Care           10-59

Traction – AA, A, B, C              Temperature – A, B, C                overloaded. Excessive speed,
The traction grades, from           The temperature grades are A         underinflation, or excessive
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,    (the highest), B, and C,             loading, either separately or in
and C. Those grades represent       representing the tire's resistance   combination, can cause heat
the tire's ability to stop on wet   to the generation of heat and its    buildup and possible tire failure.
pavement as measured under          ability to dissipate heat when
controlled conditions on            tested under controlled              Wheel Alignment and Tire
specified government test           conditions on a specified indoor     Balance
surfaces of asphalt and             laboratory test wheel. Sustained     The tires and wheels on the vehicle
concrete. A tire marked C may       high temperature can cause the       were aligned and balanced carefully
have poor traction performance.     material of the tire to degenerate   at the factory to give the longest tire
Warning: The traction grade         and reduce tire life, and            life and best overall performance.
assigned to this tire is based on   excessive temperature can lead       Adjustments to wheel alignment and
straight-ahead braking traction     to sudden tire failure. The grade    tire balancing will not be necessary
tests, and does not include         C corresponds to a level of          on a regular basis. However, if there
                                                                         is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
acceleration, cornering,            performance which all                pulls to one side or the other, the
hydroplaning, or peak traction      passenger car tires must meet        alignment should be checked. If the
characteristics.                    under the Federal Motor Safety       vehicle vibrates when driving on a
                                    Standard No. 109. Grades B and       smooth road, the tires and wheels
                                    A represent higher levels of         might need to be rebalanced. See
                                    performance on the laboratory        your dealer for proper diagnosis.
                                    test wheel than the minimum
                                    required by law. Warning: The
                                    temperature grade for this tire is
                                    established for a tire that is
                                    properly inflated and not
10-60       Vehicle Care

Wheel Replacement                     If you need to replace any of the      Notice: The wrong wheel can
                                      wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,       also cause problems with bearing
Replace any wheel that is bent,       or Tire Pressure Monitor System        life, brake cooling, speedometer
cracked, or badly rusted or           (TPMS) sensors, replace them only      or odometer calibration,
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming   with new GM original equipment         headlamp aim, bumper height,
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and    parts. This way, you will be sure to   vehicle ground clearance, and tire
wheel nuts should be replaced.        have the right wheel, wheel bolts,     or tire chain clearance to the
If the wheel leaks air, replace it,   wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for       body and chassis.
except some aluminum wheels,          the vehicle.
which can sometimes be repaired.                                             See If a Tire Goes Flat on
See your dealer if any of these                                              page 10‑61 for more information.
conditions exist.                               { WARNING
Your dealer will know the kind of      Using the wrong replacement
wheel you need.                        wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Each new wheel should have the         nuts on your vehicle can be
same load-carrying capacity,           dangerous. It could affect the
diameter, width, offset, and be        braking and handling of your
mounted the same way as the one it     vehicle, make your tires lose air
replaces.                              and make you lose control. You
                                       could have a collision in which
                                       you or others could be injured.
                                       Always use the correct wheel,
                                       wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
                                       replacement.
                                                                                    Vehicle Care              10-61

Used Replacement Wheels              Tire Chains                            If a Tire Goes Flat
                                     Notice: Use tire chains only           It is unusual for a tire to blowout
         { WARNING                   where legal and only when you          while you are driving, especially if
                                     must. Use only SAE Class“S”            you maintain your vehicle's tires
Putting a used wheel on the
                                     type chains that are the proper        properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
                                     size for your tires. Install them on   much more likely to leak out slowly.
know how it has been used or         the front tires and tighten them as    But if you should ever have a
how far it has been driven.          tightly as possible with the ends      blowout, here are a few tips about
It could fail suddenly and cause a   securely fastened. Drive slowly        what to expect and what to do:
crash. If you have to replace a      and follow the chain
wheel, use a new GM original                                                If a front tire fails, the flat tire
                                     manufacturer's instructions.           creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
equipment wheel.                     If you can hear the chains             toward that side. Take your foot off
                                     contacting your vehicle, stop and      the accelerator pedal and grip the
                                     retighten them. If the contact         steering wheel firmly. Steer to
                                     continues, slow down until it          maintain lane position, and then
                                     stops. Driving too fast or             gently brake to a stop, well off the
                                     spinning the wheels with chains        road, if possible.
                                     on will damage your vehicle.
10-62       Vehicle Care

A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and                { WARNING                               { WARNING
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear    Driving on a flat tire will cause     Lifting a vehicle and getting
blowout remove your foot from the       permanent damage to the tire.         under it to do maintenance or
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle      Re-inflating a tire after it has      repairs is dangerous without the
under control by steering the way       been driven on while severely         appropriate safety equipment and
you want the vehicle to go. It may      under-inflated or flat may cause a    training. If a jack is provided with
be very bumpy and noisy, but you        blowout and a serious crash.          the vehicle, it is designed only for
can still steer. Gently brake to a      Never attempt to re-inflate a tire    changing a flat tire. If it is used for
stop, well off the road, if possible.   that has been driven on while         anything else, you or others could
                                        severely under-inflated or flat.      be badly injured or killed if the
                                        Have your dealer or an authorized     vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
                                        tire service center repair or         is provided with the vehicle, only
                                        replace the flat tire as soon as      use it for changing a flat tire.
                                        possible.
                                                                             If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
                                                                             and wheel damage by driving slowly
                                                                             to a level place, well off the road,
                                                                             if possible. Turn on the hazard
                                                                             warning flashers. See Hazard
                                                                             Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care          10-63


         { WARNING                          WARNING (Continued)
Changing a tire can be                   To be certain the vehicle will not
dangerous. The vehicle can slip          move, put blocks at the front and
off the jack and roll over or fall on    rear of the tire farthest away from
you or other people. You and they        the one being changed. That
could be badly injured or even           would be the tire on the other
killed. Find a level place to            side, at the opposite end of the
change your tire. To help prevent        vehicle.
the vehicle from moving:
 1. Set the parking brake firmly.       When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),   A. Wheel Block
 2. Put an automatic                    use the following example as a
    transmission shift lever in         guide to assist you in the placement    B. Flat Tire
    P (Park), or shift a manual         of wheel blocks (A).                    The following information explains
    transmission to 1 (First) or                                                how to repair or change a tire.
    R (Reverse).
 3. Turn off the engine and do
    not restart while the vehicle
    is raised.
 4. Do not allow passengers to
    remain in the vehicle.
                     (Continued)
10-64      Vehicle Care

Tire Changing                      1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See
                                      Trunk on page 2‑7 or Liftgate
Removing the Spare Tire and           (Hatchback) on page 2‑9.
Tools                              2. Lift the trim cover.
The compact spare tire and tools
you will need are located in the
trunk.




                                                                        5. Turn the retainer
                                                                           counterclockwise and remove it
                                                                           from the compact spare.
                                                                        6. Remove the compact spare tire.
                                                                           See Compact Spare Tire on
                                   3. Remove the foam tray.                page 10‑69 for more information.
                                   4. Remove the jack, the jack
A. Jack                               handle, and the wheel wrench
                                      from the foam tray.
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
D. Screwdriver (if equipped)
                                                                           Vehicle Care   10-65

Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
   proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
   Flat on page 10‑61.
2. If your vehicle has wheel covers,
   turn the four plastic caps
   counterclockwise by hand or by
   using the wheel wrench. The
   plastic nuts do not come off of
   the cover.
3. Remove the wheel cover using         4. Turn the wheel nuts                Hatchback
   the flat end of the jack handle.        counterclockwise to loosen
   Pry along the edge of the wheel         them. Do not remove them yet.
   cover until it comes off.
   Store the wheel cover in the
   cargo area until you have the flat
   tire repaired or replaced.
10-66        Vehicle Care


                                                                                         { WARNING
                                                                                Raising your vehicle with the jack
                                                                                improperly positioned can
                                                                                damage the vehicle and even
                                                                                make the vehicle fall. To help
                                                                                avoid personal injury and vehicle
                                                                                damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
                                                                                head into the proper location
                                                                                before raising the vehicle.

                Sedan                    8. Insert the jack handle into the    9. Turn the wheel wrench
                                            jack and the wheel wrench onto        clockwise to raise the vehicle.
5. Locate the notch in the frame
                                            the end of the jack handle.           Raise the vehicle far enough off
   near each wheel which the jack
   head fits in.                                                                  the ground so there is enough
6. Position the jack and raise the
                                                  { WARNING                       room for the compact spare tire
                                                                                  to fit underneath the wheel well.
   jack head until it fits firmly into    Getting under a vehicle when it is
   the notch in the vehicle's frame                                            10. Turn the wheel nuts
                                          jacked up is dangerous. If the           counterclockwise to
   nearest the flat tire.                 vehicle slips off the jack, you          remove them.
7. Put the compact spare tire             could be badly injured or killed.
   near you.                              Never get under a vehicle when it    11. Remove the flat tire.
                                          is supported only by a jack.
                                                                                    Vehicle Care         10-67


         { WARNING                                                                    { WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the                                            Never use oil or grease on bolts
parts to which it is fastened, can                                            or nuts because the nuts might
make wheel nuts become loose                                                  come loose. The vehicle's wheel
after time. The wheel could come                                              could fall off, causing a crash.
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any                                                 14. Install the wheel nuts with the
rust or dirt from places where the                                               rounded end of the nuts toward
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In                                                the wheel. Tighten each nut by
an emergency, use a cloth or a                                                   hand clockwise until the wheel
paper towel to do this; but be sure     12. Remove any rust or dirt from         is held against the hub.
to use a scraper or wire brush              the wheel bolts, mounting
later, if needed, to get all the rust       surfaces and spare wheel.
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
                                        13. Place the compact spare tire
on page 10‑61.
                                            on the wheel-mounting surface.
10-68      Vehicle Care

15. Lower the vehicle by turning      the proper sequence and to the         Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
    the wheel wrench                  proper torque specification. See       and Tools
    counterclockwise. Lower the       Capacities and Specifications on
    jack completely.                  page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
                                      torque specification.
                                                                                       { WARNING
         { WARNING                                                            Storing a jack, a tire, or other
                                                                              equipment in the passenger
 Wheel nuts that are improperly or                                            compartment of the vehicle could
 incorrectly tightened can cause                                              cause injury. In a sudden stop or
 the wheels to become loose or                                                collision, loose equipment could
 come off. The wheel nuts should                                              strike someone. Store all these in
 be tightened with a torque wrench                                            the proper place.
 to the proper torque specification
 after replacing. Follow the torque
 specification supplied by the                                               To store a flat or compact spare tire
 aftermarket manufacturer when                                               and tools:
 using accessory locking wheel                                               1. Store the flat tire or the compact
 nuts. See Capacities and                                                       spare in the compact spare tire
 Specifications on page 12‑2 for      16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in      compartment.
 original equipment wheel nut             a crisscross sequence, as
                                          shown.                             2. Secure the retainer.
 torque specifications.
                                      Notice: Wheel covers will not fit      3. Store the tools securely in the
                                      on your vehicle's compact spare.          foam tray and place the tray
Notice: Improperly tightened                                                    back in the cargo area.
                                      If you try to put a wheel cover on
wheel nuts can lead to brake
                                      the compact spare, the cover or        4. Replace the trim cover.
pulsation and rotor damage. To
                                      the spare could be damaged.
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
                                                                                          Vehicle Care           10-69

The compact spare tire is for             After installing the compact spare       Do not use your compact spare on
temporary use only. Replace the           on your vehicle, you should stop as      other vehicles.
compact spare tire with a full-size       soon as possible and make sure           Do not mix your compact spare tire
tire as soon as you can. See              your spare tire is correctly inflated.   or wheel with other wheels or tires.
Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑69.         The compact spare is intended to         Keep your spare tire and its wheel
                                          perform well at speeds up to             together.
Compact Spare Tire                        80 km/h (50 mph), so you can finish
                                          your trip and have your full-size tire   Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
                                          repaired or replaced where you           compact spare. Using them can
          { WARNING                       want. Replace your spare with a          damage the vehicle and can
                                          full-size tire as soon as you can.       damage the chains too. Do not
 Driving with more than one
                                                                                   use tire chains on the compact
 compact spare tire at a time could       Notice: When the compact spare           spare.
 result in loss of braking and            is installed, do not take the
 handling. This could lead to a           vehicle through an automatic car
 crash and you or others could be         wash with guide rails. The
 injured. Use only one compact            compact spare can get caught on
 spare tire at a time.                    the rails which can damage the
                                          tire, wheel and other parts of the
                                          vehicle.
The compact spare tire was fully
inflated when the vehicle was new, it
can lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 414 kPa (60 psi).
10-70        Vehicle Care

Jump Starting                          Notice: Ignoring these steps
                                       could result in costly damage to
                                                                                 vehicle, and the bad grounding
                                                                                 could damage the electrical
For more information about the         the vehicle that would not be             systems.
vehicle battery, see Battery on        covered by the warranty.                  To avoid the possibility of the
page 10‑27.
                                       Trying to start the vehicle by            vehicles rolling, set the parking
If the vehicle's battery has run       pushing or pulling it will not            brake firmly on both vehicles
down, you may want to use another      work, and it could damage the             involved in the jump start
vehicle and some jumper cables to      vehicle.                                  procedure. Put an automatic
start your vehicle. Be sure to use                                               transmission in P (Park) or a
                                       1. Check the other vehicle. It must
the following steps to do it safely.                                             manual transmission in
                                          have a 12-volt battery with a
                                          negative ground system.                N (Neutral) before setting the
           { WARNING                   Notice: Only use vehicles with
                                                                                 parking brake.

                                       12-volt systems with negative          Notice: If you leave the radio or
 Batteries can hurt you. They can                                             other accessories on during the
 be dangerous because:                 grounds to jump start your
                                       vehicle. If the other vehicle's        jump starting procedure, they
  .   They contain acid that can       system is not a 12-volt system         could be damaged. The repairs
      burn you.                        with a negative ground, both           would not be covered by the
                                       vehicles can be damaged.               warranty. Always turn off the
  .   They contain gas that can
                                                                              radio and other accessories when
      explode or ignite.               2. Get the vehicles close enough       jump starting the vehicle.
  .   They contain enough                 so the jumper cables can reach,
      electricity to burn you.            but be sure the vehicles are not
                                          touching each other. If they are,
 If you do not follow these steps         it could cause a ground
 exactly, some or all of these            connection you do not want. You
 things can hurt you.                     would not be able to start your
                                                                                         Vehicle Care            10-71

3. Turn off the ignition on both
   vehicles. Unplug unnecessary                   { WARNING                                 { WARNING
   accessories plugged into the
   cigarette lighter or the accessory   Using a match near a battery can           Fans or other moving engine
   power outlet. Turn off the radio     cause battery gas to explode.              parts can injure you badly. Keep
   and all lamps that are not           People have been hurt doing this,          your hands away from moving
   needed. This will avoid sparks       and some have been blinded.                parts once the engine is running.
   and help save both batteries.        Use a flashlight if you need more
   And it could save the radio!         light.                                    5. Check that the jumper cables do
4. Open the hoods and locate the        Be sure the battery has enough               not have loose or missing
   batteries. Find the positive (+)     water. You do not need to add                insulation. If they do, you could
   and negative (−) terminal            water to the battery installed in            get a shock. The vehicles could
   locations on each vehicle. See       your new vehicle. But if a battery           be damaged too.
   Engine Compartment Overview          has filler caps, be sure the right           Before you connect the cables,
   on page 10‑8 for more                amount of fluid is there. If it is low,      here are some things you should
   information on location.             add water to take care of that               know. Positive (+) will go to
                                        first. If you don't, explosive gas           positive (+) or to a remote
          { WARNING                     could be present.                            positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
                                                                                     has one. Negative (−) will go to a
 An electric fan can start up even      Battery fluid contains acid that
                                                                                     heavy, unpainted metal engine
 when the engine is not running         can burn you. Do not get it on               part or to a remote negative (−)
 and can injure you. Keep hands,        you. If you accidentally get it in           terminal if the vehicle has one.
 clothing and tools away from any       your eyes or on your skin, flush
 underhood electric fan.                the place with water and get
                                        medical help immediately.
10-72       Vehicle Care

   Do not connect positive (+) to
   negative (−) or you will get a
   short that would damage the
   battery and maybe other parts
   too. And do not connect the
   negative (−) cable to the
   negative (−) terminal on the dead
   battery because this can cause
   sparks.



                                         7. Do not let the other end touch         8. Now connect the black
                                            metal. Connect it to the                  negative (−) cable to the
                                            positive (+) terminal of the              negative (−) terminal of the good
                                            good battery. Use a remote                battery. Use a remote
                                            positive (+) terminal if the vehicle      negative (−) terminal if the
                                            has one.                                  vehicle has one.
                                                                                      Do not let the other end touch
                                                                                      anything until the next step. The
                                                                                      other end of the negative (−)
                                                                                      cable does not go to the dead
6. Connect the red positive (+)                                                       battery. It goes to a heavy,
   cable to the positive (+) terminal                                                 unpainted metal engine part or
   of the dead battery. Use a                                                         to a remote negative (−) terminal
   remote positive (+) terminal if the                                                on the vehicle with the dead
   vehicle has one.                                                                   battery.
                                                                                  Vehicle Care           10-73

9. Connect the other end of the                                            To disconnect the jumper cables
   negative (−) cable at least 45 cm                                       from both vehicles, do the following:
   (18 in) away from the dead                                              1. Disconnect the black
   battery, but not near engine                                               negative (−) cable from the
   parts that move.                                                           vehicle that had the dead
   The electrical connection is just                                          battery.
   as good there, and the chance                                           2. Disconnect the black
   of sparks getting back to the                                              negative (−) cable from the
   battery is much less.                                                      vehicle with the good battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the                                         3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
    good battery and run the                                                  cable from the vehicle with the
    engine for a while.                                                       good battery.
                                             Jumper Cable Removal
11. Try to start the vehicle that had                                      4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
                                        A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
    the dead battery. If it will not                                          cable from the other vehicle.
                                           Part or Remote Negative (–)
    start after a few tries, it
                                           Terminal
    probably needs service.
                                        B. Good Battery or Remote
Notice: If the jumper cables are
                                           Positive (+) and Remote
connected or removed in the
                                           Negative (−) Terminals
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the                C. Dead Battery or Remote
vehicle. The repairs would not be          Positive (+) Terminal
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
10-74       Vehicle Care

Towing                                   Recreational Vehicle                  Here are some important things to
                                                                               consider before recreational vehicle
                                         Towing                                towing:
Towing the Vehicle                       Recreational vehicle towing means     .   What is the towing capacity of
Notice: To avoid damage, the             towing the vehicle behind another         the towing vehicle? Be sure to
disabled vehicle should be towed         vehicle – such as a motor home.           read the tow vehicle
with all four wheels off the             The two most common types of              manufacturer's
ground. Care must be taken with          recreational vehicle towing are           recommendations.
vehicles that have low ground            known as dinghy towing and dolly
clearance and/or special                 towing. Dinghy towing is towing the   .   What is the distance that will be
equipment.                               vehicle with all four wheels on the       travelled? Some vehicles have
                                         ground. Dolly towing is towing the        restrictions on how far and how
Consult your dealer or a                                                           long they can tow.
                                         vehicle with two wheels on the
professional towing service if the
                                         ground and two wheels up on a         .   Is the proper towing equipment
disabled vehicle needs to be towed.
                                         device known as a dolly.                  going to be used? See your
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13‑6.                                                                      dealer or trailering professional
                                                                                   for additional advice and
If the vehicle has lost battery power,                                             equipment recommendations.
the shift lever needs to be manually
released to neutral for towing. See
                                                                               .   Is the vehicle ready to be
“Shift Lock Manual Release” under                                                  towed? Just as preparing the
Shifting Out of Park on page 9‑23.                                                 vehicle for a long trip, make sure
                                                                                   the vehicle is prepared to be
To tow the vehicle behind another                                                  towed.
vehicle such as behind a
motorhome, for recreational
purposes, see Recreational Vehicle
Towing following.
                                                                                     Vehicle Care           10-75

Dinghy Towing                          Dolly Towing From the Front           3. Put an automatic transmission in
                                                                                P (Park) or a manual
                                                                                transmission in N (Neutral).
                                                                             4. Set the parking brake and
                                                                                remove the key.
                                                                             5. For an automatic transmission,
                                                                                insert the key into the shift lock
                                                                                release slot and shift to
                                                                                N (Neutral). See Shifting Out of
                                                                                Park on page 9‑23.
                                                                             6. Clamp the steering wheel in a
                                                                                straight-ahead position with a
                                                                                clamping device designed for
Notice: If the vehicle is towed        The vehicle can be towed from the        towing.
with all four wheels on the            front using a dolly. To tow the
ground, the drivetrain                                                       7. Release the parking brake.
                                       vehicle using a dolly, follow these
components could be damaged.           steps:
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not        1. Attach the dolly to the tow
tow the vehicle with all four             vehicle following the dolly
wheels on the ground.                     manufacturer's instructions.
The vehicle was not designed to be     2. Drive the front wheels onto the
towed with all four wheels on the         dolly.
ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, a dolly should be used. See
“Dolly Towing” that follows for more
information.
10-76      Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing From the Rear          Appearance Care                           Do not wash the vehicle in direct
                                                                              sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
                                                                              Do not use cleaning agents that are
                                    Exterior Care                             petroleum based or that contain
                                    Silicone grease on weatherstrips will     acid or abrasives, as they can
                                    make them last longer, seal better,       damage the paint, metal, or plastic
                                    and not stick or squeak. Apply            on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
                                    silicone grease with a clean cloth.       products can be obtained from your
                                    During very cold, damp weather            dealer. Follow all manufacturers'
                                    frequent application may be               directions regarding correct product
                                    required.                                 usage, necessary safety
                                                                              precautions and appropriate
                                    Washing the Vehicle                       disposal of any vehicle care
                                    The best way to preserve the              product.
Notice: Towing the vehicle          vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by   Rinse the vehicle well, before
from the rear with the front        washing it often.                         washing and after to remove all
wheels on the ground could                                                    cleaning agents completely. If they
                                    Notice: Certain cleaners contain
cause transmission damage. Do                                                 are allowed to dry on the surface,
                                    chemicals that can damage the
not tow the vehicle from the rear                                             they could stain.
                                    emblems or nameplates on the
with the front wheels on the
                                    vehicle. Check the cleaning               Dry the finish with a soft, clean
ground.
                                    product label. If it states that it       chamois or an all-cotton towel to
                                    should not be used on plastic             avoid surface scratches and water
                                    parts, do not use it on the vehicle       spotting.
                                    or damage may occur and it
                                    would not be covered by the
                                    warranty.
                                                                                      Vehicle Care           10-77

High pressure car washes may           If the vehicle has a basecoat/          Exterior painted surfaces are
cause water to enter the vehicle.      clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat   subject to aging, weather and
Avoid using high pressure washes       gives more depth and gloss to the       chemical fallout that can take their
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the       colored basecoat. Always use            toll over a period of years. To help
surface of the vehicle. Use of power   waxes and polishes that are             keep the paint finish looking new,
washers exceeding 8 274 kPa            non-abrasive and made for a             keep the vehicle garaged or
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or    basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.        covered whenever possible.
removal of paint and decals.           Notice: Machine compounding or          Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/               aggressive polishing on a               Parts
Lenses                                 basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
                                                                               Bright metal parts should be
                                       may damage it. Use only
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a                                             cleaned regularly to keep their
                                       non-abrasive waxes and polishes
soft cloth and a car washing soap to                                           luster. Washing with water is all that
                                       that are made for a basecoat/
clean exterior lamps and lenses.                                               is usually needed. However, chrome
                                       clearcoat paint finish on the
Follow instructions under “Washing                                             polish may be used on chrome or
                                       vehicle.
the Vehicle.”                                                                  stainless steel trim, if necessary.
                                       Foreign materials such as calcium
Finish Care                                                                    Use special care with aluminum
                                       chloride and other salts, ice melting
                                                                               trim. To avoid damaging protective
Occasional waxing or mild polishing    agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
                                                                               trim, never use auto or chrome
of the vehicle by hand may be          bird droppings, chemicals from
                                                                               polish, steam or caustic soap to
necessary to remove residue from       industrial chimneys, etc., can
                                                                               clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
the paint finish. Approved cleaning    damage the vehicle's finish if they
                                                                               rubbed to high polish, is
products can be obtained from your     remain on painted surfaces. Wash
                                                                               recommended for all bright metal
dealer.                                the vehicle as soon as possible.
                                                                               parts.
                                       If necessary, use non-abrasive
                                       cleaners that are marked safe for
                                       painted surfaces to remove foreign
                                       matter.
10-78       Vehicle Care

Windshield and Wiper Blades            Aluminum Wheels                        The surface of these wheels is
                                                                              similar to the painted surface of the
Clean the outside of the windshield    Notice: Using strong soaps,
                                                                              vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
with glass cleaner.                    chemicals, abrasive polishes,
                                                                              chemicals, abrasive polishes,
Clean the rubber blades using a lint   cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
                                                                              abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
free cloth or paper towel soaked       that contain acid on aluminum or
                                                                              acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
with windshield washer fluid or a      chrome-plated wheels, could
                                                                              on them because they could
mild detergent. Wash the windshield    damage the surface of the
                                                                              damage the surface. Do not use
thoroughly when cleaning the           wheel(s). The repairs would not
                                                                              chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a    be covered by the vehicle
                                       warranty. Use only approved            Notice: Driving the vehicle
buildup of vehicle wash/wax
                                       cleaners on aluminum or                through an automatic car wash
treatments may cause wiper
                                       chrome-plated wheels.                  that has silicone carbide tire
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
                                                                              cleaning brushes, could damage
if they are worn or damaged.           Keep the wheels clean using a soft
                                                                              the aluminum or chrome-plated
Wipers can be damaged by:              clean cloth with mild soap and
                                                                              wheels. The repairs would not be
                                       water. Rinse with clean water. After
.   Extreme dusty conditions                                                  covered by the vehicle warranty.
                                       rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
                                                                              Never drive a vehicle that has
.   Sand and salt                      clean towel. A wax may then be
                                                                              aluminum or chrome-plated
                                       applied.
.   Heat and sun                                                              wheels through an automatic car
                                       Notice: Using chrome polish on         wash that uses silicone carbide
.   Snow and ice, without proper       aluminum wheels could damage           tire cleaning brushes.
    removal                            the wheels. The repairs would not
                                       be covered by the vehicle
                                       warranty. Use chrome polish on
                                       chrome wheels only.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care           10-79

Tires                                   Finish Damage                           flushed. Your dealer or an
                                                                                underbody car washing system can
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush   Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
                                                                                do this.
with tire cleaner.                      scratches in the finish should be
Notice: Using petroleum-based           repaired right away. Bare metal will    Underbody Maintenance
tire dressing products on the           corrode quickly and may develop
                                        into major repair expense.              Chemicals used for ice and snow
vehicle may damage the paint                                                    removal and dust control can collect
finish and/or tires. When applying      Minor chips and scratches can be        on the underbody. If these are not
a tire dressing, always wipe off        repaired with touch-up materials        removed, corrosion and rust can
any overspray from all painted          available from your dealer. Larger      develop on the underbody parts
surfaces on the vehicle.                areas of finish damage can be           such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
                                        corrected in your dealer's body and     and exhaust system even though
Sheet Metal Damage                      paint shop.                             they have corrosion protection.
If the vehicle is damaged and           Chemicals used for ice and snow         At least every spring, flush these
requires sheet metal repair or          removal and dust control can collect    materials from the underbody with
replacement, make sure the body         on the underbody. If these are not      plain water. Clean any areas where
repair shop applies anti-corrosion      removed, corrosion and rust can         mud and debris can collect. Dirt
material to parts repaired or           develop on the underbody parts          packed in close areas of the frame
replaced to restore corrosion           such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,   should be loosened before being
protection.                             and exhaust system even though          flushed. Your dealer or an
Original manufacturer replacement       they have corrosion protection.         underbody car washing system can
parts will provide the corrosion        At least every spring, flush these      do this.
protection while maintaining the        materials from the underbody with
vehicle warranty.                       plain water. Clean any areas where
                                        mud and debris can collect. Dirt
                                        packed in close areas of the frame
                                        should be loosened before being
10-80        Vehicle Care

Chemical Paint Spotting                   Lighter colored interiors may           cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
                                          require more frequent cleaning.         use only a soft cloth and glass
Some weather and atmospheric
                                          Newspapers and garments that can        cleaner.
conditions can create a chemical
                                          transfer color to home furnishings      Cleaners can contain solvents that
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
                                          can also transfer color to the          can become concentrated in the
upon and attack painted surfaces on
                                          vehicle's interior.                     vehicle's interior. Before using
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped           Remove dust from small buttons          cleaners, read and adhere to all
discolorations, and small, irregular      and knobs with a small brush with       safety instructions on the label.
dark spots etched into the paint          soft bristles.                          While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
surface.                                  Your dealer has products for            maintain adequate ventilation by
                                          cleaning the vehicle's interior. When   opening the vehicle's doors and
Although no defect in the paint job
                                          cleaning the vehicle's interior, only   windows.
causes this, we will repair, at no
charge to the owner, the surfaces of      use cleaners specifically designed      Do not clean the interior using the
new vehicles damaged by this              for the surfaces that are being         following cleaners or techniques:
fallout condition within 12 months or     cleaned. Permanent damage can           .   Never use a knife or any other
20 000 km (12,000 miles) of               result from using cleaners on               sharp object to remove a soil
purchase, whichever occurs first.         surfaces for which they were not            from any interior surface.
                                          intended. Apply the cleaner directly
Interior Care                             to the cleaning cloth to prevent        .   Never use a stiff brush. It can
                                          over-spray. Remove any accidental           cause damage to the vehicle's
The vehicle's interior will continue to   over-spray from other surfaces              interior surfaces.
look its best if it is cleaned often.     immediately.                            .   Never apply heavy pressure or
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the
                                          Notice: Using abrasive cleaners             rub aggressively with a cleaning
upholstery and cause damage to
                                          when cleaning glass surfaces on             cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
                                          the vehicle, could scratch the              damage the interior and does
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
                                          glass and/or cause damage to the            not improve the effectiveness of
removed quickly as extreme heat
                                          rear window defogger. When                  soil removal.
could cause them to set rapidly.
                                                                                          Vehicle Care           10-81
.   Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.      transfer color to home furnishings      Cleaners can contain solvents that
    Avoid laundry detergents or           can also transfer color to the          can become concentrated in the
    dishwashing soaps with                vehicle's interior.                     vehicle's interior. Before using
    degreasers. Using too much                                                    cleaners, read and adhere to all
    soap will leave a residue that        Remove dust from small buttons
                                          and knobs with a small brush with       safety instructions on the label.
    leaves streaks and attracts dirt.                                             While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
    For liquid cleaners, about            soft bristles.
                                                                                  maintain adequate ventilation by
    20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of        Your dealer has products for            opening the vehicle's doors and
    water is a good guide.                cleaning the vehicle's interior. When   windows.
.   Do not heavily saturate the           cleaning the vehicle's interior, only
                                          use cleaners specifically designed      Do not clean the interior using the
    upholstery while cleaning.                                                    following cleaners or techniques:
                                          for the surfaces that are being
.   Damage to the vehicle's interior      cleaned. Permanent damage can           .   Never use a knife or any other
    may result from the use of many       result from using cleaners on               sharp object to remove a soil
    organic solvents such as naptha,      surfaces for which they were not            from any interior surface.
    alcohol, etc.                         intended. Apply the cleaner directly    .   Never use a stiff brush. It can
The vehicle's interior will continue to   to the cleaning cloth to prevent            cause damage to the vehicle's
look its best if it is cleaned often.     over-spray. Remove any accidental           interior surfaces.
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the       over-spray from other surfaces
upholstery and cause damage to            immediately.                            .   Never apply heavy pressure or
the carpet, fabric, leather, and                                                      rub aggressively with a cleaning
                                          Notice: Using abrasive cleaners             cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
plastic surfaces. Stains should be        when cleaning glass surfaces on
removed quickly as extreme heat                                                       damage the interior and does
                                          the vehicle, could scratch the              not improve the effectiveness of
could cause them to set rapidly.          glass and/or cause damage to the            soil removal.
Lighter colored interiors may require     rear window defogger. When
more frequent cleaning.                   cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
Newspapers and garments that can          use only a soft cloth and glass
                                          cleaner.
10-82       Vehicle Care
.   Use only mild, neutral‐pH soaps.    cleaning, gently remove as much of      5. If the soil is not completely
    Avoid laundry detergents or         the soil as possible using one of the      removed, use a mild soap
    dishwashing soaps with              following techniques:                      solution and repeat the cleaning
    degreasers. Using too much                                                     process that was used with plain
    soap will leave a residue that
                                        .   For liquids: gently blot the
                                            remaining soil with a paper            water.
    leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
    For liquid cleaners, about              towel. Allow the soil to absorb     If any of the soil remains, a
    20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of          into the paper towel until no       commercial fabric cleaner or spot
    water is a good guide.                  more can be removed.                lifter may be necessary. Test a small
                                        .   For solid dry soils: remove as      hidden area for colorfastness before
.   Do not heavily saturate the                                                 using a commercial upholstery
    upholstery while cleaning.              much as possible and then
                                            vacuum.                             cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
.   Do not use organic solvents                                                 cleaned area gives any impression
    such as naptha, alcohol, etc.       To clean:                               that a ring formation may result,
    Damage to the vehicle's interior    1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white    clean the entire surface.
    may result.                            cloth with water or club soda.       A paper towel can be used to blot
Fabric/Carpet                           2. Remove excess moisture.              excess moisture from the fabric or
                                                                                carpet after the cleaning process.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft        3. Start on the outside edge of the
brush attachment to remove dust            soil and gently rub toward the       Leather/Leatherette
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum          center. Continue cleaning, using     Leather, and lighter colored leather
with a beater bar in the nozzle may        a clean area of the cloth each       in particular, will need more frequent
only be used on floor carpet and           time it becomes soiled.              cleaning to prevent the buildup of
carpeted floor mats. For soils,         4. Continue to gently rub the           dust, dirt, and colors transferred
always try to remove them first with       soiled area.                         from other items so that these do
plain water or club soda. Before                                                not become permanent stains.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care           10-83

To remove dust, a soft cloth             Instrument Panel, Vinyl and            Some commercial products may
dampened with water can be used.         other Plastic Surfaces                 increase gloss on the instrument
If a more thorough cleaning is                                                  panel. The increase in gloss may
necessary, a soft cloth dampened         To remove dust, a soft cloth           cause annoying reflections in the
with a mild soap solution can be         dampened with water can be used.       windshield and even make it difficult
used. Your dealer has a GM               If a more thorough cleaning is         to see through the windshield under
approved leather cleaner available       necessary, a clean soft cloth          certain conditions.
that provides superior cleaning          dampened with a mild soap solution
performance when used regularly          can be used to gently remove dust      Care of Safety Belts
on finished automotive leathers.         and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
                                                                                Keep belts clean and dry.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do   removers on plastic surfaces. Many
                                         commercial cleaners and coatings
not use heat, steam, spot lifters or
spot removers, or shoe polish on         that are sold to preserve and                    { WARNING
leather. Many commercial leather         protect soft plastic surfaces may
                                         permanently change the                  Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
cleaners and coatings that are sold                                              It may severely weaken them. In
to preserve and protect leather may      appearance and feel of the interior
                                         and are not recommended. Do not         a crash, they might not be able to
permanently change the                                                           provide adequate protection.
appearance and feel of the leather       use silicone or wax-based products,
                                         or those containing organic solvents    Clean safety belts only with mild
and are not recommended. Do not                                                  soap and lukewarm water.
use silicone or wax-based products,      to clean the vehicle's interior
or those containing organic solvents     because they can alter the
to clean the vehicle's interior          appearance by increasing the gloss
because they can alter the               in a non-uniform manner.
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner
10-84      Vehicle Care

Floor Mats                            Use the following guidelines for        Removing and Replacing the
                                      proper floor mat usage.                 Floor Mat
         { WARNING                    .   The original equipment floor
                                          mats were designed for your
If a floor mat is the wrong size or       vehicle. If the floor mats need
is not properly installed, it can         replacing, it is recommended
interfere with the accelerator            that GM certified floor mats be
pedal and/or brake pedal.                 purchased. Non-GM floor mats
Interference with the pedals can          may not fit properly and may
cause unintended acceleration             interfere with the accelerator or
and/or increased stopping                 brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a crash          the floor mats do not interfere
and injury. Make sure the floor           with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the       .   Use the floor mat with the
accelerator or brake pedal.               correct side up. Do not turn
                                          it over.                            The driver side floor mat is held in
                                                                              place by one hook-type retainer.
                                      .   Do not place anything on top of
                                          the driver side floor mat.          1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
                                                                                 remove it from the hooks.
                                      .   Use only a single floor mat on
                                          the driver side.                    2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining
                                                                                 up the openings on the floor mat
                                      .   Do not place one floor mat on          over the hooks and push it down
                                          top of another.                        into position.
                                                                              3. Make sure the floor mat is
                                                                                 properly secured and verify that
                                                                                 it does not interfere with the
                                                                                 accelerator or brake pedals.
                                                                                           Service and Maintenance               11-1

Service and                                                  General Information                  Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
                                                                                                  the vehicle in good condition, see
Maintenance                                                  Notice: Maintenance intervals,
                                                             checks, inspections,
                                                                                                  your dealer.
                                                                                                  The maintenance schedule is for
                                                             recommended fluids, and
                                                                                                  vehicles that:
General Information                                          lubricants are necessary to keep
 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1                this vehicle in good working         .   Carry passengers and cargo
                                                             condition. Damage caused by              within recommended limits on
Scheduled Maintenance                                        failure to follow scheduled              the Tire and Loading Information
 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2                        maintenance might not be                 label. See Vehicle Load Limits
                                                             covered by the vehicle warranty.         on page 9‑12.
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts                                        As the vehicle owner, you are        .   Are driven on reasonable road
 Recommended Fluids and                                      responsible for the scheduled            surfaces within legal driving
  Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6        maintenance in this section. We          limits.
 Maintenance Replacement                                     recommend having your dealer         .   Use the recommended fuel. See
  Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8   perform these services. Proper           Recommended Fuel on
                                                             vehicle maintenance helps to keep        page 9‑35.
Maintenance Records                                          the vehicle in good working
 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9                    condition, improves fuel economy,
                                                             and reduces vehicle emissions for
                                                             better air quality.
                                                             Because of all the different ways
                                                             people use vehicles, maintenance
                                                             needs vary. The vehicle might need
                                                             more frequent checks and services.
                                                             Please read the information under
11-2      Service and Maintenance

                                       The proper replacement parts,         Scheduled
          { WARNING                    fluids, and lubricants to use are
 Performing maintenance work can
                                       listed in Recommended Fluids and      Maintenance
                                       Lubricants on page 11‑6 and
 be dangerous. Some jobs can           Maintenance Replacement Parts on      When the Change Engine Oil
 cause serious injury. Perform         page 11‑8. We recommend the use       Light Displays
 maintenance work only if you          of genuine parts from your dealer.    Change engine oil and filter. See
 have the required know-how and                                              Engine Oil on page 10‑9. An
 the proper tools and equipment.       Rotation of New Tires
                                                                             Emission Control Service.
 If in doubt, see your dealer to       To maintain ride, handling, and
 have a qualified technician do the    performance of the vehicle, it is     When the change engine oil light
 work. See Doing Your Own              important that the first rotation     displays, service is required for the
 Service Work on page 10‑5.            service for new tires be performed.   vehicle as soon as possible, within
                                       Tires should be rotated every         the next 1 000 km/600 miles.
                                       12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire       If driving under the best conditions,
At your dealer, you can be certain     Rotation on page 10‑54.               the engine oil life system might not
that you will receive the highest                                            indicate the need for vehicle service
level of service available. Your                                             for more than a year. The engine oil
dealer has specially trained service                                         and filter must be changed at least
technicians, uses genuine                                                    once a year and the oil life system
replacement parts, as well as,                                               must be reset. Your dealer has
up‐to‐date tools and equipment to                                            trained service technicians who will
ensure fast and accurate                                                     perform this work and reset the
diagnostics.                                                                 system. If the engine oil life system
                                                                             is reset accidentally, service the
                                                                             vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles
                                                                             since the last service. Reset the oil
                                                                        Service and Maintenance               11-3

life system whenever the oil is
                                       .   Windshield wiper blade            .   Brake system inspection
changed. See Engine Oil Life               inspection for wear, cracking,        (or every 12 months, whichever
System on page 10‑12.                      or contamination and windshield       occurs first).
                                           and wiper blade cleaning,         .   Steering and suspension
Every Engine Oil Change                    if contaminated. See Exterior         inspection. Visual inspection for
.   Change engine oil and filter.          Care on page 10‑76. Worn or           damaged, loose, or missing
    Reset oil life system. See             damaged wiper blade                   parts or signs of wear.
    Engine Oil on page 10‑9 and            replacement. See Wiper Blade
                                           Replacement on page 10‑30.        .   Body hinges and latches, key
    Engine Oil Life System on
                                                                                 lock cylinders, and trunk lid
    page 10‑12. An Emission            .   Tire inflation pressures check.       hinges and latches lubrication.
    Control Service.                       See Tire Pressure on                  See Recommended Fluids and
.   Engine coolant level check. See        page 10‑48.                           Lubricants on page 11‑6. More
    Engine Coolant on page 10‑18.      .   Tire wear inspection. See Tire        frequent lubrication may be
.   Engine cooling system                  Inspection on page 10‑53.             required when the vehicle is
    inspection. Visual inspection of   .   Rotate tires if necessary. See        exposed to a corrosive
    hoses, pipes, fittings, and            Tire Rotation on page 10‑54.          environment. Applying silicone
    clamps and replacement,                                                      grease on weatherstrips with a
                                       .   Fluids visual leak check (or          clean cloth makes them last
    if needed.
                                           every 12 months, whichever            longer, seal better, and not stick
.   Windshield washer fluid level          occurs first). A leak in any          or squeak.
    check. See Washer Fluid on             system must be repaired and the
    page 10‑24.                            fluid level checked.
                                                                             .   Restraint system component
                                                                                 check. See Safety System
                                       .   Engine air cleaner filter             Check on page 3‑23.
                                           inspection. See Engine Air
                                           Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.
                                                                             .   Fuel system inspection for
                                                                                 damage or leaks.
11-4       Service and Maintenance
.   Exhaust system and nearby heat       Additional Required Services          Once a Year
    shields inspection for loose or
    damaged components.                  Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
                                                                               .   See Starter Switch Check on
                                                                                   page 10‑28.
.   PCV system inspection. An            .   Rotate tires. Tires should be
    Emission Control Service. The            rotated every 12 000 km/
                                                                               .   See Automatic Transmission
    U.S. Environmental Protection            7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation        Shift Lock Control Function
    Agency or the California Air             on page 10‑54.                        Check on page 10‑28.
    Resources Board has                                                        .   See Ignition Transmission Lock
                                         At Each Fuel Stop
    determined that the failure to                                                 Check on page 10‑29.
    perform this maintenance item        .   Engine oil level check. See
                                             Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
                                                                               .   See Park Brake and P (Park)
    will not nullify the emission
                                                                                   Mechanism Check on
    warranty or limit recall liability   .   Engine coolant level check. See       page 10‑29.
    prior to the completion of the           Engine Coolant on page 10‑18.
    vehicle's useful life. We,                                                 .   Accelerator pedal check for
    however, urge that all
                                         .   Windshield washer fluid level         damage, high effort, or binding.
    recommended maintenance                  check. See Washer Fluid on            Replace if needed.
    services be performed at the             page 10‑24.                       .   Underbody flushing service.
    indicated intervals and the          Once a Month
    maintenance be recorded.                                                   First Engine Oil Change After
                                         .   Tire inflation pressures check.   Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.   Automatic transmission fluid             See Tire Pressure on
    level check and adding fluid, if         page 10‑48.
                                                                               .   Engine air cleaner filter
    needed. See Automatic                                                          replacement. See Engine Air
    Transmission Fluid on
                                         .   Tire wear inspection. See Tire        Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.
    page 10‑13.                              Inspection on page 10‑53.         .   Spark plug replacement and
                                         .   Sunroof track and seal                spark plug wires inspection. Not
                                             inspection, if equipped. See          to exceed 60 000 km/
                                             Sunroof on page 2‑16.                 37,500 miles. An Emission
                                                                                   Control Service.
                                                                           Service and Maintenance               11-5
.   Engine accessory drive belt              or delivery service. See             First Engine Oil Change After
    inspection for fraying, excessive        Automatic Transmission Fluid on      Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
    cracks, or obvious damage and            page 10‑13.
    replacement, if needed.
                                                                                  .   Timing belt replacement.
                                         .   Power steering pump accessory        .   Valve clearance adjustment.
.   Passenger compartment air                drive belt replacement.
    filter replacement (or every                                                  First Engine Oil Change After
    24 months, whichever occurs
                                         .   Evaporative control system
                                                                                  Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
    first). More frequent replacement        inspection. Check all fuel and
    may be needed if you drive in            vapor lines and hoses for proper     .   Engine cooling system drain,
    areas with heavy traffic, areas          hook‐up, routing, and condition.         flush, and refill (or every
    with poor air quality, or areas          EVAP vent solenoid valve                 five years, whichever occurs
    with high dust levels.                   replacement. An Emission                 first). See Engine Coolant on
    Replacement may also be                  Control Service. The U.S.                page 10‑18. An Emission
    needed if you notice reduced air         Environmental Protection                 Control Service.
    flow, windows fogging up,                Agency or the California Air
    or odors. Your dealer can help           Resources Board has
    you determine when it is the             determined that the failure to
    right time to replace the filter.        perform this maintenance item
                                             will not nullify the emission
First Engine Oil Change After                warranty or limit recall liability
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles                 prior to the completion of the
.   Automatic transmission fluid and         vehicle's useful life. We,
    filter change (severe service            however, urge that all
    only) for vehicles mainly driven         recommended maintenance
    in heavy city traffic in hot             services be performed at the
    weather, in hilly or mountainous         indicated intervals and the
    terrain, when frequently towing a        maintenance be recorded.
    trailer, or used for taxi, police,
11-6       Service and Maintenance

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
                Usage                                                 Fluid/Lubricant
                                        The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oils
                                        meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certification
              Engine Oil                mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™
                                        certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
                                        page 10‑9.
                                        50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
            Engine Coolant
                                        See Engine Coolant on page 10‑18
                                        DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in
        Hydraulic Brake System
                                        Canada 89021320).
       Windshield Washer Solvent        Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
        Power Steering System           DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
                                        Use only T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88900925, in
        Automatic Transmission
                                        Canada 22689186).
         Manual Transmission            Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 89021806, in Canada 89021807).
                                        Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
          Key Lock Cylinders
                                        Canada 10953474).
                                                                  Service and Maintenance              11-7

             Usage                                              Fluid/Lubricant
                                    Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Manual Transmission Shift Linkage
                                    lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
                                    Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
       Chassis Lubrication
                                    lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
                                    Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
                                    or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
          Release Pawl
                                    Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
     Hood and Door Hinges
                                    Canada 10953474).
                                    Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
    Weatherstrip Conditioning
                                    Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
11-8      Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
                                        Maintenance Replacement Parts
                              Part                                GM Part Number          ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter                                             96536696                   A3081C
Engine Oil Filter                                                     93185674                      —
Passenger Compartment Air Filter                                      96962173                      —
Spark Plugs                                                           96476119                      —
Wiper Blades – Hatchback
   Driver Side – 55.9 cm (22.0 in)                                    96476652                      —
   Passenger Side – 45.7 cm (18.0 in)                                 96476656                      —
   Rear – 38.1 cm (15.0 in)                                           96301840                      —
Wiper Blades – Sedan
   Driver Side – 55.9 cm (22.0 in)                                    96476652                      —
   Passenger Side – 45.7 cm (18.0 in)                                 96476656                      —
                                                                      Service and Maintenance                11-9

Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
                                             Maintenance Record
                     Odometer
     Date                                   Serviced By                        Services Performed
                     Reading
11-10     Service and Maintenance

                             Maintenance Record (cont'd)
                Odometer
   Date                         Serviced By                Services Performed
                Reading
                                         Service and Maintenance     11-11

                  Maintenance Record (cont'd)
       Odometer
Date                 Serviced By                Services Performed
       Reading
11-12     Service and Maintenance

                             Maintenance Record (cont'd)
                Odometer
   Date                         Serviced By                Services Performed
                Reading
                                                                                                             Technical Data            12-1

Technical Data                                               Vehicle Identification                    under Capacities and Specifications
                                                                                                       on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
                                                                                                       engine code.
                                                             Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification                                       Number (VIN)
 Vehicle Identification                                                                                Service Parts
  Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1                                                        Identification Label
 Service Parts Identification
                                                                                                       This label, on the inside of the glove
  Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
                                                                                                       box, has the following information:
Vehicle Data                                                                                           .   Vehicle Identification
 Capacities and                                                                                            Number (VIN)
  Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
 Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3
                                                                                                       .   Model designation
                                                             This legal identifier is in the front
                                                             corner of the instrument panel, on        .   Paint information
                                                             the left side of the vehicle. It can be   .   Production options and special
                                                             seen through the windshield from              equipment
                                                             outside. The VIN also appears on
                                                             the Vehicle Certification and Service     Do not remove this label from the
                                                             Parts labels and certificates of title    vehicle.
                                                             and registration.
                                                             Engine Identification
                                                             The eighth character in the VIN is
                                                             the engine code. This code
                                                             identifies the vehicle's engine,
                                                             specifications, and replacement
                                                             parts. See “Engine Specifications”
12-2      Technical Data

Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more information.
                                                                                   Capacities
                          Application
                                                                        Metric                    English
                                                                For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a                             amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
                                                                  hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System                                                           6.3 L                     6.7 qt
Engine Oil with Filter                                                   4.5 L                     4.8 qt
Fuel Tank                                                               45.0 L                    11.9 gal
Transmission, Automatic                                                 5.87 L                     6.2 qt
Transmission, Manual                                                     1.8 L                     1.9 qt
Wheel Nut Torque                                                        140 Y                     100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
                                                                     Technical Data         12-3

                                   Engine Specifications
          Engine            VIN Code             Transmission             Spark Plug Gap
1.6L L4                        6              Automatic and Manual   1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in)


Engine Drive Belt Routing
12-4   Technical Data

                        2 NOTES
                                                                                                                     Customer Information              13-1

Customer                                                   Reporting Safety Defects
                                                            Reporting Safety Defects to
                                                                                                                       Customer Information
Information                                                  the United States
                                                             Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13            Customer Satisfaction
                                                            Reporting Safety Defects to                                Procedure
Customer Information                                         the Canadian                                              Your satisfaction and goodwill are
 Customer Satisfaction                                       Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14            important to your dealer and to
  Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1        Reporting Safety Defects to                                Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
 Customer Assistance                                         General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
                                                                                                                       with the sales transaction or the
  Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3   Vehicle Data Recording and                                  operation of the vehicle will be
 Customer Assistance for Text                                                                                          resolved by the dealer's sales or
  Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
                                                           Privacy
                                                            Vehicle Data Recording and                                 service departments. Sometimes,
 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4                                                                              however, despite the best intentions
 GM Mobility Reimbursement                                   Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
                                                            Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15                     of all concerned, misunderstandings
  Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5                                                                 can occur. If your concern has not
 Roadside Assistance                                        OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
                                                            Radio Frequency                                            been resolved to your satisfaction,
  Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6                                                                 the following steps should be taken:
 Scheduling Service                                          Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
  Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8             Radio Frequency                                            STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
 Courtesy Transportation                                     Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16         with a member of dealership
  Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8                                                                 management. Normally, concerns
 Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10                                                                                   can be quickly resolved at that level.
 Service Publications                                                                                                  If the matter has already been
  Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12                                                                               reviewed with the sales, service,
                                                                                                                       or parts manager, contact the owner
                                                                                                                       of the dealership or the general
                                                                                                                       manager.
13-2       Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a             When contacting Chevrolet,               40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management,            remember that your concern will          decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be           likely be resolved at a dealer's         may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by the dealership without          facility. That is why we suggest         other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the         following Step One first.                to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance               STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:                You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In                Both General Motors and your             Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of              dealer are committed to making           telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Communication               sure you are completely satisfied        the following address:
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),         with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).                                                          BBB Auto Line Program
                                            if you continue to remain unsatisfied    Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the                after following the procedure            Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your      outlined in Steps One and Two, you       4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the          can file with the Better Business        Suite 800
following information available to          Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program          Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance                to enforce your rights.
representative:                                                                      Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
                                            The BBB Auto Line Program is an          www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
.   Vehicle Identification Number           out of court program administered
    (VIN). This is available from the       by the Council of Better Business        This program is available in all
    vehicle registration or title, or the   Bureaus to settle automotive             50 states and the District of
    plate at the top left of the            disputes regarding vehicle repairs or    Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
    instrument panel and visible            the interpretation of the New Vehicle    vehicle age, mileage, and other
    through the windshield.                 Limited Warranty. Although you may       factors. General Motors reserves
                                            be required to resort to this informal   the right to change eligibility
.   Dealership name and location.                                                    limitations and/or discontinue its
                                            dispute resolution program prior to
.   Vehicle delivery date and               filing a court action, use of the        participation in this program.
    present mileage.                        program is free of charge and your
                                            case will generally be heard within
                                                                                 Customer Information             13-3

STEP THREE — Canadian                   For further information concerning         Customer Assistance
Owners: In the event that you do        eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been        Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
                                                                                   Offices
addressed after following the           call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call     Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One         the General Motors Customer                call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada       Communication Centre,                      assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its    1-800-263-3777 (English),                  wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge            1-800-263-7854 (French),                   the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program.          or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited                                                   United States
                                        The Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration    c/o Customer Communication                 Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving             Centre                                     Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service         General Motors of Canada Limited           Center
claims. The program provides for        Mail Code: CA1-163-005                     P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by     1908 Colonel Sam Drive                     Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and   Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7                    www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is      Your inquiry should be accompanied         1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute     by the Vehicle Identification              1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time       Number (VIN).                              Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final                                               Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in                                                   1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our                                                      From Puerto Rico:
impartial program offers advantages                                                1-800-496-9992 (English)
over courts in most jurisdictions                                                  1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.                                                                    From U.S. Virgin Islands:
                                                                                   1-800-496-9994
13-4      Customer Information

Canada                             Mexico, Central America, and          Online Owner Center
General Motors of Canada Limited   Caribbean Islands/Countries
                                   (Except Puerto Rico and U.S.          Chevrolet Owner
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005             Virgin Islands)                       Center (U.S.) —
1908 Colonel Sam Drive                                                   www.chevyownercenter.com
                                   General Motors de Mexico, S. de
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7            R.L. de C.V.                          Information and services
www.gm.ca                          Customer Assistance Center            customized for your specific
1-800-263-3777 (English)           Av. Ejercito Nacional #843            vehicle — all in one convenient
1-800-263-7854 (French)            Col. Granada                          place.
1-800-263-3830 (For Text           C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.              .   Digital owner manual, warranty
Telephone devices (TTYs))          01-800-466-0800                           information, and more
Roadside Assistance:               Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800      .   Store online service and
1-800-268-6800
                                                                             maintenance records
Overseas                           Customer Assistance for               .   Chevrolet dealer locator for
Please contact the local General   Text Telephone (TTY)                      service nationwide
Motors Business Unit.              Users                                 .   Exclusive privileges and offers
                                   To assist customers who are deaf,     .   Recall notices for your specific
                                   hard of hearing, or speech-impaired       vehicle
                                   and who use Text Telephones
                                   (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
                                                                         .   OnStar and GM Cardmember
                                   equipment available at its Customer       Services Earnings summaries
                                   Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
                                   the U.S. can communicate with
                                   Chevrolet by dialing:
                                   1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
                                   Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
                                                                            Customer Information             13-5

Other Helpful Links                  Here are a few of the valuable tools     GM Mobility
                                     and services you will have
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
                                     access to:
                                                                              Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
                                     .   My Showroom: Find and save
                                         information on vehicles and
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/         current offers in your area.
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do          .   My Dealers: Save details such
.   FAQ                                  as address and phone number
.   Contact Us                           for each of your preferred GM
                                         dealers.                             This program is available to
My GM Canada — www.gm.ca                                                      qualified applicants for cost
                                     .   My Driveway: Access quick links
My GM Canada is a                        to parts and service estimates,      reimbursement of eligible
password-protected section of            check trade-in values,               aftermarket adaptive equipment
www.gm.ca where you can save             or schedule a service                required for your vehicle, such as
information on GM vehicles, get          appointment by adding the            hand controls or a wheelchair/
personalized offers, and use handy       vehicles you own to your             scooter lift for the vehicle.
tools and forms with greater ease.       driveway profile.                    For more information on the limited
                                     .   My Preferences: Manage your          offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
                                         profile and use tools and forms      call the GM Mobility Assistance
                                         with greater ease.                   Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
                                                                              Telephone (TTY) users, call
                                     To sign up, visit the My GM.ca           1-800-833-9935.
                                     section within www.gm.ca.
                                                                              General Motors of Canada also has
                                                                              a Mobility Program. Call
                                                                              1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
                                                                              details. TTY users call
                                                                              1-800-263-3830.
13-6       Customer Information
                                       .   Odometer reading, Vehicle
Roadside Assistance                        Identification Number (VIN), and
                                                                              claims are made too often, or the
                                                                              same type of claim is made many
Program                                    delivery date of the vehicle       times.
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call      .   Description of the problem
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone                                               Services Provided
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).                Coverage                               .   Emergency Fuel Delivery:
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,       Services are provided up to 5 years/       Delivery of enough fuel for the
call 1-800-268-6800.                   160 000 km (100,000 miles),                vehicle to get to the nearest
                                       whichever comes first.                     service station.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.                       In the U.S., anyone driving the        .   Lock‐Out Service: Service to
                                       vehicle is covered. In Canada, a           unlock the vehicle if you are
Calling for Assistance                 person driving the vehicle without         locked out. A remote unlock may
                                       permission from the owner is not           be available if you have OnStar.
When calling Roadside Assistance,
                                       covered.                                   For security reasons, the driver
have the following information
                                                                                  must present identification
ready:                                 Roadside Assistance is not a part of       before this service is given.
.   Your name, home address, and       the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
                                       Chevrolet and General Motors of        .   Emergency Tow From a Public
    home telephone number
                                       Canada Limited reserve the right to        Road or Highway: Tow to the
.   Telephone number of your           make any changes or discontinue            nearest Chevrolet dealer for
    location                           the Roadside Assistance program at         warranty service, or if the vehicle
.   Location of the vehicle            any time without notification.             was in a crash and cannot be
                                                                                  driven. Assistance is also given
.   Model, year, color, and license    Chevrolet and General Motors of            when the vehicle is stuck in the
    plate number of the vehicle        Canada Limited reserve the right to        sand, mud, or snow.
                                       limit services or payment to an
                                       owner or driver if they decide the
                                                                                   Customer Information              13-7
.   Flat Tire Change: Service to           Services Specific to
                                                                                     .   Trip Interruption Benefits and
    change a flat tire with the spare      Canadian-Purchased Vehicles                   Assistance: Must be over
    tire. The spare tire, if equipped,                                                   250 kilometers from where
    must be in good condition and          .   Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement              your trip was started to
    properly inflated. It is the owner's       is approximately $5 Canadian.             qualify. General Motors of
    responsibility for the repair or           Diesel fuel delivery may be               Canada Limited requires
    replacement of the tire if it is not       restricted. Propane and other             pre-authorization, original
    covered by the warranty.                   fuels are not provided through            detailed receipts, and a copy of
                                               this service.                             the repair orders. Once
.   Battery Jump Start: Service to
    jump start a dead battery.             .   Lock-Out Service: Vehicle                 authorization has been received,
                                               registration is required.                 the Roadside Assistance advisor
Services Not Included in                                                                 will help to make arrangements
                                           .   Trip Routing Service: Detailed            and explain how to receive
Roadside Assistance
                                               maps of North America are                 payment.
.   Impound towing caused by                   provided when requested either
    violation of any laws.                     with the most direct route or the
                                                                                     .   Alternative Service: If
                                               most scenic route. There is a             assistance cannot be provided
.   Legal fines.                                                                         right away, the Roadside
                                               limit of six requests per year.
.   Mounting, dismounting,                     Additional travel information is          Assistance advisor may give
    or changing of snow tires,                 also available. Allow three               permission to get local
    chains, or other traction devices.         weeks for delivery.                       emergency road service. You will
                                                                                         receive payment, up to $100,
.   Towing or services for vehicles
                                                                                         after sending the original receipt
    driven on a non-public road or
                                                                                         to Roadside Assistance.
    highway.
                                                                                         Mechanical failures may be
                                                                                         covered, however any cost for
                                                                                         parts and labor for repairs not
                                                                                         covered by the warranty are the
                                                                                         owner responsibility.
13-8      Customer Information

Scheduling Service                      Courtesy Transportation                Transportation Options
Appointments                            Program                                Warranty service can generally be
                                                                               completed while you wait. However,
When your vehicle requires              To enhance your ownership
                                                                               if you are unable to wait, GM helps
warranty service, contact your          experience, we and our participating
                                                                               to minimize your inconvenience by
dealer and request an appointment.      dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
                                                                               providing several transportation
By scheduling a service                 Transportation, a customer support
                                                                               options. Depending on the
appointment and advising your           program for vehicles with the
                                                                               circumstances, your dealer can offer
service consultant of your              Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty
                                                                               you one of the following:
transportation needs, your dealer       Coverage period in Canada),
can help minimize your                  extended powertrain, and/or            Shuttle Service
inconvenience.                          hybrid‐specific warranties in both
                                                                               Shuttle service is the preferred
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled     the U.S. and Canada.
                                                                               means of offering Courtesy
into the service department             Several Courtesy Transportation        Transportation. Dealers may provide
immediately, keep driving it until it   options are available to assist in     shuttle service to get you to your
can be scheduled for service,           reducing your inconvenience when       destination with minimal interruption
unless, of course, the problem is       warranty repairs are required.         of your daily schedule. This includes
safety related. If it is, please call   Courtesy Transportation is not a       one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
your dealership, let them know this,    part of the New Vehicle Limited        within reasonable time and distance
and ask for instructions.               Warranty. A separate booklet           parameters of the dealer's area.
If the dealer requests you to bring     entitled “Warranty and Owner
the vehicle for service, you are        Assistance Information” furnished
urged to do so as early in the work     with each new vehicle provides
day as possible to allow for the        detailed warranty coverage
same day repair.                        information.
                                                                                Customer Information             13-9

Public Transportation or Fuel           Courtesy Rental Vehicle                   Additional Program
Reimbursement                           Your dealer may arrange to provide        Information
If your vehicle requires overnight      you with a courtesy rental vehicle or     All program options, such as shuttle
warranty repairs, and public            reimburse you for a rental vehicle        service, may not be available at
transportation is used instead of the   that you obtain if your vehicle is        every dealer. Please contact your
dealer's shuttle service, the expense   kept for an overnight warranty            dealer for specific information
must be supported by original           repair. Rental reimbursement will be      about availability. All Courtesy
receipts and can only be up to the      limited and must be supported by          Transportation arrangements will be
maximum amount allowed by GM            original receipts. This requires that     administered by appropriate dealer
for shuttle service. In addition, for   you sign and complete a rental            personnel.
U.S. customers, should you arrange      agreement and meet state/
transportation through a friend or      provincial, local, and rental vehicle     General Motors reserves the right to
relative, limited reimbursement for     provider requirements.                    unilaterally modify, change,
reasonable fuel expenses may be         Requirements vary and may include         or discontinue Courtesy
available. Claim amounts should         minimum age requirements,                 Transportation at any time and to
reflect actual costs and be             insurance coverage, credit card, etc.     resolve all questions of claim
supported by original receipts. See     You are responsible for fuel usage        eligibility pursuant to the terms and
your dealer for information regarding   charges and may also be                   conditions described herein at its
the allowance amounts for               responsible for taxes, levies, usage      sole discretion.
reimbursement of fuel or other          fees, excessive mileage, or rental
transportation costs.                   usage beyond the completion of the
                                        repair.
                                        It may not be possible to provide a
                                        like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
13-10       Customer Information

Collision Damage Repair                 Recycled original equipment parts       subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
                                        may also be used for repair. These      parts are not covered by your GM
If your vehicle is involved in a        parts are typically removed from        New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
collision and it is damaged, have the   vehicles that were total losses in      any vehicle failure related to such
damage repaired by a qualified          prior crashes. In most cases, the       parts is not covered by that
technician using the proper             parts being recycled are from           warranty.
equipment and quality replacement       undamaged sections of the vehicle.
parts. Poorly performed collision       A recycled original equipment GM        Repair Facility
repairs diminish your vehicle's         part may be an acceptable choice to     GM also recommends that you
resale value, and safety                maintain your vehicle's originally      choose a collision repair facility that
performance can be compromised          designed appearance and safety          meets your needs before you ever
in subsequent collisions.               performance; however, the history of    need collision repairs. Your dealer
Collision Parts                         these parts is not known. Such parts    may have a collision repair center
                                        are not covered by your GM New          with GM-trained technicians and
Genuine GM Collision parts are new      Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any       state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
parts made with the same materials      related failures are not covered by     able to recommend a collision repair
and construction methods as the         that warranty.                          center that has GM-trained
parts with which your vehicle was                                               technicians and comparable
originally built. Genuine GM            Aftermarket collision parts are also
                                        available. These are made by            equipment.
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's           companies other than GM and may
designed appearance, durability,        not have been tested for your
and safety are preserved. The use       vehicle. As a result, these parts may
of Genuine GM parts can help            fit poorly, exhibit premature
maintain your GM New Vehicle            durability/corrosion problems, and
Limited Warranty.                       may not perform properly in
                                                                             Customer Information               13-11

Insuring Your Vehicle                   If your vehicle is leased, the leasing   Gather the following information:
                                        company may require you to have          .   Driver's name, address, and
Protect your investment in your GM
                                        insurance that ensures repairs with          telephone number
vehicle with comprehensive and
                                        Genuine GM Original Equipment
collision insurance coverage. There                                              .   Driver's license number
                                        Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
are significant differences in the
                                        Genuine Manufacturer replacement         .   Owner's name, address, and
quality of coverage afforded by
                                        parts. Read your lease carefully, as         telephone number
various insurance policy terms.
                                        you may be charged at the end of
Many insurance policies provide                                                  .   Vehicle license plate number
                                        your lease for poor quality repairs.
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for
                                                                                 .   Vehicle make, model, and
                                        If a Crash Occurs                            model year
damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some       If there has been an injury, call        .   Vehicle Identification
insurance companies will not            emergency services for help. Do not
                                                                                     Number (VIN)
specify aftermarket collision parts.    leave the scene of a crash until all
                                        matters have been taken care of.         .   Insurance company and policy
When purchasing insurance, we
                                        Move the vehicle only if its position        number
recommend that you ensure that
your vehicle will be repaired with      puts you in danger, or you are           .   General description of the
GM original equipment collision         instructed to move it by a police            damage to the other vehicle
parts. If such insurance coverage is    officer.
                                                                                 Choose a reputable repair facility
not available from your current         Give only the necessary information      that uses quality replacement parts.
insurance carrier, consider switching   to police and other parties involved     See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
to another insurance carrier.           in the crash.                            section.
                                        For emergency towing see                 If the airbag has inflated, see What
                                        Roadside Assistance Program on           Will You See After an Airbag
                                        page 13‑6.                               Inflates? on page 3‑30.
13-12       Customer Information

Managing the Vehicle Damage               aftermarket parts. Discuss this with    Service Publications
Repair Process                            your repair professional, and insist
                                          on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
                                                                                  Ordering Information
In the event that your vehicle            if your vehicle is leased, you may be
requires damage repairs, GM                                                       Service Manuals
                                          obligated to have the vehicle
recommends that you take an active        repaired with Genuine GM parts,         Service Manuals have the diagnosis
role in its repair. If you have a         even if your insurance coverage         and repair information on the
pre-determined repair facility of         does not pay the full cost.             engines, transmission, axle,
choice, take your vehicle there,                                                  suspension, brakes, electrical,
or have it towed there. Specify to        If another party's insurance            steering, body, etc.
the facility that any required            company is paying for the repairs,
replacement collision parts be            you are not obligated to accept a       Service Bulletins
original equipment parts, either new      repair valuation based on that          Service Bulletins give additional
Genuine GM parts or recycled              insurance company's collision policy    technical service information
original GM parts. Remember,              repair limits, as you have no           needed to knowledgeably service
recycled parts will not be covered by     contractual limits with that company.   General Motors cars and trucks.
your GM vehicle warranty.                 In such cases, you can have control     Each bulletin contains instructions
                                          of the repair and parts choices as      to assist in the diagnosis and
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,   long as the cost stays within
but you must live with the repair.                                                service of your vehicle.
                                          reasonable limits.
Depending on your policy limits,                                                  Owner Information
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using                                                  Owner publications are written
                                                                                  specifically for owners and intended
                                                                                  to provide basic operational
                                                                                  information about the vehicle. The
                                                                                  Owner Manual includes the
                                                                                  Maintenance Schedule for all
                                                                                  models.
                                                                          Customer Information           13-13

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,   ORDER TOLL FREE:                       Reporting Safety
Owner Manual, and Warranty            1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
Booklet.                              8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time         Defects
RETAIL SELL PRICE:                    For Credit Card Orders Only
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and       (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit      Reporting Safety Defects
shipping fees                         Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com         to the United States
Without Portfolio: Owner              Or you can write to:                   Government
Manual only.                          Helm, Incorporated                     If you believe that your vehicle
RETAIL SELL PRICE:                    P.O. Box 07130                         has a defect which could cause
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and       Detroit, MI 48207                      a crash or could cause injury or
shipping fees                         Prices are subject to change without   death, you should immediately
Current and Past Models               notice and without incurring           inform the National Highway
                                      obligation. Allow ample time for       Traffic Safety Administration
Technical Service Bulletins and       delivery.
Manuals are available for current                                            (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
and past model GM vehicles.           Note to Canadian Customers: All        General Motors.
                                      listed prices are quoted in U.S.
                                      funds. Canadian residents are to
                                                                             If NHTSA receives similar
                                      make checks payable in U.S. funds.     complaints, it may open an
                                                                             investigation, and if it finds that
                                                                             a safety defect exists in a group
                                                                             of vehicles, it may order a recall
                                                                             and remedy campaign.
                                                                             However, NHTSA cannot
                                                                             become involved in individual
                                                                             problems between you, your
                                                                             dealer, or General Motors.
13-14     Customer Information

To contact NHTSA, you may call   Reporting Safety Defects            Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline       to the Canadian                     to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
                                 Government                          In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or      If you live in Canada, and you      Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to:                        believe that your vehicle has a     this, notify General Motors.
                                 safety defect, notify Transport     Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA             Canada immediately, and notify
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.                                         Chevrolet Motor Division
                                 General Motors of Canada Limited.
Washington, D.C. 20590                                               Chevrolet Customer Assistance
                                 Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
                                                                     Center
You can also obtain other        write to:
                                                                     P.O. Box 33170
information about motor          Transport Canada                    Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from              Road Safety Branch
                                                                     In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov.         2780 Sheffield Road
                                                                     (English) or 1-800-263-7854
                                 Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
                                                                     (French), or write:
                                                                     General Motors of Canada Limited
                                                                     Customer Communication Centre,
                                                                     Mail Code: CA1-163-005
                                                                     1908 Colonel Sam Drive
                                                                     Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
                                                                                  Customer Information             13-15

Vehicle Data                             Event Data Recorders                        This data can help provide a better
                                                                                     understanding of the circumstances
Recording and                            This vehicle has an Event Data              in which crashes and injuries occur.
                                         Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Privacy                                  of an EDR is to record, in certain          Important: EDR data is recorded
                                         crash or near crash-like situations,        by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
Your GM vehicle has a number of                                                      crash situation occurs; no data is
sophisticated computers that record      such as an airbag deployment or
                                         hitting a road obstacle, data that will     recorded by the EDR under normal
information about the vehicle’s                                                      driving conditions and no personal
performance and how it is driven.        assist in understanding how a
                                         vehicle's systems performed. The            data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
For example, your vehicle uses                                                       crash location) is recorded.
computer modules to monitor and          EDR is designed to record data
                                         related to vehicle dynamics and             However, other parties, such as law
control engine and transmission                                                      enforcement, could combine the
performance, to monitor the              safety systems for a short period of
                                         time, typically 30 seconds or less.         EDR data with the type of
conditions for airbag deployment                                                     personally identifying data routinely
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,      The EDR in this vehicle is designed
                                         to record such data as:                     acquired during a crash
if so equipped, to provide antilock                                                  investigation.
braking to help the driver control the   .   How various systems in your
vehicle. These modules may store             vehicle were operating                  To read data recorded by an EDR,
data to help your dealer technician                                                  special equipment is required, and
service your vehicle. Some modules
                                         .   Whether or not the driver and           access to the vehicle or the EDR is
may also store data about how you            passenger safety belts were             needed. In addition to the vehicle
operate the vehicle, such as rate of         buckled/fastened                        manufacturer, other parties, such as
fuel consumption or average speed.       .   How far, if at all, the driver was      law enforcement, that have the
These modules may also retain the            pressing the accelerator and/or         special equipment, can read the
owner’s personal preferences, such           brake pedal                             information if they have access to
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,                                                   the vehicle or the EDR.
                                         .   How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings.                    traveling
13-16       Customer Information

GM will not access this data or         www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by           Radio Frequency
share it with others except: with the   pressing the Q button and
consent of the vehicle owner or,
                                                                                Statement
                                        speaking to an advisor.
if the vehicle is leased, with the                                              This vehicle has systems that
consent of the lessee; in response      Radio Frequency                         operate on a radio frequency that
to an official request by police or                                             comply with Part 15 of the Federal
similar government office; as part of   Identification (RFID)                   Communications Commission (FCC)
GM's defense of litigation through      RFID technology is used in some         rules and with Industry Canada
the discovery process; or, as           vehicles for functions such as tire     Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
required by law. Data that GM           pressure monitoring and ignition        Operation is subject to the following
collects or receives may also be        system security, as well as in          two conditions:
used for GM research needs or may       connection with conveniences such
be made available to others for         as key fobs for remote door locking/    1. The device may not cause
research purposes, where a need is      unlocking and starting, and                interference.
shown and the data is not tied to a     in-vehicle transmitters for garage      2. The device must accept any
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.      door openers. RFID technology in           interference received, including
                                        GM vehicles does not use or record         interference that may cause
OnStar®                                 personal information or link with any      undesired operation of the
If your vehicle is equipped with an     other GM system containing                 device.
active OnStar system, that system       personal information.
                                                                                Changes or modifications to any of
may also record data in crash or                                                these systems by other than an
near crash‐like situations. The                                                 authorized service facility could void
OnStar Terms and Conditions                                                     authorization to use this equipment.
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit, at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
                                                                                                                                                              INDEX                  i-1

                           A                                  Airbags                                                         Audio System
                                                               Adding Equipment to the                                         Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Accessories and
                                                                 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36       Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
                                                               Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12                            Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Add-On Electrical
                                                               Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12                Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-25
 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
                                                               Servicing Airbag-Equipped                                       Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Adding Equipment to the
                                                                 Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36       Automatic Transmission
 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-36
                                                               System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24                Shift Lock Control
Adjustments
                                                              Alarm System                                                     Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
 Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
                                                               Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10       Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16
                                                              AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Air Filter, Passenger
 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
                                                              Antenna                                                                                     B
                                                               Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10         Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
                                                              Anti-Theft                                                       Inadvertent Power Saver . . . . . . 6-5
Airbag System
                                                               Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10                Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
                                                              Antilock Brake                                                  Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-30
 How Does an Airbag
                                                               System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30              Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
   Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
                                                               Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17             Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
 Passenger Sensing
                                                              Appearance Care                                                  Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
   System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
                                                               Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76        Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
 What Makes an Airbag
                                                               Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80     Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
   Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
                                                              Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7    Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17
 What Will You See After
                                                              Assistance Program,
   an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-30
                                                               Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
 When Should an Airbag
                                                              Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
   Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
                                                               CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-26
i-2         INDEX

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35             Carbon Monoxide                                                  Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
 Center High-Mounted                                        Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24                Cleaning
  Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-34                      Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9     Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4      Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7    Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
 Front Turn Signal,                                         Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9            Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
  Sidemarker, and                                          Cautions, Danger, and                                             Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
  Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32               Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv      Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31           CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10         Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30               Center High-Mounted                                              Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31          Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-34                        Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
 License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-35                   Central Door Unlock System . . . . 2-6                           Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10
 Taillamps, Turn Signal,                                   Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61           Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
  Sidemarker, Stoplamps,                                   Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13                       Computer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
  and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-33                   Check                                                            Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56            Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14            Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
                                                            Ignition                                                        Coolant
                          C                                   Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-29                        Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
California                                                 Child Restraints                                                  Engine Temperature
 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-35                Infants and Young                                                  Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
 Perchlorate Materials                                        Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41        Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
  Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3            Lower Anchors and                                               Courtesy Transportation
 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3      Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-48                     Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii                 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38              Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Capacities and                                              Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-59              Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2        Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43         Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
                                                           Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
                                                                                                                                                               INDEX                i-3

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4                   Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15                                           E
 Text Telephone (TTY)                                          Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
                                                                                                                                Electrical Equipment,
  Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4      Door
                                                                                                                                 Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Customer Assistance                                             Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
                                                                                                                                Electrical System
 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3     Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
                                                                                                                                 Engine Compartment
Customer Information                                            Central Door Unlocking
                                                                                                                                   Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
 Service Publications                                             System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
                                                                                                                                 Fuses and Circuit
  Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12                        Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
                                                                                                                                   Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Customer Satisfaction                                          Driving
                                                                                                                                 Instrument Panel Fuse
 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1         Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
                                                                                                                                   Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
                                                                Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
                                                                                                                                 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
                            D                                   Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
                                                                                                                                Engine
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10                        Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
                                                                                                                                 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Danger, Warnings, and                                           If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
                                                                                                                                 Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . .5-19
 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv    Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
                                                                                                                                 Check and Service Engine
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15                       Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
                                                                                                                                   Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Daytime Running                                                 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
                                                                                                                                 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-8
 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2            Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
                                                                                                                                 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Daytime Running Lamps                                          Driving for Better Fuel
                                                                                                                                 Coolant Temperature
 (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20                   Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
                                                                                                                                   Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2                                                                              Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
                                                                                                                                 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
                                                                                                                                 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
                                                                                                                                 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
i-4          INDEX

Engine (cont.)                                                Fog Lamps                                                         Fuses
 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18            Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4                    Engine Compartment
 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-25                     Front Fog Lamps                                                      Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19        Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20     Fuses and Circuit
Engine Oil                                                    Front Seats                                                          Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
 Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12           Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3            Instrument Panel Fuse
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15                    Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1              Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-22                Front Turn Signal
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1                   Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32                                                   G
                                                              Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34   Gasoline
                           F                                   Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36           Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Filter                                                         Filling a Portable Fuel                                          Gauges
 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16                      Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39             Engine Coolant
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2        Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37                 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3                       Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-36                            Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61    Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-35                         Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64                Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10         Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84       Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20                          Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Fluid                                                          Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35                     Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13                          Requirements, California . . . . .9-35                            Warning Lights and
 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26     Fuel Economy                                                        Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23                Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
                                                                                                                                                                   INDEX                   i-5

General Information                                           Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8                                                     K
 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1                       Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
                                                                                                                                 Keyless Entry
 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39   Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
                                                                                                                                  Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3         How to Wear Safety Belts
                                                                                                                                 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1      Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
                                                                                                                                 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement                                     Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
                                                                                             I                                                                 L
                                                                                                                                 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-42
                           H                                  Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
                                                                                                                                 Lamps
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31           Ignition Transmission Lock
                                                                                                                                  Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3                       Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
                                                                                                                                  Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2           Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
                                                                                                                                  Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31         Inadvertent Power Battery
                                                                                                                                  License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30       Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
                                                                                                                                  Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14
 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31                   Infants and Young Children,
                                                                                                                                 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
 Daytime Running                                                Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
                                                                                                                                 LATCH System
   Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2          Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
                                                                                                                                  Replacing Parts After a
 Daytime Running Lamps                                        Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1
                                                                                                                                     Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
   (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-20
                                                                                                                                 Latch, Lower Anchors and
 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2                                      J                                     Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-20                   Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70              Liftgate
 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
                                                                                                                                  Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
                                                                                                                                 Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
                                                                                                                                 Lighting
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
                                                                                                                                  Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
i-6           INDEX

Lights                                                            Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5          Mirrors
 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12                   Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20                     Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
 Antilock Brake System                                            Lower Anchors and Tethers                                       Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
   (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17                   for Children (LATCH                                            Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
 Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . .5-19                       SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48           Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13                    Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4                 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21                Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4       Monitor System, Tire
 Daytime Running                                                                                                                  Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
   Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20                                           M                                   Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21          Maintenance
 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18                       Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9                                    N
 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2            Maintenance Schedule                                           New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
 Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20                     Recommended Fluids and
 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
                                                                    Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6                                      O
                                                                   Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2                        Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20                     Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14
 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11                                                                                       Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
                                                                  Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13            Off-Road
 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18              Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
 Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17                                                                         Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
                                                                   Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15   Oil
Locks                                                             Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
 Central Door Unlocking                                                                                                           Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . .5-19
   System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6                                                                       Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5                                                                   Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6                                                                     Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
                                                                                                                                 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-38
                                                                                                                                 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
                                                                                                                                 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
                                                                                                                                                                  INDEX                 i-7

Operation, Infotainment                                           Power                                                            Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2        Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13     Recommended Fluids and
Outlets                                                            Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5      Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5       Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23              Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21                      Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15           Records
                                                                  Pregnancy, Using Safety                                           Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
                             P                                     Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22    Recreational Vehicle
Park                                                              Privacy                                                           Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21           Radio Frequency                                                 Reimbursement Program,
 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23                 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16                      GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23      Program                                                          Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31       Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8                          System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
 Brake and P (Park)                                               Proposition 65 Warning,                                          Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
   Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29                           California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3       Replacement Parts
 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24                                                                                            Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Parking Lamps                                                                                 R                                     Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32                       Radio Frequency                                                  Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38
Passenger Airbag Status                                            Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16                     Replacing LATCH System
 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12          Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16              Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Passenger Compartment Air                                         Radios                                                           Replacing Safety Belt
 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5    AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3              System Parts After a
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-31                                Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8          Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Perchlorate Materials                                              Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6   Reporting Safety Defects
 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3                          Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6, 3-8             Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14
                                                                  Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5                              General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
                                                                  Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14                 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
i-8          INDEX

Restraints                                                      Safety Defects Reporting                                     Service (cont.)
 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46              Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14                        Maintenance, General
Roadside Assistance                                              General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14                 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6        U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13                  Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Roof                                                            Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6      Publications Ordering
 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16      Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-23                    Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54           Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6       Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3                       Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2                     Servicing the
Running the Vehicle While                                       Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8                      Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-36
 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25      Seats                                                        Shift Lock Control Function
                                                                 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3            Check, Automatic
                            S                                    Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2            Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11          Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4                      Shifting
 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23    Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6, 3-8    Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22        Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4                Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
 How to Wear Safety Belts                                       Securing Child                                               Sidemarker
  Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14         Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-59            Bulb Replacement . . . 10-32, 10-33
 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20                  Security                                                     Signals, Turn and
 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11          Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10    Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
 Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-23                        Service                                                      Spare Tire
 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-22                        Accessories and                                              Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
                                                                  Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4          Specifications and
                                                                 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-5                      Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
                                                                 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14               Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
                                                                 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9                    Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-28
                                                                                                                             Starting the Engine . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19
                                                                                                                                                                  INDEX                  i-9

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4       Tires (cont.)                                                Transmission
 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23                 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69                Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1                     Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45             Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2                 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57           Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps                                         If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-61               Transportation Program,
 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33                         Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-51                       Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Storage Areas                                                       Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53        Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1      Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18          Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1            Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-50                         Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11              Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54      Turn and Lane-Change
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16           Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42                Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16        Terminology and                                             Turn Signal
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv        Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45        Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
                                                                    Uniform Tire Quality
                              T                                       Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58                                    U
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9            Wheel Alignment and Tire                                    Uniform Tire Quality
Taillamps                                                             Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59        Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33                         Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60                     Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4                               When It Is Time for New                                     Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12                            Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12             Towing
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5    General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Tires                                                               Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-74
 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56                       Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
i-10            INDEX

                            V                                   Wheels
                                                                 Alignment and Tire
Vehicle
                                                                  Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
                                                                 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
                                                                 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
                                                                When It Is Time for New
 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
                                                                 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
                                                                Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-46
Vehicle Care
                                                                Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
                                                                 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Vehicle Identification
                                                                 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
                                                                Windshield
 Service Parts Identification
                                                                 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
   Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
                                                                Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
                                                                Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-30
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
                                                                Wipers
                                                                 Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
                           W
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Stats:
views:982
posted:5/2/2011
language:English
pages:328
Description: Owners Manual for the 2011 Chevy Aveo